Home

8360 B-Series Swept Signal Generator User's Guide

1. For operator s service information see the Chapter 4 Operator s Check and Routine Maintenance The operator accessible softkeys are described in that chapter Complete SERVICE menu and softkey information is provided in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide Table 3 9 cross references the actions that the instrument can perform with the programming commands that will prompt those actions Operating and Programming Reference 2 1 Address Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM The 8360 Adrs softkey lets you change the GPIB address of the swept signal generator Enter the address desired using the numeric entry keys or the up down arrow keys The address value may be set between 0 and 30 The swept signal generator stores the address value in non volatile memory The default address of the swept signal generator is 19 SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess Analyzer NONE Connectors GPIB Menu Instrument Addresses in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Adrs Menu Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This softkey accesses the GPIB address menu Meter Adrs Controls the system power meter address 8360 Adrs Can control the swept signal generator s address depending on th
2. The following table lists the equipment used in the operation examples shown in this chapter You can substitute equipment but be aware that you may get different results than those shown Equipment Used In Examples Equipment Recommended HP Agilent Model Numbers Power Meter 436A 437B Power Sensor 8485A Power Splitter 11667B Oscilloscope 1740A mm Wave Source Module 83556A Power Amplifier 8349B Coupler 11691D Detector 8474D Getting Started Basic Introducing the 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generators The 8360 B Series swept signal generators are high performance broadband frequency swept signal generators SWEEP FREQUENCY C e o ee 9 e Ce eA eb POWER INSTRUMENT STATE SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE PRESET preset cdr Figure 1 1 The Agilent 83620B Swept Signal Generator PRESET initializes the front panel settings and runs the swept signal generator through a brief self test In the following examples unless stated otherwise begin by pressing PRESET Getting Started Basic 1 3 Display Area ACTIVE ENTRY AND DATA DISPLAY AREA MESSAGE LINE SOFTKEY LABEL AREA 1 4 Getting Started Basic SOFTKEYS Figure 1 2 Display Active Entry and Data Display Area This area typically displays the frequency and power inf
3. E Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes FREQUENCY NONE This hardkey activates swept frequency mode and makes the stop frequency parameter the active function The start stop frequency must be separated by at least 2 Hz in order to remain in the frequency sweep mode If start stop frequency then the zero span mode is entered SCPI FREQuency STOP lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE 5 W Eep Analyzer FB lt num gt Hz Kz Mz Gz Operating and Programming Reference S 71 See Also CENTER CW FREQUENCY menu SPAN START CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 SWEEP Function Group SWEEP Menu Map 7 Description This hardkey accesses the sweep menu softkeys Manual Sweep Start Sweep Trigger Auto Start Sweep Trigger Bus Start Sweep Trigger Ext Sweep Mode List Sweep Mode Ramp Sweep Mode Step Swplime Auto TrigQut Delay S 72 Operating and Programming Reference Activates manual sweep mode Depending on what parameter is sweeping frequency and or power can be changed manually with the rotary knob or the arrow keys Automatically triggers a sweep when SINGLE or CONT is pressed Waits for an GPIB trigger to trigger a sweep when SINGLE or CONT is pressed Waits for an external hardware trigger to trigger a sweep when SINGLE
4. Fltness Menu Function Group Menu Map Description POWER This softkey reveals the softkeys in the flatness correction menu that control user defined leveling parameters Auto Fill Incr Auto Fill Pts Auto Fill Start Auto Fill Stop Clear Point Copy List CorPair Disable Delete Menu Enter Corr Enter Freq Freq Follow Mtr Meas Menu Automatically creates a frequency list with all points separated by the specified increment in a given frequency range Automatically creates a frequency list containing the specified number of points in a given frequency range Sets the start frequency of the flatness correction array that will load automatically when either the number of points or the increment size is specified Sets the stop frequency of the flatness array that will load automatically when either the number of points or the increment size is specified Changes the power correction value for the indicated frequency point to the undefined state Copies the frequency list see List Menu into the frequency parameter of the flatness correction array Disables the frequency correction pair array and uses the GPIB transferred 1601 point correction set to apply correction information Reveals the delete softkeys Enables the entry of a power correction value for a frequency point Enables the entry of a single frequency point into the flatness correction array Sets the swept signal g
5. RECALL Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This hardkey retrieves a front panel setting that was previously stored in a SAVE register 1 through 8 SCPI RCL lt num gt The above is an IEEE 488 2 common command Analyzer RCn where n a numeric value from 0 to 9 SAVE SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Saving and Recalling an Instrument State in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Ref Osc Menu Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This softkey reveals the softkeys in the frequency standard menu 10 MHz Freq Standard Auto Automatically selects the frequency standard to be used by the swept signal generator 10 MHz Freq Standard Extrnl Sets the swept signal generator to accept an external frequency standard as its reference 10 MHz Freq Standard Intrnl Sets the swept signal generator to use its internal frequency standard as its reference Operating and Programming Reference R 1 Ref Osc Menu 10 MHz Freq Standard None Sets the swept signal generator to free run operation where no frequency standard is used Programming Codes SCPI ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EX Ternal NONe Analyzer NONE See Also Softkeys listed above RF ON OFF Function Group POWER Menu Map NONE Description This hardkey turns the RF power output on or off Press RF_ON OFF If the yellow LED above the hardkey is off power is off and RF
6. REMOTE device selector where the device selector is the address of the instrument appended to the GPIB port number Typically the GPIB port number is 7 and the default address for the swept signal generator is 19 so the device selector is 719 Some BASIC examples 10 REMOTE 7 which prepares all GPIB instruments for remote operation although nothing appears to happen to the instruments until they are addressed to talk or 10 REMOTE 719 which affects the GPIB instrument located at address 19 or 10 REMOTE 719 721 726 715 which effects four instruments that have addresses 19 21 26 and 15 Related statements used by some computers RESUME Local Lockout Local Lockout can be used in conjunction with REMOTE to disable the front panel LOCAL key With the CocaL key disabled only the controller or a hard reset by the POWER switch can restore local control The syntax is LOCAL interface select LOCKOUT code A BASIC example 10 REMOTE 719 20 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 1 58 Getting Started Programming Local Local is the complement to REMOTE causing an instrument to return to local control with a fully enabled front panel The syntax is device selector Some BASIC examples 10 LOCAL 7 which effects all instruments in the network or 10 LOCAL 719 for an addressed instrument address 19 Related statements used by some computers RESUME Clear Clear causes all GPIB instruments or
7. 14 15 Enter Correction Data into Array Select Mtr Meas Menu Measure Corr All The power meter is now under swept signal generator control and is performing the sequence of steps necessary to generate the correction information at each frequency point If a GPIB error message is displayed verify that the interface connections are correct Check the GPIB address of the power meter and ensure that it is the same address the swept signal generator is using address 13 is assumed Refer to the menu map 8 System for the key sequence necessary to reach softkey Meter Adrs Enable User Flatness Correction When the operation is complete a message is displayed the flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup To save the swept signal generator parameters including the correction table in an internal register press SAVE n n number 1 through 8 Disconnect the power meter sensor and press amber LED on The power produced at the point where the power meter sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the frequencies and power level specified above Note Scalar Analysis Measurement with User Flatness Corrections Example 4 The following example demonstrates how to set up a scalar analysis measurement using an HP Agilent 8757 Scalar Network Analyzer of a 2 to 20 GHz test device such as an amplifier User flatness correction is used to compensate for power variations at the test port of a direc
8. ALC MoD Pulse Menu Pulse On Off Scalar Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey activates pulse modulation mode and sets the internal pulse generator to produce 27 778 kHz square wave pulses 18 us pulse width 36 us pulse period The rise and fall times of the RF envelope are approximately 2 us These pulses allow proper operation with Agilent scalar network analyzers in ac detection mode An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI PULSe SOURce SCALar PULSe STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer SHPM function on PMO function off atc moD Pulse Menu Chapter 3 P 20 Operating and Programming Reference Pulse Rate Pulse Period Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey lets you set a value for the internal pulse generator s pulse period The range of acceptable values is from 2 us to 65 5 ms The factory preset value is 2 ms When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area SCPI PULSe TIMing PERiod lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE atc MoD Pulse Menu Pulse Rate Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MODULATION This softkey lets you set the internal pulse generators pulse repetition rate The repetition rate can vary from 15 26 Hz to 500 kHz T
9. Enter Correction Data into Array Select Mtr Meas Menu Measure Corr All The power meter is now under swept signal generator control and is performing the sequence of steps necessary to generate the correction information at each frequency point If a GPIB error message is displayed verify that the interface connections are correct Check the GPIB address of the power meter and ensure that it is the same address the swept signal generator is using address 13 is assumed Refer to the menu map 8 System for the key sequence necessary to reach softkey Meter Adrs Enable User Flatness Correction When the operation is complete a message is displayed the flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup Disconnect the power meter sensor and press FLTNESS ON OFF amber LED on The power produced at the point where the power meter sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the frequencies and power level specified above Getting Started Advanced 1 35 1 36 Getting Started Advanced Creating a User Flatness Array Example 2 This example shows how to use the swept signal generator and a power meter in manual entry mode This example also introduces two features of the swept signal generator The softkey Freq Follow simplifies the data entry process and the softkey List Mode sets up a list of arbitrary test frequencies The frequency follow feature automatically sets the source to a CW test frequency equivalent t
10. Entry Area in Chapter 1 Ext Det Cal Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This softkey enables the swept signal generator to act as a controller to an HP Agilent 437B power meter This softkey causes an immediate execute on the interface bus and generates an GPIB error if no power meter is present on the interface bus or if the swept signal generator is unable to address the power meter Use external detector calibration to characterize and compensate for an external negative diode detector used in an external leveling configuration SCPI CALibration PMETer DETector INITiate DIODe CALibration PMETer DETector NEXT lt num gt lvl suffix Analyzer NONE Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 E 6 Operating and Programming Reference Fault Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes SERVICE This softkey accesses the fault information softkeys Use this softkey if a fault is indicated on the message line Fault Info 1 Fault Info 2 Fault Info 3 Clear Fault Indicates the latched status of PEAK TRACK RAMP SPAN V GHZ and ADC Indicates the latched status of EEROM PWRON CALCO PLLZERO PLLWAIT and FNXFER Indicates the latched status of CALYO CALMAN TMR CNFLCT and SEARCH Clears all latched fault status messages SCPI DIAGnostics 0UTput FAULts This command produces a string of ones and zeroes
11. This is to certify that this product meets the radio frequency interference requirements of Directive FTZ 1046 1984 The German Bundespost has been notified that this equipment was put into circulation and has been granted the right to check the product type for compliance with these requirements Note If test and measurement equipment is operated with unshielded cables and or used for measurements on open set ups the user must insure that under these operating conditions the radio frequency interference limits are met at the border of his premises Model Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series swept signal generator Hiermit wird bescheinigt dass dieses Gerat System in Ubereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen von Postverfiigung 1046 84 funkentst rt ist Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerates Systems angezeight und die Berechtigung zur Uberprifung der Serie auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen eingeraumt Zustzinformation f r Mess und Testgerate Werden Mess und Testgerate mit ungeschirmten Kabeln und oder in offenen Messaufbauten verwendet so ist vom Betreiber sicherzustellen dass die Funk Entst rbestimmungen unter Betriebsbedingungen an seiner Grundstticksgrenze eingehalten werden Declaration of Conformity DECL ARATION OF CONF OR MITY According to ISO IEC Guide 22 and CEN CENELEC EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Agilent Technologies Inc Manufacturer s Address 1400 Fountaingrove Parkw
12. oOo WwW bh Select Preset Mode User Whenever the PRESET key is pressed the swept signal generator will return to the operation state setup and saved in steps 1 and 4 The swept signal generator displays USER DEFINED PRESET RECALLED and also gives you the option of selecting the factory preset state by creating a factory preset softkey Getting Started Programming Programming GPIB the General Purpose Interface Bus is the instrument to instrument communication system between the swept signal generator and up to 14 other instruments Any instrument having GPIB capability can be interfaced to the swept signal generator including non HP Agilent instruments that have GPIB TEEE 488 ANSI MC1 1 or IEC 625 capability these are common generic terms for GPIB all are electrically equivalent although IEC 625 uses a unique connector This portion of the manual specifically describes interfacing the swept signal generator to one type of instrument a computer The first part of this section provides general GPIB information Later the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language SCPI is introduced and example programs are given For information on programming in the Control Interface Intermediate Language CIIL refer to a separate option 700 manual supplement Getting Started Programming 1 55 GPIB General Information Interconnecting Cables Instrument Addres
13. Leveling Point Module Mdl Lev Menu Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects Uncoupl Atten Leveling Mode Normal Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects Leveling Mode ALCoff Leveling Mode Search Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance Fltness Menu Delete Menu Auto Fill Start Auto Fill Stop Auto Fill Incr Mtr Meas Menu FLTNESS ON OFF Enter Freq Enter Corr Freq Follow List Menu Copy List Sweep Mode List Ext Det Cal Getting Started Advanced 1 21 Advanced Table 1 1 Keys Under Discussion in This Section continued Paragraph Heading Keys Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance Auto Track continued Peak RF Always Peak RF Once Swp Span Cal Once Swp Span Cal Always AM BW Cal Always AM BW Cal Once FullUsr Cal AM On Off 100 V AM On Off 10dB V Deep AM USER DEFINED MENU ASSIGN Using Step Sweep Step Swp Menu Creating and Using a Frequency List List Menu Delete Menu Enter List Freq Enter List Offset Enter List Dwell Pt Trig Menu Using the Security Features Zero Freq Save Lock Clear Memory Blank Display Changing the Preset Parameters Save Usr Preset Preset Mode User PRESET For more information each of these keys has a separate entry in Chapter 2 1 22 Getting Started Advanced Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator Leveling
14. Operating and Programming Reference S 25 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values SYSTem ALTernate save recall register numeric 1 to 8 JMAXimum MINimum STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 gt COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess instrument address numeric 1 to 30 DUMP PRINter ERRor KEY ASSign key code assign numeric 0 to 511 1 to 14 excluding 5 and 10 CLEar clears user menu numeric 1 to 14 ALL DISable save lock discrete SAVE ENABle save lock discrete SAVE LANGuage language selection discrete SCPI CIIL COMPatible gt MMHead SELect discrete FRONt REAR NONE AUTO Boolean ON OFFo 1 PRESet EXEC SAVE TYPE preset mode discrete FACTory USER SECurity COUnt memory clear numeric 0 to 32767 MAXimum MINimum STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 VERSion TRIGger IMMediate ODELay output delay extended numeric 0 to 3 2s SOURce trig source discrete IMMediate BUS EX Ternal TSWeep equivalent of ABORt INITiate IMMediate UNIT AM AM depth units discrete DB PCT POWer default power units string DBM S 26 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e ABORt Causes the sweep in progress to abort and reset If INIT CONT is ON it immediately restarts the sweep The pending operation flag driving OPC WAI and OPC undergoes a transition once the sweep is reset o AM DEPTh lt num
15. Ordering Manuals A manual part number is listed on the title page of this manual You may use it to order extra copies of this manual See Replaceable Parts in Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for a complete list of Agilent Technologies 8360 documentation and ordering numbers vii Typeface Conventions Regulatory Information viii The following conventions are used in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series documentation Italics Italic type is used for emphasis and for titles of manuals and other publications Computer Computer type is used for information displayed on the instrument For example In this sequence POWER LEVEL is displayed Hardkeys Instrument keys are represented in key cap You are instructed to press a hardkey Softkeys Softkeys are located just below the display and their functions depend on the current display These keys are represented in softkey You are instructed to select a softkey This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 1010 Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus and has been supplied in a safe condition The instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition Manufacturer s Declaration Note Note
16. SWE Sweep Condition MODE MODE MODE MODE GEN CW Non swept CW FIX ignored ignored ignored Analog freq sweep SWE FIX AUTO ignored ANAL Manual analog freq sweep SWE FIX MAN ignored ANAL Stepped freq sweep SWE FIX AUTO ignored STEP Manual step freq sweep SWE FIX MAN ignored STEP CW with analog power CW SWE AUTO ignored ANAL sweep CW with manual analog CW SWE MAN ignored ANAL power sweep CW with stepped power CW SWE AUTO ignored STEP sweep CW with manual stepped CW SWE MAN ignored STEP power sweep Analog frequency and SWE SWE AUTO ignored ANAL power sweep Manual analog frequency SWE SWE MAN ignored ANAL and power sweep Stepped frequency and SWE SWE AUTO ignored STEP power sweep Manual stepped frequency SWE SWE MAN ignored STEP and power sweep List sweep LIST ignored ignored AUTO ignored Manual list sweep LIST ignored ignored MAN ignored e SWEep GENeration STEPped ANALog e SWEep GENeration Sets and queries the type of sweep to be generated an analog sweep or a digitally stepped sweep In either case all of the other sweep subsystem functions apply RST is ANALog e SWEep MANual POINt lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e SWEep MANual POINt MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the step point number to go to and lock The value is a unitless value that is limited between 1 and the number of points requested This command has no effect on the instrument unless the sweep mode is set to manual and the sweep generation is set to steppe
17. See Also SCPI FREQuency STARt lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE SWEep Analyzer FA lt num gt Hz Kz Mz Gz CENTER cw FREQUENCY menu SPAN STOP CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Start M1 Stop M2 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey changes the swept signal generator start frequency to the frequency value of marker 1 and the stop frequency to the frequency value of marker 2 The swept signal generator has been reset to these start stop values unlike the softkey Mi M2 Sweep that changes the start stop values only while active SCPI SWEep FREQuency MARKer XFER Analyzer SHMP M1 M2 Sweep Marker Operation in Chapter 1 S 62 Operating and Programming Reference Start Sweep Trigger Bus Start Sweep Trigger Auto Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP When this softkey is selected the swept signal generator automatically triggers a sweep This is the fastest way to accomplish the sweep retrace cycle An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Analyzer T1 CONT SINGLE Sweep Menu Start Sweep Trigger Bus Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP When this
18. Select Leveling Point PwrMtr oOo e oN Select Pwr Mtr Range Enter the range value set for the power meter as noted in step 1 6 Select Coupling Factor press 0 dB m Unlike detector leveling power meter leveling provides calibrated power out of the leveled RF port Hint To obtain flatness corrected power refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in the Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance section Getting Started Advanced 1 27 Leveling with MM wave Millimeter wave source module leveling is similar to power meter Source Modules leveling The following figures illustrate the setups for leveling with a mm wave source module SWEPT SIGNAL GENERATOR RF OUT ADAPTER IF REQUIRED MM HAVE SOURCE MODULE LEVELED OUTPUT SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE Figure 1 14 MM wave Source Module Leveling High power model swept signal generators can externally level mm wave source modules to maximum specified power without a microwave amplifier 1 28 Getting Started Advanced SWEPT SIGNAL GENERATOR RF OUT ADAPTER IF REQUIRED MICROWAVE AMPLIFIER RF OUT MM WAVE SOURCE MODULE RF_IN LEVELED OUTPUT SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE Figure 1 15 MM wave Source Module Leveling Using a Microwave Amplifier Hint Set up the equipment as shown Refer to menu map 1 Select Leveling Poin
19. Watch the relative power indication on the power meter At the end of the sweep the power meter indicates 7 dB The active entry area on the swept signal generator indicates gt POWER SWEEP 7 00 dB SWP Now enter 2 4B m power sweep is still the active entry function Press SINGLE This time the power meter indicates less than the power sweep requested Note that the swept signal generator is unleveled UNLVD This happens because the swept signal generator s output power at the start of the sweep is 0 dB and the requested power sweep takes the swept signal generator beyond the range where it is able to produce leveled power The range of the power sweep is dependent on the ALC range and can be offset if a step attenuator Option 001 is present Select Power Sweep to turn this function off no asterisk Press POWER LEVEL 2 0 On the power meter press dB REF to reset the reference level Select Power Sweep asterisk on Press SINGLE The swept signal generator performs a power sweep beginning at 20 dBm and ending at 5 dBm The power meter indicates 25 dB Power Slope Operation This function allows for compensation of high frequency system or Power Sweep cable losses by linearly increasing the power output as the frequency increases For this example refer to the Menu Map section Press Power Slope the active entry area displays gt RF SLOPE X XX dB GHz where X
20. and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference l 3 Internal AM Waveform Square Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the AM waveform to square wave for internally generated AM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The factory preset default is sine wave SCPI AM INTernal FUNCtion SQUare Analyzer NONE MOD also see AM and Modulation Internal AM Waveform Triangle Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the AM waveform to triangle wave for internally generated AM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The factory preset default is sine wave SCPI AM INTernal FUNCtion TRlangle Analyzer NONE MOD also see AM and Modulation l 4 Operating and Programming Reference Internal FM Rate Internal FM Deviation Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the FM deviation for internally generated FM Use the numeric entry keys arrow keys or rotary knob to change the value of the deviation The swept signal generator accepts values from 1 Hz to 10 MHz The factory preset deviation is 1 MHz SCPI FM DEViation lt num gt freq sufix MAXimum MINi
21. 3 28 E1 O hpib cdr Figure C 2 GPIB Connector and Cable GPIB Interface Cables Available GPIB Cable Lengths Part Numbers HP Agilent 10833A 1m 3 3 ft HP Agilent 10833B 2m 6 6 ft HP Agilent 10833C 4m 13 2 ft HP Agilent 10833D 0 5 m 1 6 ft As many as 14 GPIB instruments can be connected to the swept signal generator 15 total instruments in the system The cables can be interconnected in a star pattern one central instrument with the GPIB cables emanating from that instrument like spokes on a wheel or in a linear pattern like boxcars on a train or any combination pattern There are certain restrictions m Each instrument must have a unique GPIB address ranging from 0 to 30 decimal Refer to 8360 Adrs for information on setting the swept signal generator s GPIB address m In a two instrument system that uses just one GPIB cable the cable length must not exceed 4 meters 13 ft m When more than two instruments are connected on the bus the cable length to each instrument must not exceed 2 meters 6 5 ft per unit C 8 Operating and Programming Reference CONNECTORS a The total cable length between all units must not exceed 20 meters 65 ft Agilent Technologies manufactures GPIB extender instruments HP Agilent models 37201A 37204A B that overcome the range limitations imposed by the cabling rules These extenders allow twin pair cable operation up 1 km 3 28
22. AM On Off 10 dB V Displays the waveforms for internal amplitude modulation Waveform Menu SCPI NONE see the individual softkeys listed Analyzer NONE MoD also see AM and Modulation AM On Off 10 dB V Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MOD MODULATION This softkey activates the exponentially scaled amplitude modulation function Amplitude modulation lets the RF output of the swept signal generator be continuously and exponentially varied at a rate determined by the AM input See Specifications for the AM characteristics input range and damage level An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI AM TYPE EX Pponential AM STATE ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE Acc CONNECTORS Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference A 15 AM On Off 1007 V Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MOD MODULATION This softkey activates the linearly scaled amplitude modulation function The amplitude of the RF output changes linearly as a function of AM input changes See Specifications for the AM characteristics input range and damage level An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI AM TYPE LINear AM STATE ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer AM1 function on AMO function off Ac CONNECTORS
23. Deep Al a With AM BW Cal 134dBrm 20dBrn Beep AM Gn Without AM BW Cal Deep AM Off 50dBm Figure M 2 Power Accuracy Over the AM Dynamic Range Calibrating the Linear Modulator The AM bandwidth calibration feature calibrates the linear modulator gain at the current CW frequency This results in more accurate performance in deep AM mode when the ALC loop is opened Figure M 2 shows the calibrated response of the modulator compared to the uncalibrated response If you choose to calibrate Always the swept signal generator will automatically perform the calibration whenever you change the CW frequency Although this feature provides more accurate performance note that it also slows the frequency switching time by 20 ms ALC Bandwidth Since the ALC loop is open at power levels less than 13 dBm in deep AM mode power levels at very slow AM rates are subject to integrate and hold drift of typically 0 25 dB s Setting the ALC bandwidth to low reduces drift by a factor of 10 by switching a larger capacitor into the integrator circuit The larger capacitor reduces the effects of leakage on the integrator The ALC bandwidth defaults at factory preset to the auto selection which normally selects the appropriate bandwidth high or low for your application However in this case modulating with deep AM at a slow rate auto mode would have set the ALC bandwidth to high where a setting of low would decrease drift To mak
24. Multiplication factor 1 on instrument on off or preset Zoom function CW lt num gt freq_suffix FA lt num gt freq_suffix FB lt num gt freq_sufhix CF lt num gt freq_sufhix DF lt num gt freq_suffix SHCF lt num gt freq_suffix SHCW lt num gt freq_suffix SHFB lt num gt freq_suffix SHFA lt num gt SHAL SHIP SHST FREQ CW lt num gt freq_suffix MODE CW FREQ STAR lt num gt freq_suffix MODE SWE FREQ STOP lt num gt freq_suffix MODE SWE FREQ CENT lt num gt freq_suffix MODE SWE FREQ SPAN lt num gt freq_suffix MODE SWE FREQ STEP lt num gt freq_suffix FREQ STEP lt num gt freq_suffix FREQ OFFS lt num gt freq_suffix OFFS STAT ON FREQ MULT lt num gt MULT STAT ON Refer to user defined preset Refer to user defined preset Installation 3 25 Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison continued Description Network Analyzer SCPI Language Language GPIB only functions Output status byte Os STB See SCPI common commands Status byte mask RM lt num gt SRE See SCPI common commands Extended status byte mask RE lt num gt ESE See SCPI common commands Clear status byte CS CLS See SCPI common commands Output learn string OL LRN See SCPI common commands Mode string OM Advance to next bandcross BC Display updating DU DISP ON OFF Activate fast phaselock mode FP Enable front panel knob EK SYST KEY 132
25. OFF open loop ALC mode When on the power can be programmed in fundamental units as selected by the UNIT POWer command When off the power is no longer calibrated in absolute units and is set in units of dB of arbitrary modulator setting e POWer AMPLifier STATE ON OFFIO 1 e POWer AMPLifier STATE Sets and queries the state of the amplifier contained in the doubler for those models with a doubler installed Programming a specific value for POWer AMPLifier STATE sets POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO to OFF e POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO ON OFFIOI 1 e POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO Sets and queries the automatic selection of the doubler amplifier state Programming a specific value for POWer AMPLifier STATE sets POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO to OFF RST value is ON e POWer ATTenuation lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer ATTenuation MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the output attenuation level Note that when setting the attenuator level to 10 dB the output power is decreased by 10 dB Programming a specified attenuation sets POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF e POWer ATTenuation AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e POWer ATTenuation AUTO Sets and queries the state of the RF attenuator coupling switch Programming a specified attenuation sets POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF ON insures that the amplitude level of the ALC is kept within optimal limits OFF the attenuator setting is set to the value of POW ATT and le
26. Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 AM On Off Ext Function Group Menu Map Description oD This softkey Option 002 only activates the amplitude modulation mode for an external source The AM source is connected to the AM modulation connector When external AM is in effect the RF output is amplitude modulated with a rate and depth set by the external source Amplitude scaling is controlled by the following softkeys AM Type 1004 V AM Type 10dB V An asterisk next to the key label indicates that external AM is active and amp is displayed on the message line A 16 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also AM On Off Int SCPI AM SOURce EX Ternal AM STATe ON OFF Analyzer AM1 function on AMO function off MoD also see AM and Modulation AM On Off Int Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also To This softkey Option 002 only activates the internal amplitude modulation mode No external source is needed When internal AM is in effect the parameters are controlled by the following softkeys Internal AM Rate Internal AM Depth AM Type 1004 V AM Type 10dB V Deep AM Waveform Menu An asterisk next to the key label indicates that internal AM is active and A is displayed on the message line Both amplitude and pulse modulation can be in effect simultaneously SCPI AM SOURce INTernal AM STAT
27. POLarity IN Ternal FREQuency FREQuency SOURce SOURce S 4 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information STATe STATe m PULSe PERiod PERiod WIDTh WIDTh a ROSCillator SOURce AUTO AUTO SOURce a STATus OPERation CONDition ENA Ble ENA Ble EVENt NTRansition NTRansition PTRansition PTRansition PRESet QUEStionable CONDition ENA Ble ENA Ble EVENt NTRansition NTRansition PTRansition PTRansition m SWEep DWELI AUTO AUTO DWELI GENeration GENeration MODE MODE POINts POINts STEP STEP TIME AUTO AUTO LLIMit LLIMit Operating and Programming Reference S 5 SCPI Conformance Information TIME m SYSTem ALTernate STATe STATe ALTernate COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess SECurity STATe STATe VERSion a TRIGger IM Mediate SOURce SOURce The following are the SCPI approved commands implemented by the 8360B Series swept signal generators Instrument specific diagnostic commands m DIAGnostics ABUS AVERage AVERage STATus ABUS ERRor ADD INSTrument PMETer ADDRess ADDRess PRINter ADDRess ADDRess JORW JORW LED ACTive ACTive ERRor ERRor TOCHeck TOCHeck OSC FNCW FNDN FNUP HARM S 6 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information IF SAMP YO OUTPut BANDcross FAU Lts FREQs
28. Repeat this sequence of steps until all the frequency points have a correction value entered Activate List Mode Press SWEEP MENU Select Sweep Mode List The flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup Disconnect the power meter sensor The power produced at the point where the power meter sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the frequencies and power level specified above Note Swept mm wave Measurement with Arbitrary Correction Frequencies Example 3 The focus of this example is to use user flatness correction to obtain flat power at the output of the HP Agilent 83550 series mm wave source modules In this case we will use non sequential correction frequencies in a swept 26 5 to 40 GHz measurement with an HP Agilent 83554 source module The time it takes for a large quantity of power meter measurements can be long therefore we selected non sequential correction frequencies to target specific points or sections of the measurement range that we assume are more sensitive to power variations This greatly expedites setting up the user flatness correction table The amount of interpolated correction points between non sequential correction frequencies varies This example uses the HP Agilent 437B to automatically enter correction data into the array Turn off the swept signal generator before connecting to the source module interface SMI cable or damage may result Getting Started Advanced
29. Sets the switch on the user flatness correction feature This is the same as pressing FLTNESS ON OFF on the front panel CORRection STATe Queries the condition of the internal switch CORRection FLATness POINts MAXimum MINimum The above command returns information on how many frequency correction pairs were entered using the CORR FLAT command Analyzer NONE ALC FLTNESS ON OFF List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 FLTNESS ON OFF Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This hardkey applies flatness correction to the swept signal generator RF output If no array has been created pressing this key applies 0 dB of flatness correction at all points The yellow LED above the hardkey lights when user flatness correction is on SCPI CORRection STATe ONJOFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE ALC Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 F 10 Operating and Programming Reference FM Coupling DC FM Coupling 100kHz Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the FM input to be AC coupled If you choose AC coupled FM you will be modulating a phase locked carrier This is the specified synthesized operation You must modulate at a 100 kHz rate or greater If not the freq
30. Step Control Master AUXILIARY INTERFACE AUXILIARY 10MHz 10MHz INTERFACE REF OUTPUT REF INPUT o o P O P O o o a n oo oooo oo oooo e e e oo00 S e e e p000 ooog 2000 oo00 oo0000 oooo OOOO oo00 oo0000 oooo OOOO ooon 0000 a fe ooo 0000 fe SWEEP IN SWEEP OUTPUT ye ooo00000 og o 00 o oan o o o SCALAR MASTER SLAVE NETWORK ANALYZER SYNTHESIZER SYNTHESIZER twotone cdr Figure S 1 Connections Required for a Two Tone Scalar Network Analyzer Measurement System 1 Designate one swept signal generator as the master the other as the slave 2 Make the connections 3 To avoid synchronization problems always set up the slave frequency and power before setting up the master 4 Set up the master frequency power and sweep time 5 Set the sweep time on the slave 6 Configure the swept signal generators for step sweep or ramp sweep 7 Select the appropriate triggering scheme 8 Activate the slave mode on the slave swept signal generator 9 Activate the master mode on the master swept signal generator By connecting the master s 10 MHz reference standard to the slave s 10 MHz reference input the master swept signal generator s timebase supplies the frequency reference for both swept signal generators In step sweep measurements if the master swept signal generator is not connected to an external controller it must a
31. The sequence of keystrokes that created the movement shown in Figure P 1 is FREQUENCY more 1 2 List Menu PRIOR PRIOR PRIOR 1 2 3 4 Delete Menu 5 6 7 P 12 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes Programming Language CIIL SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also more n m Programming Language Analyzr Function Group SYSTEM Menu Map 8 Description This softkey lets you select Analyzer Language as the swept signal Programming Codes See Also generator s interface language This language uses HP Agilent 8340 8341 mnemonics and provides Agilent network analyzer compatibility Any commands issued within 100 ms of a change in language may be ignored or lost An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem LANGuage COMPatible Analyzer NONE Adrs Menu ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 Chapter 3 Programming Language CIIL Function Group Menu Map SYSTEM Operating and Programming Reference P 13 Programming Language CIIL Description Programming Codes See Also This softkey lets you select CIIL as the swept signal generator s external interface language The use of this language requires the M A T E option Option 700 to be installed Any commands issued within 100 ms of a change in language may be ignored or lost An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature i
32. and it is used to separate alternative parameter options Optional numeric suffixes for SCPI commands are enclosed in square brackets Installation 3 23 3 24 Installation Features not available in one of the language modes are marked by a horizontal line in the corresponding column In the interest of brevity all SCPI commands have been listed in their most concise form For a complete and comprehensive listing of the swept signal generator SCPI commands refer to SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY in Chapter 2 For explanations of SCPI refer to Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 Numeric Suffixes Numeric suffixes consist of 2 or 3 character codes that terminate and scale an associated value The numeric suffixes for network analyzer language on the 8360 B Series and the HP Agilent 8340 8341 are identical Table 3 8 lists the 8360 B Series suffixes The default unit for each type of suffix is shown in bold type Table 3 8 Numeric Suffixes Suffix Network Analyzer SCPI Type Language Frequency HZ KZ MZ GZ HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ Power Level DB DBM W MW UW Power Ratio DB DB Time SC MS S MS US NS PS Status Bytes There are two separate and distinct status structures within the 8360 B Series depending on the GPIB language selected When network analyzer language is selected the status structure utilized is structurally and syntactically the same as on the HP Agilent 8340 8341 This greatly enhances p
33. are changed SWEep DW ELI SWEep TIME SWEep POINts 1 5 mS SWEep DWELI is limited to 100 us minimum ON ON SWEep DWELI 100 us MINimum SWEep TIME 5 1 ms x SWEep POINts 1 e SWEep CONTrol STATe ON OFF 1 0 e SWEep CONTrol STATe Sets and queries the state of the sweep control OFF Normal source mode ON Use master slave source mode RST value is OFF e SWEep CONTrol TYPE MASTer SLAVe e SWEep CONTrol TYPE Sets and queries the swept signal generator whether it is in master or slave mode This applies in a dual source mode RST value is MASTer e SWEep DWEL1 lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e SWEep DWEL1 MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the amount of time in seconds that the swept signal generator stays dwell at each step after reporting a source settled SRQ and pulsing the Trigger Out line low This one value is used at each step when in the SWE TRIG SOUR IMM mode of a stepped sweep Setting SWEep DWELL sets SWEep DWEL1 AUTO OFF RST value is 100 us e SWEep DWEL1 AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e SWEep DWEL1 AUTO Sets and queries the state of the automatic dwell calculation switch Setting SWEep DWELL sets SWEep DWEL1 AUTO OFF RST state is OFF Operating and Programming Reference S 49 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Combining the Sweep Mode With the Sweep Generation Command to Obtain the Desired Sweep Condition Description of FREQ POW SWE LIST
34. e DIAGnostics TEST DISable lt num gt 1 ALL Prevents the listed selftests from being selected If ALL is sent then all of the selftests are disabled RST causes DIAG TEST ENAB ALL to execute e DIAGnostics TEST ENABle lt num gt 1 ALL Enables the listed selftests to execute If ALL is sent then all of the selftests are enabled RST causes DIAG TEST ENAB ALL to execute S 32 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e DIAGnostics TEST EXECute lt num gt The specified selftest is executed Normal instrument operation is suspended and the instrument state is restored upon exiting the selftest mode e DIAGnostics TEST LOG SOURce ALL FAIL e DIAGnostics TEST LOG SOURce Sets and queries the source for the raw data logging ALL specifies that all raw data points are displayed FAIL selects only those data points out of the test limits Both commands are executable in selftest mode After RST the setting is FAIL e DIAGnostics TEST LOG STATe e DIAGnostics TEST LOG STATe ON JOFF 110 Selects and queries the raw data logging ON OFF switch Both commands are executable in selftest mode After RST the setting is 0 e DIAGnostics TEST LOOP ON OFF 1 0 e DIAGnostics TEST LOOP Selects and queries the test looping ON OFF switch Both commands are executable in selftest mode After RST the setting is 0 e DIAGnostics TEST NAME lt num gt Queries the name of a selftest by number If th
35. e FREQuency STARt MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the START Frequency See FREQ CENTER for more information RST setting is MIN e FREQuency STEP AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e FREQuency STEP AUTO Sets and queries the function switch that controls the calculation of the frequency step size FREQ STEP INCR If the response is AUTO ON then the swept signal generator selects a step size that is coupled to the frequency span The RST setting is ON e FREQuency STEP INCRement lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e FREQuency STEP INCRement Sets and queries the frequency step size to use for any node in the frequency subsystem that allows UP and DOWN as parameters Setting this value explicitly causes a FREQ STEP AUTO OFF command The RST setting is automatically calculated from span e FREQuency STOP lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency STOP MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the stop Frequency See FREQ CENTER for more information RST setting is MAX Operating and Programming Reference S 37 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e INITiate CONTinuous ON OFF 1 0 e INITiate CONTinuous Sets and queries the state of the continuous initiation switch This is more commonly known as single or continuous sweep This does not affect a sweep in progress RST setting is OFF e INITiatel IMMediate Causes the initiation of a sweep Useful mainly in the INIT CONT OFF mode of operation single sweep
36. 1 40 1 43 1 47 1 50 1 67 1 68 1 70 1 71 1 77 1 80 1 81 1 82 1 82 1 106 1 108 1 110 1 111 Contents 15 Contents 16 1 37 1 38 1 39 1 40 1 41 1 42 A 1 A 2 C 1 C 2 C 3 F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 M 1 M 2 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 6 P 1 S 1 2b 1 2b 2 2b 3 2b 4 2b 5 2b 6 2b 7 2b 8 2b 9 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 4 1 4 2 Inside the Initiate State Inside an Event Detection State Inside the Sequence Operation State The INIT Trigger Configuration The TRIG Trigger Configuration 8360 Simplified Trigger Model Loe ALC System Simplified Block Diagram Typical External Leveling Hookup Auxiliary Interface Connector GPIB Connector and Cable Interface Signals of the Source Module Connector Basic User Flatness Configuration Using an HP Agilent 437B Power Meter User Flatness Correction Table as Displayed by the Swept Signal Generator The Sources of ALC Calibration Correction Data Array Configuration when the Correction Data Frequency Span is a Subset of the Swept Signal Generator Frequency Span Loe eee ALC Block Diagram Power Accuracy Over the AM Dynamic Range FM Deviation and Rate Limits ALC Block Diagram Pulse Modulation System Video Feedthrough How PRIOR Works a Connections Required for a Two Tone Scalar Network Analyzer Measurement System ALC Menu Frequency Menu Marker Menu Modulation Menu Power Menu Service Me
37. 1 kHz sets the position to 20 Hz After RST the value is 100 kHz e FM INTernal FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e FM INTernal FREQuency MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency in Hz of the internal FM source After RST the value is 1 MHz e FM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare TRIangle RAMP NOISe e FM INTernal FUNCtion Sets and queries the waveform of the internal FM source After RST the value is SINusoid e FM SOURce INTernal EXTernal e FM SOURce Sets and queries the source of the FM modulating signal After RST the value is EXTernal e FM SENSitivity lt num gt freq suffix V MAXimum MINimum e FM SENSitivity MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the FM Input sensitivity The RST value is MAX 10 MHz V e FM STATe ON OFF 1 0 e FM STATe Sets and queries the FM modulation state After RST the value is OFF S 34 Operating and Programming Reference Frequency Subsystem SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Any two frequency setting headers STARt STOP CENTer or SPAN may be sent in a single message and the resulting sweep is what was requested The order of the headers in the message does not make any difference in the final result When a message is completed coupling equations are used to fix the unset parameters to the correct values These equations specify that center frequency start stop 2 frequency span stop start If more than two are sen
38. 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 PO VAL Power Flips 0 Slope 0 REPEAT OUTPUT Meter TR2 ENTER OMeter Power P1 VAL Power Slope2 SGN PO P1 IF Slope2Slope THEN Flips Flips 1 Slope2 Slope ELSE IF Slope2 0 THEN Flips Flipst 2 END IF PO P1 UNTIL Flips gt 3 Power P0 P1 2 RETURN Power FNEND Getting Started Programming 1 105 Programming the Status System In This Subsection This subsection discusses the structure of the status system used in SCPI instruments and explains how to program status registers An important feature of SCPI instruments is that they all implement status registers the same way The status system is explained in the following paragraphs General Status These paragraphs explain the way that status Register Model registers are structured in SCPI instruments It also contains an example of how bits in the various registers change with different input conditions Required These paragraphs describe the minimum required Status Groups status registers present in SCPI instruments These status registers cover the most frequently used functions General Status Register The generalized status register model shown in Figure 1 33 is the Model _ building block of the SCPI status system This model consists of a condition register a transition filter an event register and an enable register A set of these registers is called a statu
39. ALL SECurity CODE STATe STATe SPAN AUTO AUTO EXECute TRACk m CORRection ARRayli ARRayl i FLATness POINts FLATness SOUR celi SOUR cei STATe STATe a FM Operating and Programming Reference S 9 SCPI Conformance Information DEViation DEViation FILTer HPASs HPASs INTernal FUNCtion FUNCtion a FREQuency MULTiplier STATe STATe MULTiplier OFFSet STATe STATe OFFSet STEP AUTO AUTO INCRement INCRement a INITiate CON Tinuous CONTinuous IM Mediate a LIST MANual MANual MODE MODE PO Wer CORRection POINts CORRection TRIGger SOURce SOURce a MARKerfn AMPLitude STATe STATe VALue VA Lue DELTa MODE MODE a MEASure AM FM S 10 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information a MODulation STATe OUTPut SOURce SOURce STATe STATe m POWer ALC CFACtor CFACtor SOURce SOURce STATe STATe AMPLifier STATE AUTO AUTO STATE CENTer CENTer OFFSet STATe STATe OFFSet SEARch SLOPe STATe STATe SLOPe STATe STATe STEP AUTO AUTO INCRement INCRement a PULSe FREQuency FREQuency a PULM EX Ternal DELay DELay INTernal DELay DELay GATE GATE Operating and Programming Reference S 11 SCPI Conformance Information PERiod PERiod
40. AUTO ON POWer ALC CFACtor 16 DBM POWer ALC SOURce INTernal POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO ON POWer ATTenuation AUTO ON POWer CENTer 0 DBM POWer LEVel 0 DBM POWer MODE FIXed POWer SLOPe O POWer SLOPe STATe OFF POWer SPAN O DB POWer STARt O DBM POWer STATe OFF POWer STEP AUTO ON POWer STEPL INCRement 10 DB POWer STOP O DBM PULSe FREQuency 500 KHZ PULSe PERiod 2 pus PULSe WIDth 1 us PULM EXTernal DELay MINimum PULM EXTernal POLarity NORMal PULM INTernal DELay value is 0 PULM INTernal FREQuency value is 500 kHz PULM INTernal GATE OFF PULM INTernal PERiod value is 2 us PULM INTernal TRIGger SOURce INTernal PULM INTernal WIDth value is 1 ps PULM SLEW MINimum PULM SLEW AUTO ON PULM SOURce INTernal PULM STATe OFF ROSCillator SOURce AUTO ON SWEep DWEL1 100 us SWEep DWEL1 AUTO OFF SWEep POINts 11 S 16 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY SWEep STEP value is StopMAX StartMIN 10 SWEep TIME MINimum SwWEep TIME AUTO ON SWEep TIME LLIMit 10 ms SwWEep GENeration ANALog SWEep MODE AUTO SWEep MANual POINt 1 SWEep MANual RELative 0 50 SWEep MARKer STATe OFF SYSTem ALTernate 1 SYSTem ALTernate STATe OFF SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess 19 SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO ON SYSTem SECurity COUNt 1 UNIT AM PCT UNIT POWer DBM e SAV lt num gt The present instrument state is stored in the specified memory register The acceptable numeric ra
41. Amplitude Modulation Amplitude modulation can be accepted from an external source at the AM connector or can be internally generated by swept signal generators with Option 002 The damage level of the AM input is 15 V DC The input impedance of the AM connector is 50 2 A jumper on the A10 ALC board allows you to change the input impedance to 2 kQ See Adjustments in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide The AM can be scaled either linearly at 100 per volt or exponentially at 10 dB per volt When internal AM is chosen Option 002 the rate and depth are set by softkeys in the AM menu The waveform menu provides a choice of sine square triangle ramp or noise waveforms The monitor menu lets you output the internally generated modulation waveforms to the rear panel AM FM OUTPUT connector The AM output is scaled the same as it is generated either 100 V or 10 dB V This connector can drive 50 Q or greater The monitor menu also lets you display the value of the AM depth UNLVLED Message The maximum leveled output is limited by the swept signal generator s maximum leveled output power specification Individual swept signal generators may be capable of greater leveled output power the unleveled message indicates the actual limit Amplitude modulation adds to and subtracts from the reference RF power level If an message appears on the display you
42. Analyzer NONE CENTER GH C 14 Operating and Programming Reference Dblr Amp Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey accesses the doubler amp mode softkeys These softkeys are applicable to instrument models with a doubler installed The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is controlled by the instrument firmware Its use depends on the frequency of operation and on the calibration constants set at the factory The instrument defaults after preset to this automatic mode of operation which is the specified operation Softkeys in this menu will allow you to turn the doubler amplifier always on or always off These two modes are unspecified operation for instruments with a doubler installed These softkeys have no effect on instruments without a doubler Doubler Amp Mode AUTO Doubler Amp Mode On Doubler Amp Mode Off SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above Sets the doubler amp mode to AUTO This is the default after preset and must be used for specified performance Turns the doubler amplifier on regardless of the frequency of operation Using this mode results in unspecified performance Turns the doubler amplifier off regardless of the frequency of operation Using this mode results in unspecified performance Operating and Programming Reference D 1 Deep AM Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See
43. DB freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer SLOPe MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the RF slope setting dB per Hz FREQ MODE Affect on Slope CW or LIST Rotates around 0 Hz SWEep or STEP The RST value is 0 Rotates around the start frequency e POWer SLOPe STATe ON OFF 1 0 e POWer SLOPe STATe Sets and queries the power slope state RST value is 0 e POWer SPAN lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer SPAN MAXimum MINimum The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to those for frequency sweep Power sweep is allowed to be negative unlike frequency sweeps RST value is 0 e POWer STARt lt num gt 1vl suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer STARt MAXimum MINimum Default units and units for query response are determined by the command UNIT POWer The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to those for frequency sweep Power sweep is allowed to be negative unlike frequency sweeps RST value is 0 dBm e POWer STATe ON OFF 110 e POWer STATe Sets and queries the output power on off state RST value is OFF S 44 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e POWer STEP AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e POWer STEP AUTO Sets and queries the function switch that controls how the power step size POWer STEP INCRement is determined If in the automatic state then the step size is 1 dB The RST setting is ON e POWer STEP INCRement
44. ENABle Is set to all Os NTRansition Is set to all Os PTRansition All bits used are set to 1s Unused bits remain 0s e STATus QUEStionable CONDition Queries the Data Questionable Condition Register e STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt num gt e STATus QUEStionable ENABle Sets and queries the Data Questionable SRQ Enable register The STATus PRESet value is 0 e STATus QUEStionable EVENt Queries the Data Questionable Event Register This is a destructive read e STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt num gt e STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Sets and queries the Negative TRansition Filter for the Data Questionable Status Register The STATus PRESet value is 0 e STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt num gt e STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Sets and queries the Positive TRansition Filter for the Data Questionable Status Register After STATus PRESet all used bits are set to 1s S 48 Operating and Programming Reference Sweep Subsystem SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Interactions between dwell sweep time points step size and frequency span are as follows SWEep TIME 5 ms SWEep DWEL1 x SWEep POINts 1 FREQ SPAN SWEep STEP x SWEep POINts 1 SW Eep xx AUTO switches DWELI TIME Switch Action OFF OFF No coupling between SW Eep DW ELI SWEep TIME and SWEep POINts OFF ON No coupling between SW Eep DW ELI SWEep TIME and SWEep POINts ON OFF When SWEEP TIME or SWEEP POINts
45. I 1 internal FM rate I 5 internal frequency standard T 2 internal leveling A 5 internal leveling point L 3 internal pulse generator period I 9 internal pulse generator rate I 9 internal pulse generator width I 10 internal pulse mode auto I 11 internal pulse mode gate I 11 internal pulse mode trigger I 11 internal pulse modulation P 19 gate I 11 period I 9 rate L9 softkeys I 8 trigger I 11 width I 10 internal selftest S 58 internal timebase warmup time 3 8 invalid language message 2a 3 invalid save recall register message 2a 3 invert input I 12 key arrow 1 5 backspace 1 5 negative sign 1 5 numeric entry 1 5 terminator 1 5 keys entry area E 5 knob R 2 Index 13 Index 14 language compatibility 3 23 language compatibility analyzer to SCPI conversion 3 23 language identify S 60 language selection 3 6 left arrow A 21 LEVel trigger command discussed 1 112 leveling flatness correction F 10 theory of A 4 9 leveling accuracy A 6 leveling control A 2 leveling loop normal L 1 leveling mode ALC off A 8 L 1 normal L 1 search A 8 L 2 leveling mode normal A 5 leveling modes A 5 leveling point external detector A 7 L 3 internal L 3 module L 4 power meter A 7 L 4 source module A 7 leveling points A 5 line fuse replacement 4 4 line switch L 5 line voltage selection 3 3 listener definition of 1 56 list frequency dwell time E 3 enter value E 4 numb
46. Offset From Carrier CW Mode or Sweep Widths lt n x 10 MHz n x 60 Hz typical Sweep Widths gt n x 10 MHz n x 15 kHz typical 10 Frequency range is 26 5 GHz to 40 GHz on the 83640B Specifications 2c 9 Modulation 2c 10 Specifications Pulse Pulse modulation specifications apply for output frequencies 400 MHz and above On Off Ratio Rise Fall Times Minimum Width Internally Leveled Search Mode Output Frequencies lt 2 0 GHz Output Frequencies gt 2 0 GHz ALC Off Mode Output Frequencies lt 2 0 GHz Output Frequencies gt 2 0 GHz Minimum Repetition Frequency Internally leveled Search Mode ALC Off Mode Level Accuracy dB relative to CW level Widths gt 1 ps Widths lt 1 ys Search Mode Video Feedthrough Output Frequencies lt 2 0 GHz Power Levels lt 10 dBm Power Levels gt 10 dBm Output Frequencies gt 2 0 GHz 83620B 22B 30B 83623B 24B 40B 50B Overshoot Ringing Delay Output Frequencies lt 2 0 GHz Output Frequencies gt 2 0 GHz Compression Output Frequencies lt 2 0 GHz Output Frequencies gt 2 0 GHz Standard 80 dB 25 ns 1 ps 50 ns 50 ns 50 ns 50 ns 10 Hz DC DC 0 3 0 5 typical 2 5 0 2 1 15 typical 80 ns typical 80 ns typical Option 006 80 dB 10 ns 1 us 50 ns 15 ns 50 ns 15 ns 10 Hz DC DC 0 3 0 5 typical 2 5 1 1 10 typical 80 ns typical 60 ns typical t10 ns typica
47. P 23 pwron fail F 3 queries defined 1 63 discussed 1 66 queries example program 1 95 query commands 1 72 query only 1 72 query only 1 72 query status byte S 17 rack flange kit contents 3 13 rack flange kit installation 3 14 rack flange kit no handles 3 13 rack flange kit with handles 3 15 rack mount slide installation 3 11 rack mount slide kit contents 3 10 ramp AM waveform I 2 FM waveform I 6 ramp fail F 2 ramp sweep mode S 73 range power meter P 23 RCL 5 15 rear panel connectors C 4 rear panel output softkeys M 26 recall instrument state command 15 recall key R 1 recall registers 1 16 recall registers lost message 2a 4 recall save example program 1 97 reduce distortion D 1 reference oscillator functions R 1 register accessing of 1 16 register save S 1 related documents 1 63 remote statement 1 57 remove key from user defined menu U 5 repetition rate pulse P 21 replace line fuse 4 4 reset swept signal generator command S 15 response data discrete 1 86 integer 1 86 response data format example program 1 95 response examples 1 65 response messages defined 1 63 discussed in detail 1 80 syntax 1 82 response message terminators 1 65 defined 1 82 restore instrument state string S 14 reverse power effects 1 30 1 32 RF on off R 2 RF output connector C 11 RF peaking P 1 RF power maximize A 27 RF power functions P 5 right arrow A 21 rise time automat
48. Standard 20 dBm Resolution 0 02 dB Option 001 110 dBm Switching Time without attenuator change 10 ms typical Temperature Stability 0 01 dB C typical dBm Typical Maximum Available Powei 13 5 20 26 5 Frequency GHz 40 50 3 Specification applies over the 0 to 35 C temperature range 0 to 25 C for output frequencies gt 20 GHz Maximum leveled output power over the 35 to 55 C temperature range typically degrades by less than 2 dB Accuracy dB Specifications apply in CW step list manual sweep and ramp sweep modes of operation Frequency GHz Power lt 2 0 gt 2 0 and lt 20 gt 2 0 and lt 40 gt 40 gt 10 dBm 1 2 1 3 gt 10 dBm 0 6 0 7 0 9 1 7 gt 60 dBm 0 9 1 0 1 2 2 0 lt 60 dBm 1 4 1 5 1 7 2 5 Flatness dB Specifications apply in CW step list manual sweep and ramp sweep modes of operation Frequency GHz Power lt 2 0 gt 2 0 and lt 20 gt 2 0 and lt 40 gt 40 gt 10 dBm 0 9 1 0 gt 10 dBm 0 5 0 6 0 8 1 5 gt 60 dBm 0 7 0 8 1 0 1 7 lt 60 dBm 1 1 1 2 1 4 2 1 Specification applies over the 15 to 35 C temperature range for output frequencies lt 50 MHz 5 Specification applies over the 15 to 35 C temperature range and are degraded 0 3 dB outside of that range Specifications
49. UNLocks YODacs gt YTMDacs SRECeiver ASTate ASTate BCRoss MODE MODE RS Weep SWAP SWAP BUCKet DIVider DIVider SW Eep ARRay 0 1 LOCK LOCK ARRay 0 1 RESult TEST CONTinue DATA DESC MAXimum MINimum VA Lue DISable ENABle EXECute LOG SOURce SOURce STATe STATe LOOP LOOP NAME PATCh DATA DATA POINts Operating and Programming Reference S 7 SCPI Conformance Information DELete POINts RESult TINT The following are the commands implemented by the 8360 B Series swept signal generators which are not part of the SCPI definition a AM IN Ternal FUNCtion FUNCtion MODE MODE TYPE TYPE a CALibration ADJust A4 VCO A5 LGAin A6 VCO A6 SMATch A6 LGAin A6 IF Gain A9 OF FSet A10 MGAin A13 REFerence A13 GAIN Al4 SRAMp AM AUTO AUTO EXECute CONStants DEFault NAME RECall SAVE CONStants PEAKing AUTO AUTO EXECute FINE PMETer ATTenuation ATTenuation DETector INT Tiate NEXT FLATness S 8 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information INT Tiate NEXT RANGe RANGe POWer ARRay POINts ARRay ATTenuation ATTenuation EX Ternal ARRay POINts ARRay RANGe RANGe TYPE TYPE VA Lue VA Lue ZERO TYPE VA Lue VA Lue RANGe RANGe RECall SAVE ZERO
50. common IEEE 488 2 S 14 commands SCPI programming S 13 command statements fundamentals 1 57 command tables how to read 1 71 how to use 1 71 command trees defined 1 68 how to change paths 1 68 how to read 1 68 simplified example 1 71 using efficiently 1 69 commas problems with commas in input data 1 65 proper use of 1 69 1 82 common commands 1 67 1 69 defined 1 67 compare analyzer language to SCPI 3 24 compensation negative diode detectors 1 47 condition register 1 106 connections to HP Agilent 83550 series mm wave modules 3 22 to HP Agilent 8510 network analyzer 3 21 to HP Agilent 8757C E scalar analyzer 3 21 to HP Agilent 8970B noise figure meter 3 22 connector 10 MHz reference input C 6 10 MHz reference output C 6 AM FM output C 4 AM input C 4 auxiliary interface C 6 auxiliary output C 5 external ALC C 5 FM input C 5 GPIB C 7 pulse input C 5 pulse sync out C 5 pulse video out C 5 RF output C 11 source module interface C 9 stop sweep in out C 6 sweep output C 5 trigger input C 6 trigger output C 6 volts GHz C 6 Z axis blank markers C 6 connectors C 4 11 connectors mating 3 8 CONT 1 12 C 11 continuous leveling L 1 continuous sweep 1 12 C 11 continuous wave frequency C 13 control attenuator separately U 1 controller defined 1 63 controller definition of 1 56 control power level P 2 conventions typeface vil cooling airflow 3 9 copy freq
51. lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum e POWer STEP INCRement MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the power step size to be used for any node in the power subsystem that allows UP and DOWN as parameters Setting this value explicitly causes POWer STEP AUTO OFF The RST setting is 10 dB e POWer STOP lt num gt 1v1 suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer STOP MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the ending power for a power sweep Default units and units for query response are determined by the command UNIT POWer The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to those for frequency sweep Power sweep is allowed to be negative unlike frequency sweeps RST value is 0 dBm e PULM EXTernal DELay lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e PULM EXTernal DELay MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the value of pulse delay from the time the external pulse signal arrives to when the video pulse is generated The minimum value is 225 ns After RST the value is MINimum e PULM EXTernal POLarity NORMal INVerted e PULM EXTernal POLarity Selects the polarity of the external pulse signal NORMal causes the positive going edge of the signal to trigger the internal pulse generator and to turn on the RF After RST the value is NORMal e PULM INTernal FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e PULM INTernal FREQuency MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency of the internal pulse generator The RST value
52. s front panel indicates the attenuator setting and a reference level The reference level is an approximate indication of the attenuation provided by the RF modulator Typically the RF amplifier that follows the modulator is saturated for modulation levels near 0 dB Therefore the actual change in the RF output power will not track the indicated reference level until the amplifier is out of saturation The ALC off mode is useful for applications that involve pulse modulation with extremely narrow pulses If the pulse is narrow enough the ALC may be unable to provide accurate leveling due to bandwidth limitations Search Search mode is similar to the ALC off mode in that the ALC is disabled in order to remove bandwidth limitations The essential difference is that when search mode is enabled the swept signal generator searches out the appropriate modulator level such that the RF output power after the ALC is disabled closely matches the power prior to search mode being enabled Specifically when search mode is selected the swept signal generator follows this sequence of steps 1 All modulation is disabled and the ALC system is closed to provide a calibrated reference power 2 The output power is measured using the internal coupler detector 3 The ALC system is disabled opened A 8 Operating and Programming Reference ALC 4 While monitoring the internal detector the RF modulator level is varied until the detected power is
53. state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 S 22 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values POWer AMPLifier STATE Boolean ON OFF 1 0 AUTO Boolean ON OFF 1 0 ATTenuation atten setting extended numeric 0 to 90 DB or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN AUTO coupled atten Boolean ON OFF 1 0 CENTer power sweep extended numeric specified power range or center MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN LEVel output level extended numeric specified power range or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN MODE power mode discrete FIXed SWEep OFFSet power equation extended numeric lt num gt level suffix or offset MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 RANGe power meter extended numeric 30 to 90DB or range MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN SEARch search mode Boolean ON OFF 1 O ONCE SLOPe power slope extended numeric 2 5 to 2 5DB GHZ or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 SPAN power sweep extended numeric 45 to 45DB or span MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STARt power sweep extended numeric specified power range or start value MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STATe RF on off Boolean ON OFF 1 0 STEP AUTO step size determined Boolean ON OFF 1 0 INCRement step size extended numeric 20 to 0 01DB or MA Ximum MINimum STOP power sweep extended numeric specified power range or stop value MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN
54. the principle of forgiving listening and precise talking Recall that forgiving listening means instruments are flexible accepting commands and parameters in various formats Precise talking means an instrument always responds to a particular query in a predefined rigid format Parameter data types are designed to be flexible in the spirit of forgiving listening Conversely response data types are defined to meet the requirements of precise talking Table 1 3 SCPI Data Types Parameter Types Response Data Types Numeric Real or Integer Extended Numeric Integer Discrete Discrete Boolean Numeric Boolean String String Block Definite Length Block Indefinite Length Block Non decimal Numeric Hexadecimal Octal Binary Notice that each parameter type has one or more corresponding response data types For example a setting that you program using a numeric parameter returns either real or integer response data when queried Whether real or integer response data is returned depends on the instrument used However precise talking requires that the response data type be clearly defined for a particular instrument and query The instrument command dictionary generally contains information about data types for individual commands The following paragraphs explain each parameter and response data type in more detail Parameter Types Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are used in both subsystem
55. they are needed Notice that this syntax is virtually identical to the syntax for the ENTER statement that follows 1 60 Getting Started Programming A BASIC example 100 OUTPUT 719 programming codes The many programming codes for the swept signal generator are listed in the SCPI Command Summary in Chapter 2 Related statements used by some computers CONTROL CONVERT IMAGE IOBUFFER TRANSFER Enter Enter is the complement of OUTPUT and is used to transfer data from the addressed instrument to the controller The syntax is device selector line number ENTER is always used in conjunction with OUTPUT such as 100 OUTPUT 719 programming codes 110 ENTER 719 response data ENTER statements are commonly formatted which requires the secondary command USING and the appropriate image items The most used image items involve end of line EOL suppression binary inputs and literal inputs For example 100 ENTER 719 USING B A B C suppresses the EOL sequence and indicates that variables A B and C are to be filled with binary B data As another example 100 ENTER 719 USING 123A A suppresses EOL and indicates that string variable A is to be filled with 123 bytes of literal data 123A Getting Started Programming 1 61 Note Be careful when using byte counting image specifiers If the requested number of bytes does not match the actual number available
56. y q y 100 Enter the query response into the variable F The response always is returned in fundamental units Hz in the case of frequency 11 12 0 Print the CW Frequency in MHz on the computer display 0 Query the value of a Boolean function POWER STATE Getting Started Programming 1 95 130 Enter the query response into a variable W Boolean responses are always l for ON and 0 for OFF 140 Print the value of the POWER STATE on the computer display 150 Query the value of a discrete function FREQ MODE 160 Dimension a string variable to contain the response 170 Enter the response into A The response will be a string that represents the function s present value 180 Print the value of A on the computer display 190 Example usage of a MIN query This will request the maximum value that the FREQ CW function can be programmed to 200 Enter the numeric response into the variable A 210 Print the value of A on the computer display 220 This is compound query Up to 8 parameters can be queried from the swept signal generator at one time using this method In this example the start and stop frequencies are interrogated 230 The responses are read back into the variables X and Y The order of the responses is the same as the order of the queries X will contain the START frequency and Y will contain the STOP 240 to 260 Print the START STOP frequencies on the display 1 96 Gett
57. 1 CALibration SPAN AUTO OFF CORRection FLATness returns a 0 CORRection ARRay clear CORRection FLATness POINts returns a 0 CORRection STATe OFF DIAGnostics ABUS AVERage 1 DIAGnostics TEST ENABle ALL DIAGnostics TEST LOG SOURce FAIL DIAGnostics TEST LOG STATe OFF DIAGnostics TEST LOOP OFF DISPlayL STATe ON FM DEViation value is 1 MHz FM COUPling AC FM FILTer HPASs MAXimum FM INTernal FREQuency value is 1 MHz FM SENSitivity MAXimum FM SOURce EXTernal FM STATe OFF FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency FREQuency CENTer value is MAX MIN 2 CW value is MAX MIN 2 CW AUTO OFF MANual value is MAX MIN 2 MODE CW MULTiplier 1 MULTiplier STATe OFF OFFSet O OFFSet STATe OFF STARt MINimum STEP calculated from span STEP AUTO ON STOP MAXimum Operating and Programming Reference S 15 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY INITiate CONTinuous OFF LIST DWEL1 value is 100 ws MINimum LIST DWEL1 POINts returns a 1 LIST FREQuency value is MAX MIN 2 LIST FREQuency POINts returns a 1 LIST MANual 1 LIST MODE AUTO LIST POWer CORRection 0 LIST POWer CORRection POINts returns a 1 LIST TRIGger SOURce IMMediate MARKer n AMPLitude STATe OFF MARKer n AMPLitude VALue 2 DBM MARKer n FREQuency value same as FREQ CENT RST value MARKer n MODE FREQuency MARKer n STATe OFF POWer ALC BANDwidth
58. 1 N Stop_freq Start_freq Increment 1 Getting Started Programming 1 103 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 Freq Start_freq FOR I 1 TO N A A amp VAL Freq amp GHZ Odb Freq Freq tIncrement NEXT I B LEN A B B 1 B A 1 B OUTPUT Source CORR FLAT B OUTPUT Source POW STAT ON ENTER DATA IN USER CORRECTION TABLE OUTPUT Source CAL PMET FLAT INIT USER ENTER Source Freq WHILE Freq gt 0 Power FNRead_meter Meter Freq OUTPUT Source CAL PMET FLAT NEXT VAL Power DBM ENTER Source Freq END WHILE END IF END SUB Zero_meter Meter Source INTEGER Error_flag OUTPUT Source Pow stat off OUTPUT Meter CS OUTPUT Meter ZE Max_attempts 30 Attempts 0 Zeroing 1590 Finished 0 WHILE Zeroing AND NOT Finished Attempts Attempts 1 Meter_stat SPOLL Meter IF Attrmpts gt Max_attempts THEN Zeroing 0 IF BIT Meter_stat 1 THEN Finished 1 WAIT 1 END WHILE OUTPUT Source Pow stat on IF NOT Zeroing THEN Error_flag 1 ELSE Error_flag 0 END IF SUBEND DEF FNRead_meter Meter Freq OUTPUT Meter SEOEN Freq VAL Freq OUTPUT OMeter FR amp Freq amp GZ OUTPUT Meter TR2 ENTER Meter Power 1 104 Getting Started Programming 870
59. 10 MHz Freq Std Intrnl 10 MHz Freq Std None Tracking Menu TrigOut Delay Uncoupl Atten Unlock Info Up Down Power Up Dn Size CW Up Dn Size Swept USER DEFINED menu Usrkey Clear UsrMenu Clear S 64 S 64 S 66 S 67 S 68 S 68 S 69 S 70 S 70 S 71 S 71 S 72 S 73 S 74 S 74 S 75 S 75 S 76 S 76 S 77 T 1 T 2 T 2 T 3 T 3 GQaacd voy h H qaqaq o a 2a 2b 2c Waveform Menu Zero Freq Zoom Error Messages Introduction Front Panel Error Messages i in Alphabetical Order SCPI Error Messages in Numerical Order Swept Signal Generator Specific SCPI Error Messages 2a 5 Universal SCPI Error Messages Error Messages From 499 To 400 Error Messages From 399 To 300 Error Messages From 299 To 200 Error Messages From 199 to 100 Menu Maps ALC Menu Frequency Menu Marker Menu Modulation Menu Power Menu Service Menu Sweep Menu System Menu User Cal Menu Specifications Frequency Range Resolution Frequency Bands for CW signals Frequency Modes Loe CW and Manual Sweep Synthesized Step Sweep Synthesized List Mode Ramp Sweep Mode Internal 10 MHz Time Base RF Output Output Power Accuracy dB Flatness dB Analog Power Sweep External Leveling Source Match Spectral Purity Spurious Signals Single Sideband Phase Noise dBe Hz Offset from Carrier Z 1 Z 1 2a 1 2a 1 2a 5 2a 6 2a 6 2a 6 2a 6 2a 7 2b
60. 100 Send an OPC to the source 110 Enter the query response to the OPC into a variable X The program execution will halt here until the source has finished processing all the commands up to this point Once complete the source will respond to the OPC with a 1 120 Begin a FOR NEXT loop that is repeated four times 130 Initiate a sweep on the source Getting Started Programming 1 101 140 Send a WAI command to the source This command causes the source to stop executing new commands until all prior commands and operations have completed execution In this case there is a sweep in progress so no further commands will be executed until the sweep finishes 150 Turn the RF output of the source ON 160 Initiate a sweep on the source 170 Send another WAI to the source Although the WAI command causes EXECUTION of commands to be held off it has no effect on the transfer of commands over the GPIB The commands continue to be accepted by the source and are buffered until they can be executed 180 Toggle the RF STATE to OFF 190 Repeat the sample exercise 200 and 210 Print messages on the computer display 1 102 Getting Started Programming Using the User Flatness The following program interrogates the swept signal generator and an Correction Commands HP Agilent 437B power meter for frequency and power information Example Program 8 respectively The swept signal generator is programmed to sweep f
61. 14 2c 14 2c 14 2c 14 2c 14 2c 14 2c 15 2c 15 2c 15 2c 15 2c 15 2c 15 2c 15 2c 15 2c 15 2c 16 2c 16 2c 16 2c 16 2c 16 2c 16 2c 16 2c 16 2c 16 2c 17 2c 17 2c 17 2c 17 2c 17 2c 17 2c 17 2c 17 2c 17 2c 17 2c 18 2c 18 2c 18 2c 18 2c 18 Installation Initial Inspection Equipment Supplied Options Available Preparation for Use Power Requirements Line Voltage and Fuse Selection Power Cable Language Selection How to View or Change a Language Selection from the Front Panel How to Select a Language on an Instrument without a Front Panel GPIB Address Selection How to View or Change an GPIB address from the Front Panel How to Prevent a Front Panel Change to an GPIB Address How to Set the GPIB Address on a Swept Signal Generator without a Front Panel Mating Connectors 10 MHz Frequency Reference Selection and Warmup Time Operating Environment Chassis Kits Rack Mount Slide Kit Option 806 Installation Procedure Rack Flange Kit for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Removed Option 908 Installation Procedure Rack Flange Kit for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Attached Option 913 Installation Procedure Storage and Shipment Environment Package the Swept Signal Generator for Shipment Converting HP Agilent 8340 41 Systems to Agilent 8360 B Series Systems a a Manual Operation Compatibility Front Panel Operation Instrument Preset Conditions System Conn
62. 16 bits separated by commas to indicate the latched status of the different fault indicators Bit 0 BONDMoP WN FR Fault Name PEAK TRACK RAMP SPAN V GHZ ADC EEROM PWRON CALCO PLLZERO PLLWAIT FNFXER CALYO CALMAN TMR CNFLCT SEARCH Operating and Programming Reference F 1 Fault Menu Analyzer NONE See Also Softkeys listed above Fault Info 1 Function Group SERVICE Menu Map 6 Description This softkey displays the latched status of the following fault messages PEAK FAIL TRACK FAIL RAMP FAIL SPAN FAIL V GHZ FAIL ADC FAIL F 2 Operating and Programming Reference Indicates that the peak algorithm is unable to align the YTM passband to the frequency of the YO This fault indication is possible only if a peaking or autotrack routine has been initiated Indicates that the autotrack algorithm is unable to calculate the calibration constants needed to track the YTM passband to the frequency of the YO This fault indication is possible only if an autotrack routine has been initiated Indicates that the ramp algorithm is unable to adjust the sweep ramp voltage to 10 00 V at the end of the sweep Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the span algorithm is unable to adjust the YO to achieve the correct frequency at the end of a band This fault indication is possible only if a sweep span routine has been initiated Indicat
63. 19 M 23 M 24 M 24 M 25 M 26 M 26 M 27 M 28 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 8 P 9 P 10 P 11 R Printer Adrs Programming Language Analyzr Programming Language CIIL Programming Language SCPI Pt Trig Menu Pulse Delay Normal Pulse Delay Irig d Pulse Menu Pulse Menu Pulse On OffExtrnl Pulse On Offintrnl Pulse On OffScalar Pulse Period Pulse Rate Pulse Rise TimeAuto Pulse Rise TimeFast Pulse Rise TimeSlow Pulse Width Pwr Mtr Range RECALL Ref Osc Menu ROTARY KNOB Save Lock Save User Preset SCPI Conformance Information SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE Security Menu Selftest Full Set Atten Software Rev SPAN Start Mi Stop M2 Start Sweep Trigger Auto Start Sweep Trigger Bus P 11 P 12 P 13 P 13 P 14 P 15 P 16 P 16 P 17 P 18 P 19 P 19 P 20 P 21 P 21 P 22 P 22 P 23 P 23 P 24 R 1 R 1 R 2 R 2 S 1 S 2 S 2 S 3 S 14 S 56 S 58 S 59 S 59 S 60 S 60 S 61 S 61 S 62 S 63 S 63 Contents 9 Contents 10 Start Sweep Irigger Ext Step Control Master step Control Slave Step Dwell Step Points Step Size Step Swp Menu Step Swp PtTrig Auto Step Swp PtIrig Bus Step Swp PtIrig Ext SWEEP menu Sweep Mode List Sweep Mode Ramp Sweep Mode Step Swp Span CalAlways Swp Span Cal0nce SWEEP TIME Swplime Auto an SYSTEM menu 10 MHz Freq Std Auto 10 MHz Freq Std Extrnl
64. 2 Turn the swept signal generator off Verify that the amber STANDBY LED is on 3 Turn the swept signal generator on Verify that the amber STANDBY LED is off and that the green POWER ON LED is on a Check the display a cursor will appear in the upper left corner followed by the GPIB language GPIB address and the date code of the firmware installed in the swept signal generator b The display will now indicate the functional configuration noted in step 1 c Check the fan it should be turning 4 2 Operator s Check Routine Maintenance Main Check 1 Press SERVICE 2 Select Selftest Full Check that all tests performed pass 3 Press PRESET If the display indicates a user preset was performed select Factory Preset Verify that the green SWEEP LED is blinking the amber RF ON OFF LED is on and the red INSTR CHECK LED is off 4 Press USER CAL 5 Select Tracking Menu a If the swept signal generator has Option 001 step attenuator select Auto Track Wait for the swept signal generator to finish peaking before continuing b If the swept signal generator has no step attenuator installed provide a good source match on the output connector a power sensor or 10 dB attenuator will do Select Auto Track Wait for the swept signal generator to finish peaking before continuing 6 Press PRIOR T Select Freq Cal Menu 8 Select Swp Span Cal Once Verify that status problems do not exist UN
65. 2 tracking 1 49 tracking functions T 3 transition filter 1 107 in general status register model 1 106 TRG 5 17 TRGItrg 1 119 triangle AM waveform I 4 FM waveform I 7 trigger automatic frequency list L 8 stepped sweep automatic S 69 stepped sweep external S 70 sweep mode external 63 trigger commands defined 1 118 trigger functions list mode P 14 trigger group execute command S 17 TRIGGER HP BASIC 1 119 trigger input BNC S 71 trigger input connector C 6 trigger interface bus Index 25 Index 26 stepped sweep S 70 trigger out delay T 4 trigger output BNC T 4 trigger output connector C 6 trigger point external list mode L 9 interface bus list mode L 8 trigger states event detection 1 112 idle 1 111 in general programming model 1 109 sequence operation 1 114 trigger system general programming model 1 109 INIT trigger configuration 1 115 TRIG configuration 1 116 Trigger system INIT configuration 1 115 TRIG trigger configuration 1 116 TST S 17 two tone control 64 typeface conventions vil uncoupled attenuator A 7 U 1 unleveled message 1 10 1 18 unlock information on status U 1 UNLVLD message 1 18 UNLVLED message 1 10 during amplitude modulation M 14 up arrow A 21 user calibration functions U 3 user defined leveling F 4 user defined menu U 4 user defined menu erase U 6 user defined softkey erase U 5 user defined softkeys A 22 user flatness array 1 33
66. 2 4 mm F 1250 2188 There are several options available on the 8360 B Series swept signal generators For descriptive information on all of the options available refer to Chapter 2c Specifications For installation information on the rack mounting kits refer to later paragraphs in this chapter For information on retrofitting options refer to the Option Retrofits chapter in the Agilent Technologies 8960 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide Preparation for Use Enclosure Protection Power Requirements Line Voltage and Fuse Selection WARNING CAUTION Install the instrument according to the enclosure protection provided m This instrument does not protect against the ingress of water m This instrument protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the enclosure The 8360 B Series swept signal generators require a power source of 115 V 4 10 25 or 230 V 10 15 48 to 66 Hz single phase Power consumption is 400 VA maximum 30 VA in standby The swept signal generator is provided with a voltage selector located on the rear panel to match the swept signal generator to the ac line voltage available at the site of installation Both the line selector and fuse were selected at the factory to match the ac line voltage expected to be found at the shipping destination Verify that the voltage selector has been set to the correct line voltage b
67. 3 2b 5 2b 7 2b 9 2b 11 2b 13 2b 15 2b 17 2b 19 2c 2 2c 2 2c 2 2c 2 2c 2 2c 2 2c 3 2c 3 2c 3 2c 3 2c 4 2c 4 2c 5 2c 5 2c 6 2c 6 2c 6 2c 7 2c 7 2c 9 2c 9 Contents 11 Contents 12 Residual FM RMS 50 Hz to 15 kHz bandwidth Modulation re Pulse AM and Scan FM Simultaneous Modulations Internal Modulation Generator Option 002 AM FM Pulse Modulation Meter General Environmental Warm Up Time Power Requirements Weight amp Dimensions Adapters Supplied Inputs amp Outputs Auxiliary Output RF Output External ALC Input Pulse Input Output AM Input FM Input Trigger Input Trigger Output 10 MHz Reference Input 10 MHz Reference Output Sweep Output Stop Sweep Input Output Z Axis Blanking Markers Output Volts GHz Output Source Module Interface Auxiliary Interface Pulse Video Output Option 002 only Pulse Sync Out Option 002 only AM FM Output Option 002 only Models Options Option 001 Add Step Attenuator Option 002 Add Internal Modulation Generator Option 004 Rear Panel RF Output Option 006 Fast Pulse Modulation Option 008 1 Hz Frequency Resolution Option 700 MATE System Compatibility Option 806 Rack Slide Kit Option 908 Rack Flange Kit Option 910 Extra Operating amp Service Guides Option 013 Rack Flange Kit Option W30 Two Years Additional Return To HP Service 2c 9 2c 10 2c 10 2c 11 2c 12 2c 12 2c 13 2c 13 2c 13 2c 13 2c
68. 46 frequency value E 2 HP Agilent 437B 1 34 power meter 1 36 user flatness correction F 4 HP Agilent 437B measure M 7 M 8 power meter measure M 27 user flatness correction commands example program 1 103 user preset P 10 user preset save S 2 vector network analyzer connections 3 21 V GHz fail F 2 video feedthrough pulse modulation M 22 view interface address 3 8 view previous menu P 11 volts GHz connector C 6 WAL 5 17 wait for sweep complete command S 17 WAI use of example program 1 101 WAI wai 1 111 warmup time 3 8 waveform noise 2 I 5 ramp L2 L 6 sine 3 I 6 square IL 3 L7 triangle I 4 I 7 waveform menu W 1 waveform softkeys W 1 whitespace proper use of 1 69 width pulse P 23 without front panel change interface address 3 8 wrong password message 2a 5 Z axis blank markers connector C 6 zero frequency Z 1 zoom Z 1 Index 27
69. 5 dBm REVERSE POWER Figure 1 16 Reverse Power Effects Coupled Operation with 8 dBm Output RF OUTPUT MIXER 8 dBm ATTENUATOR LO 10 dB a LO FEED LO LEVEL THROUGH 10 dBm DETECTOR SdBm IF MEASURES 15 dBm REVERSE POWER DETECTOR ALC LEVEL Figure 1 17 Reverse Power Effects Uncoupled Operation with 8 dBm Output Getting Started Advanced 1 31 Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects 1 32 Getting Started Advanced Reverse power is a problem with spectrum analyzers that do not have preselection capability Some analyzers have as much as 5 dBm LO feedthrough coming out of their RF input at some frequencies The effects of reverse power are less in the heterodyne band 0 01 to 2 0 GHz where the power amplifier provides some broadband matching Similarly at frequencies above 2 0 GHz reverse power that is within 10 MHz of the swept signal generator s frequency may be partially absorbed by the YIG filter If the frequency difference is small enough to be within the leveling system bandwidth typically 10 kHz CW 200 kHz sweep or AM the effect of reverse power is amplitude modulation of the swept signal generator s output The AM rate equals the difference in RF frequencies Reverse power problems may be treated by using the unleveled mode There are two unleveled modes ALC off and search To set the swept signal generator to the ALC off mode 1 Refer to menu map 1 2
70. 7 5 18 3 2 3 6 3 7 3 10 3 13 3 15 3 20 3 24 3 25 4 4 Contents 17 Getting Started What Is In This This chapter contains information on how to use the Agilent Chapter 8360 B Series swept signal generator The information is separated into three sections Basic For the novice user unfamiliar with the 8360 B Series swept signal generator This section describes the basic features of the swept signal generator Advanced For the user familiar with swept signal generators but not necessarily familiar with how to use the special features of the 8360 B Series swept signal generator Programming For the user wishing to program an 8360 B Series swept signal generator This section contains an introduction to Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language SCPI Agilent Technologies implementation of IEEE 488 2 1987 and an introduction to the Analyzer programming language Note If you are unpacking a new swept signal generator refer to the installation suggestions provided in Chapter 3 Installation Getting Started Introduction 1 1 How To Use This Chapter Equipment Used In Examples 1 2 Getting Started Introduction To use this chapter effectively refer to the tabbed section Menu Maps Menu maps can be folded out to be viewed at the same time as the Getting Started information as illustrated
71. 8 meter measure functions M 27 meter on off AM M 9 meter on off FM M 9 mistrack A 27 mixers 1 30 mm wave interface connector C 9 mm wave interface mnemonics C 10 mm wave module leveling L 4 mm wave source modules system connections 3 22 mnemonics 1 63 1 64 Index 15 Index 16 conventions for query commands 1 63 long form 1 64 short form 1 64 modify HP Agilent 8340 41 program for SCPI 3 23 MOD key M 10 modout on off AM M 11 modout on off FM M 11 modulation ALC leveling M 12 AM A 15 A 18 amplitude M 13 AM rate M 15 deep AM M 15 dynamic range M 14 FM M 17 narrow pulses M 21 pulse M 19 pulse characteristics P 16 pulse external P 18 pulse internal P 19 pulse period P 20 pulse rate P 21 pulse scalar P 20 reducing integrate and hold drift M 16 module selection M 23 M 24 M 25 module selection softkeys M 22 monitor menu M 26 more key M 27 multi pin connectors C 6 multiplication factor frequency F 17 new line affect on current path 1 68 in response message terminator 1 82 symbol used for 1 64 use as a program message terminator 1 64 use as a response message terminator 1 65 with HP BASIC OUTPUT statements 1 81 new line new line use as a program message terminator 1 81 no frequency standard T 2 no front panel change interface address 3 8 noise AM waveform I 2 FM waveform 5 noise figure meter system connections 3 22 normal leveling mode L 1
72. ALC level range 25 to 20 dBm This mode of operation requires a feedback connection from a negative output diode detector to the EXT ALC connector When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt ATTEN X dB EXT POWER X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm EXT X XX In Normal Power Meter PwrMtr the POWER LEVEL key controls the output power of the swept signal generator as compared to the feedback voltage of the power meter The attenuator if present is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system and the POWER LEVEL key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits see Figure A 1 within a more restricted range of the ALC level Instead of the 45 dB range of the ALC in other modes 12 dB is available in this mode with the upper end of the range set by the Pwr Mtr Range softkey This mode of operation requires a feedback connection from the recorder output of a power meter Operating and Programming Reference P 3 POWER LEVEL When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt ATTEN X dB POWER LEVEL X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm MTR X XX In Normal Module the POWER LEVEL key controls the output power of the swept signal generator as compared to the feedback voltage from a millimeter wave source module The attenuator if present is automatically un
73. Boolean parameters ON Boolean TRUE upper lower case allowed OFF Boolean FALSE upper lower case allowed 1 Boolean TRUE 0 Boolean FALSE Examples of Boolean parameters in commands 100 OUTPUT Source FM STATe On 110 OUTPUT Source AM STATe 1 Getting Started Programming 1 75 Reading Instrument When debugging a program you may want to know if an instrument Errors error has occurred Some instruments can display error messages on their front panels If your instrument cannot do this you can put the following code segment in your program to read and display error messages 10 20 The rest of your 30 variable declarations 40 50 DIM Err_msg 75 60 INTEGER Err_num 70 80 Part of your program 90 that generates errors 100 110 200 REPEAT 210 OUTPUT Box SYST ERR 220 Query instrument error 230 ENTER Box Err_num Err_msg 240 Read error message 250 PRINT Err_num Err_msg 260 Print error message 270 UNTIL Err_num 0 280 Repeat until no errors 290 300 The rest of your program 310 1 76 Getting Started Programming Example Programs Stimulus Source O 500mvV The following is an example program using SCPI compatible instruments The example is written in HP BASIC This example is a stimulus and response application It uses a source and counter to test a voltage controlled oscillator Example Program Description This example demonstrates how several S
74. By combining the OPC WAI facilities with the INIT IMM command the functionality of the analyzer compatible language take sweep and single sweep command can be achieved e LIST DWEL1 lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum 1 801 e LIST DWEL1 MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the amount of time to dwell at each frequency The number of dwells can be queried with LIST DWEL1 POINts This dwell is the time after completing phaselock and turning RF on before changing to the next frequency After RST the value is 100 us MIN e LIST DWEL1 POINts MAXimum MINimum Returns the number of dwells entered using the LIST DWEL1 command After RST returns a 1 e LIST FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum 1 801 e LIST FREQuency Sets and queries a list of frequencies that the swept signal generator phase locks to in the sequence entered when the list mode is selected RST value is the MAX MIN 2 e LIST FREQuency POINts MAXimum MINimum Returns the number of frequencies that have been entered into the list frequency array After RST returns a 1 e LIST MANual lt num gt e LIST MANual Sets and queries the list point number to go to and lock The value is a unitless value that is limited between 1 and the maximum number of points in either of the three arrays This command has no effect unless the list mode is set to manual This value may be bumped if the number of list frequencies is changed RST valu
75. External Leveling Leveling Mode Normal Leveling Point ExtDet or PwrMtr or Module In externally leveled operations the output power from the swept signal generator is detected by an external sensor The output of this detector is returned to the leveling circuits and the output power is automatically adjusted to keep the power constant at the point of detection Figure A 2 shows a basic external leveling arrangement The output of the detected arm of the splitter or coupler is held constant If the splitter response is flat the output of the other arm is also constant This arrangement offers superior flatness over internal leveling especially if long cables are involved Flatness may be improved with user flatness correction FLTNESS ON OFF Fltness Menu applied at the external leveling point Operating and Programming Reference A 7 ALC SWEPT SIGNAL GENERATOR D e oo oo og o oo oo 8000 cooooo oo a nooo oo oooo oP LEVELED OUTPUT RF OUTPUT SPLITTER NEGATIVE DETECTOR Figure A 2 Typical External Leveling Hookup ALC Disabled Leveling Mode ALCoff Leveling Mode Search ALC Off In this configuration the ALC is disabled power is not sensed at any point and therefore the absolute power level is uncalibrated see Figure A 1 Direct and separate control of the RF modulator p o RF Components and the attenuator is possible The swept signal generator
76. HP Agilent diode detectors From the chart the leveled power at the diode detector input resulting from any external level voltage setting may be determined The range of power adjustment is approximately 30 dBm to 18 dBm Automatically characterize and compensate for the detector used by performing a detector calibration Refer to Using Detector Calibration in the Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance section DETECTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE 10 V 20 dBV 10 dBV 5 lt 6 dBV 1 0V 0 dBV LINEAR ASYMPTOTE 10 dBV 100 mV SQUARE LAW ASYMPTOTE eet 208V 30 dBV 10 mV 40 dBV 50 dBV 1 mV 60 dBV 66 dBV 70 dBV Amv 80 dBV 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 DETECTOR INPUT POWER dBm Figure 1 12 Typical Diode Detector Response at 25 C Getting Started Advanced 1 25 Hint 1 26 Getting Started Advanced External Leveling Used With the Optional Step Attenuator Some external leveling applications require low output power from the swept signal generator The swept signal generator automatically uncouples the attenuator from the ALC system for all external leveling points Press POWER LEVEL Note the display It shows gt ATTEN O dB POWER LEVEL 0 00 dBm For example leveling the output of a 30 dB gain amplifier to a level of 10 dBm requires the output of the swept signal generator to be around 40 dBm when leveled At some frequencies this level is beyond th
77. MA Ximum MINimum Operating and Programming Reference S 21 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values LIST MANual num of points numeric 1 to maximum defined to lock on MODE list sweep mode discrete AUTO MANual PO Wer CORRection correction level extended numeric 40 to 40 DB 1 801 or MA Ximum MINimum 1 801 POINts num of corr levels numeric MA Ximum MINimum TRIGger SOURce list trig source discrete IMMediate BUS EX Ternal MARKer n n is 1 to 5 1 is the default AMPLitude STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 VALue amp marker depth extended numeric 10 to 10DB MA Ximum MINimum AOFF DELTa difference between numeric lt num gt lt num gt 1 to 5 two markers FREQuency marker frequency extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum MODE marker mode discrete FREQuency DELTa REFerence delta marker ref numeric 1to5 STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 MODulation OUTPut SOURce output mod source discrete AM FM STATe output mod state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 PO Wer ALC BANDwidth ALC bwidth extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum AUTO bwidth selection Boolean ON OFF 1 0 CFACtor coupling factor extended numeric 0 to 90 DB or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN SOURce leveling point discrete IN Ternal DIO De PMETer MMHead STATe
78. MHz V gt 2 MHz to 10 MHz 10 MHz V AM INPUT There are two AM operation modes linear and log When the swept signal generator is in linear AM mode the input accepts a 1 to 1 V signal With an AM input of 0 V the RF output level the reference level is unaffected at 1 V input the RF is shut off and with a 1 V input the RF output is 100 3 dB higher that the reference level Therefore there must be gt 3 dB of margin between the reference power level and the maximum available at a given frequency The on 0 V input to off 1 V input ratio is a function of power level and frequency but is always greater than 20 dB The amplitude of the RF output changes linearly as the AM input changes C 4 Operating and Programming Reference CONNECTORS When the swept signal generator is in log AM mode the input accepts a wider range of input signal For every 1 V input the RF output level decreases by 10 dB For every 1 V increases by 10 dB So the dynamic range of positive to negative power levels is dependent on the swept signal generator power level setting The input impedance for this input connector is factory set at 50 Q but can be switched to 2 kQ Refer to Adjustments in the Calibration manual See Specifications for the electrical requirements of the AM input Damage levels for this input are gt 15 V or lt 15 V AUX OUTPUT provides a reference signal from 2 to 26 5 GHz at a typical minim
79. MINimum Analyzer NONE MoD also see FM and Modulation FM Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also wo This softkey Option 002 only accesses the frequency modulation softkeys These softkeys engage external and internal frequency modulation They allow you to define the coupling waveform rate and deviation of the internal FM FM On Off Ext Toggles on and off the frequency modulation mode for an external FM source FM On Off Int Toggles on and off the frequency modulation mode using the internal FM generator Internal FM Rate Sets the rate of the internal frequency modulation Internal FM Deviation Sets the deviation of the internal frequency modulation FM Coupling 100kHz Sets AC coupling for modulation rates of 100 kHz or greater The RF signal is phase locked FM Coupling DC Sets DC coupling for modulation rates of less than 100 kHz The phase locked loop is open Waveform Menu Displays the waveforms for internal frequency modulation SCPI NONE see the individual softkeys listed Analyzer NONE MoD also see FM and Modulation F 12 Operating and Programming Reference FM On Off DC FM On Off AC Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MODULATION This softkey lets you select AC coupled frequency modulation FM and makes FM deviation frequency the active function FM sensitivity is
80. Menu This softkey allows access to the frequency list functions Automatically creates a frequency list using the user specified increment value Automatically creates a frequency list containing a user specified number of points Allows the entry of a start frequency for the frequency list Allows the entry of a stop frequency for the frequency list Reveals the frequency list delete menu Allows the entry of a dwell time for a frequency point in the frequency list Allows the entry of a frequency point into the frequency list Allows the entry of an ALC output power correction value for a frequency in the frequency list Automatically sets the dwell time for all points in the frequency list to a user specified value Automatically sets the ALC output power correction value for all points in the frequency list to a user specified value Reveals the frequency list in the point trigger menu A frequency list consists of two or more frequency points A frequency point can be any frequency value within the specified frequency range of the swept signal generator and must be entered before a value for either ALC output power offset or dwell time is accepted The maximum number of frequency points in a frequency list is 801 Creating a Frequency List There are two methods of constructing a frequency list 1 Use the Enter List Freq softkey to begin entering frequency points The list will be generated in the order
81. PULSe FREQuency pulse freq extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum PERiod pulse period extended numeric lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum WIDTh pulse width extended numeric lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum Operating and Programming Reference S 23 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values PULM EX Ternal POLarity extnl pulse polarity discrete NORMal IN Verted DELay extnl pulse delay extended numeric lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum INTernal FREQuency intnl pulse frequency extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum GATE intnl pulse gating Boolean ON OFF 1 0 PERiod intnl pulse period extended numeric lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum TRIGger SOURce pulse trigger source discrete INTernal EX Ternal WIDTh intnl pulse width extended numeric lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum SLEW pulse modulation extended numeric lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum AUTO pulse mod rise time Boolean ON OFF 1 0 SOURce pulse mod source discrete INTernal EX Ternal SC ALar STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 ROSCillator SOURce ref osc source discrete IN Ternal EX Ternal NONE AUTO state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 STATus OPERation CONDition ENABle numeric 0 to 2047 EVENt NTRansition neg transition filter
82. Press ALC 3 Select Leveling Mode ALCoff In this mode the swept signal generator provides RF power with no ALC correction and therefore requires a power meter to set a particular power To set the swept signal generator to the search mode 1 Press ALC 2 Select Leveling Mode Search In this mode the swept signal generator is in the normal ALC mode until the desired power level is reached then the ALC is disconnected Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array The following examples demonstrate the user flatness correction feature 1 Using an HP Agilent 437B power meter to automatically enter correction data for a swept 4 to 10 GHz measurement 2 Manually entering correction data for a stepped List Mode measurement 3 Making swept mm wave measurements automatically entering correction data for an arbitrary list of correction frequencies 4 Making scalar analysis measurements with automatically entered correction data that compensates for power variations at the output of a directional bridge Each example illustrates how to set up correction tables for a different measurement requirement Modify the instrument setups shown to suit your particular needs Completed correction tables may be easily edited if more correction data is required for your measurement Additional correction frequencies may be added by using the auto fill feat
83. STEP is governed by the equation STEP SPAN POINTS If you change step size then the number of points will be changed to span step and a Parameter Bumped execution error is reported If span or points are changed then STEP SPAN POINTS The step sweep command creates a coupling with sweeptime also If the number of points is changed through this coupling and DWEL1 AUTO is ON and TIME AUTO is ON then dwell is changed to SWEEPTIME POINTS Span is normally an independent variable but is changed to STEP x POINTS if both of these parameters are changed in the same message RST value is StopMax StartMin 10 e SWEep TIME lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e SWEep TIME MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the current sweep time The dwell time can be coupled to sweep time if SWE DWEL AUTO is ON The dwell time is Operating and Programming Reference S 51 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY then governed by the equation DWEL SWEEPTIME POINTS Changing either sweep time or the number of points causes DWELI to be recalculated but does not cause an error If you attempt to change the dwell time then AUTO is set to OFF If DWEL1 AUTO is OFF then sweep time is independent of the dwell time and the number of points RST value is MIN e SWEep TIME AUTO ONIOFF 1 0 e SWEep TIME AUTO Sets and queries the automatic sweep time switch ON The value of the sweep time is automatically to minimum OFF Attempting to set a sweep time faster than a
84. SUMMARY e DIAGnostics RESult Returns the following information lt result gt lt test failure gt lt manual entry point gt where lt result gt is one of the following 0 Diagnosis successful 1 Cannot diagnose full selftest must be executed first 2 No failures found all selftests passed 1 Cannot diagnose diagnosis routine failed to isolate failure software fault lt test failure gt is the test number of the most relevant failure 999 if parameter is not used as in lt result gt of 1 lt manual entry point gt is a string response that identifies the paragraph number in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide to begin the troubleshooting procedure e DIAGnostics TEST CONTinue Causes the selftest execution to continue when paused for raw data examination Does nothing in other conditions e DIAGnostics TEST DATA DESC Returns the description string of the raw data examined during a selftest It returns in other conditions e DIAGnostics TEST DATA MAXimum Returns the upper test limit for the raw data point examined Returns 0 in other conditions e DIAGnostics TEST DATA MINimum Returns the lower test limit for the raw data point examined Returns 0 in other conditions e DIAGnostics TEST DATA VALue Returns the raw data value for the raw data point examined Returns a 0 in other conditions
85. Straight CEE7 VII 79 Mint Gray East and West Europe 8120 1692 90 79 Mint Gray Saudi Arabia Egypt Republic of So Africa India unpolarized in many nations E 125V 8120 1348 Straight NEMA5 15P 80 Black United States 8120 1398 90 80 Black Canada Japon 8120 1754 Straight NEMA5 15P 36 Black 100V or 200V 8120 1378 Straight NEMA5 15P 80 Jade Gray Mexico Philippines 8120 1521 90 80 Jade Gray Taiwan 8120 1676 Straight NEMA5 15P 36 Jade Gray 250V 8120 2104 Straight SEV1011 1959 79 Gray Switzerland 24507 Type 12 o 250V 8120 0698 Straight NEMA6 15P United States Canada 220V 8120 1957 Straight DHCK 107 79 Gray Denmark W 8120 2956 90 79 Groy 250V 8120 1860 Straight CEE22 VI O System Cabinet Use n a L N 1 E Earth ground L Line N Neutral 2 Part number for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cable is Agilent part number for complete cable including plug powercab cdr Figure 3 1 AC Power Cables Available Installation 3 5 Language Selection You can operate the swept signal generator using one of three external interface languages SCPI Analyzer language or CIIL Option 700 How to View or Change a Language Selection from the Front Panel Note To set a programming language from the front panel the instrument language on the rear panel GPIB switch L1 L2 and L3 shown in Figure 3 2 must be set to 7 all 1s The GPIB menu provid
86. TRIG SOURce commands in the appropriate subsystems i e LIST TRIGger SOURce and SWEep TRIGger SOURce The definition of these signals in the swept signal generator cause the Getting Started Programming 1 117 sweep to jump to the next point when the signal becomes TRUE therefore the first point in the list or stepped sweeps is produced immediately upon starting the sweep Receiving a trigger signal at the last point causes the IDLE state to be re entered Analog sweeps do not use the trigger signals during the sweep although the trigger signals are needed to start the sweep as described The ABORt command resets any sweep in progress and immediately returns the instrument to the IDLE state The WAI OPC and 0PC commands indicate a complete operation at the end of the sweep upon re entry into the IDLE state Advanced Trigger Configurations Because the SCPI layered trigger model is expandable many more complex trigger configurations are possible Trigger Keyword The following paragraphs contain condensed definitions of the Definitions keywords used in the command tables Many of the commands in trigger related subsystems are event commands Remember that event commands cannot be queried Similarly event commands have no related RST actions or settings Event commands cause a particular action to take place inside the swept signal generator ABORt The ABORt command forces the trigger system to the idle state Any measure
87. The FM rate can be decreased as long as the FM deviation remains less than n x 5 x FM rate and less than 8 MHz MHz FM Deviation Maximum N N N N N N N N N N N N I I I I I I I CT II I I lt x lt gt 5 Oo Oo SO oaa0gf wo N 3 Oo o o oOo 6 6 8 N nm wo K FM Rate Figure M 3 FM Deviation and Rate Limits If the FM deviation is set greater than the 8 MHz limit it must be decreased for specified performance An message is displayed on the message line if the FM deviation exceeds nx 5x FM rate Then either decrease the FM deviation or increase the FM rate until both conditions for FM deviation are met At FM rate levels greater than those shown for each band corresponding to the 8 MHz FM deviation level the n x 5 x FM tate value will always be greater than 8 MHz so the maximum FM M 18 Operating and Programming Reference Pulse Modulation Pulse Modulation deviation is no longer limited by the FM rate only by the maximum limit of 8 MHz Pulse modulation can be accepted from an external source at the PULSE connector or can be internally generated The damage levels of the PULSE input are 10 and 5 V DC The input impedance is 50 Q A function generator must be capable of driving TTL levels into a 50 Q load With no input signal the pulse input is held low so activating pulse with no input causes RF output to shut
88. This softkey lets you enter a dwell time for a frequency point in the frequency list array A frequency point must be entered before a dwell value can be accepted otherwise the following error message appears ERROR Must first enter a List Frequency The rotary knob and the up down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequency points available to change the default dwell values The range of values is 100 us to 3 2 s An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Enter List Freq Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you enter a frequency point into the frequency list array The frequency list may contain as few as one and as many as 801 points The order frequencies are entered is the order they are listed Additions to an existing list are placed as indicated by the active entry arrow The rotary knob and the up down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequencies points An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 E 4 Operating and Programming Reference ENTRY KEYS Enter List Offset Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FR
89. and as such the POWER LEVEL key controls different aspects of the power level ALC system The following is an explanation of power level operation in the different ALC system configurations In Normal Internal the key controls the output power level of the swept signal generator directly The attenuator if present is controlled together with the complete range of the ALC system 25 to 20 dBm P 2 Operating and Programming Reference POWER LEVEL When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt POWER LEVEL X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm INT X XX In Normal Uncoupled Attenuator the key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits see Figure A 1 within the ALC level range 25 to 20 dBm The attenuator is uncoupled from the ALC system and is controlled separately with the Set Atten key When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt ATTEN X dB ALC X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm INT X XX In Normal External Detector ExtDet the POWER LEVEL key controls the output power of the swept signal generator as compared to the external detector feedback voltage The attenuator if present is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system and the POWER LEVEL key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits see Figure A 1 within the
90. and external pulse waveforms This results in pulses having approximately 2 ys rise fall times An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this function is active SCPI PULM SLEW lt num gt time suffix JMAXimum Analyzer NONE Pulse Menu Pulse Width Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey lets you set a value for the internal pulse generator s pulse width The range of acceptable values is from 1 us to 65 5 ms The factory preset value is 1 ms When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area SCPI PULSe IN Ternal WIDTh lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE atc MoD Pulse Menu Operating and Programming Reference P 23 Pwr Mtr Range Function Group 4c Menu Map 1 Description This softkey lets you specify a range of operation from 20 to 60 dBm for an external power meter when a power meter is used to level power externally The factory preset value is 0 dBm The value specified for Pwr Mtr Range directly affects the power level range for power meter leveling points When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area Programming Codes SCPI POWer RANGe lt num gt power suffix MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE See Also Leveling Point PwrMtr Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 P 24 Operating and Programming Reference
91. and from an HP Agilent 83550 Series millimeter wave source module With the source module connected the swept signal generator assumes the characteristics of the source module Refer to Leveling Point Module for more information Operating and Programming Reference C 9 CONNECTORS MOD C1 5V RESERVED MOD ANLG GND ANGL GND MOD D2 MOD CO 8V 15V RESERVED CLAMP CNTL RET SHELL NSS Ee o0000 b387 e 54321 20 19 18 7 8 Bengy oo000 FIFE MOD D3 MOD DO RESERVED EXT LVL RET L MOD RF OFF 0 5V GHz MOD SENSE MOD D1 DIG GND EXT LVL COAX 15V RESERVED Figure C 3 Interface Signals of the Source Module Connector The codes indicated on the illustration above translate as follows MOD Do Source module data line zero Signals MOD DO through MOD D3 are the mm source module data bus lines bi directional MOD D1 Data line one MOD D2 Data line two MOD D3 Data line three MOD C0 Source module control line zero Signals MOD C0 and MOD C1 are the control lines for the read write to and from the mm source module MOD C1 Control line one CLAMP CNTL Source module clamp control not used MOD SENSE Source module sense A lmA current is injected on this line by the mm source module to indicate its presence This signal always equals 0 V L MOD RF OFF Low RF off Source module RF is turned off EXT LVL RET Source module external leveling return EXT LVL Source module external leveling input from t
92. and set marker Turn off frequency marker Enable M1 M2 sweep Disable M1 M2 sweep Move start gt M1 stop gt M2 Enable delta marker Disable delta marker Move marker to center frequency Turn off all markers Turn on amplitude markers Turn off amplitude markers Mn lt num gt freq_suffix MnMo MP1 MPO SHMP MD1 MDo MC SHMO AK1 AKO MARK n FREQ lt num gt freq_suffix STAT ON MARK n OFF SWE MARK STAT ON SWE MARK STAT OFF SWE MARK XFER MARK n DELT lt num gt lt num gt MARK OFF MARK n FREQ FREQ CENT lt response gt freq suffix MARK AOFF MARK n AMPL ON AMPL VAL lt num gt DB MARK AMPL OFF Installation 3 27 Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison continued Description Network Analyzer SCPI Language Language Modulation Scalar pulse modulation SHPM PULS SOUR SCAL STAT ON Enable external PM1 PULS SOUR EXT STAT ON pulse modulation Disable external PMO PULS SOUR EXT STAT OFF pulse modulation Enable linearly scaled AM AM1 AM TYPE LIN STAT ON Disable linearly scaled AM AMO AM TYPE LIN STAT OFF Enable AC coupled FM FM1 lt num gt FM SENS lt num gt freq_suffix V COUP AC STAT ON Disable AC coupled FM FMO FM STAT OFF Power Set power level PL lt num gt DB POW lt num gt DBM Activate power sweep PS1 POW MODE SWE Deactivate power sweep PSO POW MODE FIX RF output On RF1 POW STAT ON RF output Off RFO POW STAT OFF Uncouple internal SHPS POW ATT A
93. base Minimum Step Size Same as frequency resolution Number of Points 1 to 801 Switching Time Same as CW Dwell Time 100 pus to 3 2 s Accuracy sweep time gt 100 ms and lt 5 s Sweep Widths lt n x 10 MHz 0 1 of sweep width time base accuracy Sweep Widths gt n x 10 MHz Lesser of 1 of sweep width or n x 1 MHz 0 1 of sweep width Sweep Time 10 ms to 100 seconds 300 MHz ms maximum rate Accuracy Calibration Aging Rate Temperature Effects Line Voltage Effects Stability Aging Rate 5 x 1071 day 1 x 1077 year With Temperature 1 x 107 C typical With Line Voltage 5 x 10 for line voltage change of 10 typical 2 Sweeptime gt 150 ms and lt 5 s for Option 006 instruments Specifications 2c 3 RF Output Output Power 2c 4 Specifications Maximum Leveled Standard Option 006 83620B 83622B 13 13 83623B 17 17 83624B 20 17 83630B Output Frequencies lt 20 GHz 13 13 Output Frequencies gt 20 GHz 10 10 83640B Output Frequencies lt 26 5 GHz 10 10 Output Frequencies gt 26 5 GHz 6 6 83650B Output Frequencies lt 26 5 GHz 10 10 Output Frequencies gt 26 5 GHz and lt 40 GHz 5 5 Output Frequencies gt 40 GHz 2 5 2 5 With attenuator Option 001 Minimum settable output power is 110 dBm Maximum leveled output power is reduced by 1 5 dB to 20 GHz 2 0 dB above 20 GHz and 2 5 dB above 40 GHz Minimum Settable
94. be accessed through the key Likewise register 9 is reserved for user preset storage and can not be accessed with the key Pressing PRESET erases register 0 but not register 9 SCPI SAV lt num gt The above is an IEEE 488 2 common command Analyzer SVn where n a numeric value from 1 to 8 Altrnate Regs Clear Memory RECALL Save Lock Saving and Recalling an Instrument State in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference S 1 Save Lock Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you disable the save function It prohibits the saving of the present instrument state into a save recall memory register If this function is active an error message is displayed An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this function is active SCPI NONE Analyzer SHSV locks the registers SHRC unlocks the registers SAVE Security Menu Saving and Recalling an Instrument State in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Save User Preset Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you store the present state of operation to be used as the PRESET state Set the swept signal generator to the desired operating conditions Select Save User Preset The display shows gt User Defined Preset Saved To activate this stored inf
95. commands and common commands Numeric parameters accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation If an instrument setting programmed with a numeric parameter can only assume a finite number of values the instrument automatically Getting Started Programming 1 83 rounds the parameter For example if an instrument has a programmable output impedance of 50 or 75 ohms you specified 76 1 for output impedance the value is rounded to 75 If the instrument setting can only assume integer values it automatically rounds the value to an integer For example sending ESE 10 123 is the same as sending ESE 10 Examples of numeric parameters 100 no decimal point required 100 fractional digits optional 1 23 leading signs allowed 4 56e lt space gt 3 space allowed after e in exponentials 7 89E 01 use either E or e in exponentials 256 leading allowed 5 digits left of decimal point optional Extended Numeric Parameters Most measurement related subsystems use extended numeric parameters to specify physical quantities Kxtended numeric parameters accept all numeric parameter values and other special values as well All extended numeric parameters accept MAXimum and MINimum as values Other special values such as UP and DOWN may be available as documented in the instrument s command dictionary Note that MINimum and MAXimum can be used to set or query values The
96. convenient for your application For example if you set the pulse rate do not change the pulse period the swept signal generator automatically adjusts the period to match the rate SCPI PULM INTernal FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE MOD also see Pulse and Modulation Internal Pulse Generator Width Function Group Menu Map Description oD 4 This softkey Option 002 only lets you set a value for the internal pulse generator s pulse width The pulse is adjustable from 25 ns to 400 ms with 25 ns resolution The factory preset default is 1 ms pulse width If you set a value for the pulse width that is greater than the pulse period the pulse period is recalculated to a value equal to the pulse width plus 25 ns When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area l 10 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Internal Pulse Mode Gate SCPI PULM INTernal WIDTh lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimu Analyzer NONE MOD also see Pulse and Modulation Internal Pulse Mode Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also Auto wo This softkey Option 002 only is the default mode of generating internal pulses It is not synchronized to any trigger signal An asterisk next to the key label indicated that this mode is selected SCPI PULM INTernal TRIGge
97. data might be lost or the program might enter an endless wait state The suppression of the EOL sequence is frequently necessary to prevent a premature termination of the data input When not specified the typical EOL termination occurs when an ASCH LF line feed is received However the LF bit pattern could coincidentally occur randomly in a long string of binary data where it might cause a false termination Also the bit patterns for the ASCII CR carriage return comma or semicolon might cause a false termination Suppression of the EOL causes the computer to accept all bit patterns as data not commands and relies on the GPIB EOI end or identify line for correct end of data termination Related statements used by some computers CONVERT IMAGE IOBUFFER ON TIMEOUT SET TIMEOUT TRANSFER This completes the GPIB Command Statements subsection The following material explains the SCPI programming codes and shows how they are used with the OUTPUT and ENTER GPIB command statements 1 62 Getting Started Programming Getting Started with SCPI This section of Chapter 1 describes the use of the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language SCPI This section explains how to use SCPI commands in general The instrument command summary at the end of this chapter lists the specific commands available in your instrument This section presents only the basics of SCPI If you want to explore the topic in gre
98. following parts 2 Rack Mount Flanges 8 Screws Slide Kit Includes the following parts 2 Slide Assemblies 4 Screws Inner Slide Assembly 8 Screws Outer Slide Assembly 8 Nuts Outer Slide Assembly Slide Adapter Kit NON HP includes the following parts Adapter Brackets 4 Adapter Bar 8 Screws Bracket to Bar 8 Nuts Bracket to Slide Assembly Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Installation Procedure 1 Refer to Figure 3 3 Remove handle trim strips 2 Remove four screws per side 3 Using the screws provided attach the rack mount flanges to the outside of the handles 4 Remove the side straps and end caps 5 Remove the bottom and back feet and the tilt stands Figure 3 3 Removing the Side Straps and Feet Installation 3 11 6 Refer to Figure 3 4 Remove the inner slide assemblies from the outer slide assemblies 7 To secure the side covers in place mount the inner slide assemblies to the instrument with the screws provided 8 With the appropriate hardware install the outer slide assemblies to t
99. gt PCT MAXimum MINimum lt num gt DB eAM L DEPTh MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the percentage of AM when the SOURce is INTernal If lt num gt is received with units of dB the value is converted to percent by the equation 100 1 10 dB 20 Valid ranges of dB are 0 to 40 dB After RST the value is 50 e AM INTernal FREQuency lt num gt lt freqsuffix gt MAXimum MINimum eAM INTernal FREQuency MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency in Hz of the internal AM source After RST the value is 1 kHz e AM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare TRIangle RAMP NOISe eAM INTernal FUNCtion Sets and queries the waveform of the internal AM source After RST the value is SINusoid e AM SOURce INTernal EXTernal eAM SOURce Sets and queries the source of the AM modulating signal After RST the value is EXTernal e AM MODE DEEP NORMal e AM MODE Controls the AM depth limits of the swept signal generator The NORMal position is selected at RST e AM STATe ON OFF 1 0 e AM STATe Sets and queries the status of the AM modulation After RST the setting is OFF e AM TYPE LINear EXPonential e AM TYPE Sets and queries the type of AM modulation After RST the setting is LINear e CALibration AM AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e CALibration AM AUTO Sets and queries the automatic modulator calibration switch Operating and Programming Reference S 27 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY If this is
100. is 500 kHz e PULM INTernal GATE ON OFF 1 0 e PULM INTernal GATE Sets and queries the state of the internal pulse generator s gating control When ON and the pulse trigger source is internal the external pulse input is used to gate the pulse generator When pulse trigger source is external this switch is ignored and no gating is possible After RST the setting is 0 Operating and Programming Reference S 45 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Pulse Subsystem e PULM INTernal PERiod lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e PULM INTernal PERiod MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the period of the internal pulse generator The RST value is 2 ps e PULM INTernal TRIGger SOURce INTernal EXTernal e PULM INTernal TRIGger SOURce MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the setting of the internal pulse generator s trigger source When INTernal pulse period and frequency determine the repetition rate of the pulse train When in EX Ternal the repetition rate is set by the EXT PULSE in jack After RST the value is INTernal e PULM INTernal WIDTH lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e PULM INTernal WIDTH MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the width of the internal pulse generator The RST value is 1 ps Since frequency and period are inversely related if both are sent in the same message only the last one is applied If the WIDth command and either the FREQuency or PERiod command are sent in the same message
101. is a low level GPIB message that can be sent using the TRIGGER command in HP BASIC a EX Ternal An external signal connector is selected as the source m IMMediate Qualified events are generated automatically There is no waiting for a qualified event Getting Started Programming 1 119 Related Documents The International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Agilent Technologies IEEE Standard 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation New York NY 1987 This standard defines the technical details required to design and build an GPIB interface IEEE 488 1 This standard contains electrical specifications and information on protocol that is beyond the needs of most programmers However it can be useful to clarify formal definitions of certain terms used in related documents IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands For Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1987 This document describes the underlying message formats and data types used in SCPI It is intended more for instrument firmware engineers than for instrument user programmers However you may find it useful if you need to know the precise definition of certain message formats data types or common commands To obtain a copy of either of these documents write to The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New Y
102. kHz square wave for use with HP Agilent scalar network analyzers Swept signal generators with Option 002 generate a synthesized pulse that is adjustable with 25 ns resolution Additional information is available under Modulation or refer to the type of modulation by name AM FM Pulse Modulation ModOut On Off AM Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 only lets you output the internally generated amplitude modulation waveforms to the rear panel AM FM OUTPUT connector When scaled linearly at 100 V the maximum output voltage is 1 V and the minimum output voltage is 1 V SCPI MODulation OUTput SOURce AM MODulation OUTput STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE MoD also see AM and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference M 11 ModOut On Off FM Function Group moD Menu Map 4 Description This softkey Option 002 only lets you output the internally generated frequency modulation waveforms to the rear panel AM FM OUTPUT connector When scaled exponentially at 10 dB V the maximum output voltage is offset to 0 V and the minimum voltage level is 4 V Programming Codes SCPI MODulation OUTput SOURce FM MODulation OUTput STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE See Also MOD also see FM and Modulation M 12 Operating and Programming Reference Modulation Modulation General Circuit Theo
103. maintenance 4 4 period pulse P 20 PLLwait fail F 3 PLLzero fail F 3 point clear C 3 points in stepped mode S 67 point trigger automatic list mode L 8 point trigger menu key P 14 power leveling control A 4 power cable 3 4 power correction value E 1 power level 1 10 power level functions P 2 power leveling A 2 internal point L 3 normal L 1 open loop L 1 search mode L 2 power leveling with external detector L 3 power leveling with mm wave module L 4 power leveling with power meter L 4 power level key P 2 power level step size U 1 power menu functions P 5 power menu key P 5 power meter HP Agilent 437B 1 34 1 47 power meter leveling L 4 power meter measure correction functions M 27 power meter programming address M 8 power meter range P 23 power offset P 6 list array all points G 1 list frequency E 4 power on off RF R 2 power output maximizing 1 49 peaking 1 49 power slope 1 18 P 6 power sweep 1 18 P 7 uncoupled operation A 7 power sweep once S 59 power sweep sweep time S 75 power switch L 5 precise talking 1 66 1 83 prefix number vii preset conditions HP Agilent 8340 41 compared to 8360 3 20 preset key 1 3 P 8 preset mode factory P 10 user P 10 preset save user defined S 2 pressure altitude 3 9 prevent interface address changes 3 8 previous menu P 11 printer address P 11 prior key P 11 program and response messages 1 66 program example flatness correc
104. multiple test setups or frequency ranges you may save as many as eight different measurement setups including correction tables in the internal storage registers of the swept signal generator SWEPT SIGNAL ia ggeuen g GENERATOR ooo O00AG SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE RF OUTPUT Wore l CABLES lt AND OTHER J DEVICES J a PORT o 437B ano0000 o POWER METER l FLATNESS 1 CORRECTED OUTPUT PORT POWER SENSOR DEVICE UNDER Flat1b cdr TEST Figure F 1 Basic User Flatness Configuration Using an HP Agilent 437B Power Meter F 6 Operating and Programming Reference Fltness Menu Frequency MHz Correction gt 10 000000 Undefined 110 000000 Undefined 210 000000 Undefined vee een cease eensees Auto Fill wc eee more Start Stop Pts Incr 2 3 r Se S Figure F 2 User Flatness Correction Table as Displayed by the Swept Signal Generator Theory of operation The unparalleled leveled output power accuracy and flatness of the Agilent 8360 B Series swept signal generator This is achieved by using a new digital versus analog design to control the internal automatic leveling circuitry ALC An internal detector samples the output power to provide a dc feedback voltage This voltage is compared to a reference voltage which is proportional to the power level chosen by the user When
105. numeric 0 to 2047 PTRansition pos transition filter numeric 0 to 2047 PRESet S 24 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values STATus QUEStionable CONDition ENABle SRQ enable register numeric 0 to 2047 EVENt NTRansition neg transition filter numeric O to 2047 P TRansition pos transition filter numeric O to 2047 SWEep CON Trol STATe dual source mode Boolean ON OFF 1 0 TYPE type of discrete MASTer SLAVe sweep control DWELI settling time extended numeric 0 1 to 3200 ms plus dwell time or MAXimum MINimum AUTO dwell calculation Boolean ON OFF 1 0 state GENeration type of sweep discrete STEPped ANALog MANual POINt step point number numeric 1 to the number of step points RELative percent of sweep extended numeric 0 to 100 MARKer STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 X FER Mi start M2 stop MODE manual sweep discrete AUTO MANual mode switch POINts points in step sweep numeric lt num gt MAXimum MINimum STEP step size extended numeric function of current span MA Ximum MINimum TIME sweep time extended numeric 200s to 133 ms or MA Ximum MINimum AUTO auto sweep Boolean ON OFF 1 0 time switch LLIMit fastest sweep extended numeric lt num gt time suffix time or MAXimum MINimum TRIGger SOURce stepped trig source discrete IMMediate BUS EX Ternal
106. of M1 and M2 An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI SWEep MARKer STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer MP1 function on MPO function off Marker Mi Start Mi Stop M2 Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Manual Sweep Function Group Menu Map Description SWEEP This softkey lets you set the swept signal generator to the manual sweep mode of operation Depending on what parameter is sweeping you can use either the rotary knob or the ARROW keys to manually sweep between the start stop limits In manual sweep mode the swept signal generator does not automatically retrace at the sweep end point the user must turn the rotary knob to retrace and the green SWEEP LED does not light The resolution of the rotary knob is 0 1 of the sweep span in either start stop or CF AF mode The resolution of the and J arrow keys are dependent on the Operating and Programming Reference M 1 Manual Sweep Programming Codes See Also resolution defined by the and keys Frequencies in the manual sweep mode are synthesized just as they are in CW mode There are two major differences between manual sweep and a sweep generated by activating the CW function and rotating the rotary knob or pressing the ARROW keys 1 The sweep output voltage ramp is 0 to 10 V in both modes but in CW mode 0 V corresponds to lowest frequency of the swept signal generato
107. or CONT is pressed Activates the list frequency sweep mode Activates the analog frequency sweep mode Activates the stepped frequency sweep mode Sets the sweep time to a minimum value for a given span Sets the time delay after phase lock and before a trigger pulse is sent from the ANALYZER INTERFACE BNC A source settled SRQ is generated Programming Codes See Also Sweep Mode List SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 sweep Mode List Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This softkey activates the step frequency list mode To use this type of sweep a frequency list must have been entered otherwise an error message appears In this mode the swept signal generator steps only those frequencies defined by the frequency list An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI FREQuency MODE LIST Analyzer SN CONNECTORS List Menu Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference S 73 sweep Mode Ramp Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This softkey activates the analog frequency sweep mode Ramp sweep mode is the factory preset state An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI FREQuency MODE SWEep SWEep FREQuency GENeratio
108. output power Negative coupling factor values are required for valid entry See Specifications for the coupling factor range SCPI POWer ALC CFACtor lt num gt dB MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE T Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator in Chapter 1 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This hardkey lets you select a synthesized continuous wave frequency When you press cw the swept signal generator stops sweeping green SWEEP LED off and displays gt CW XXXXX MHz where XXXXX represents a frequency value Use either the rotary knob the step keys with or without the left right arrow keys or the numerical entry keys with a terminator key to set the desired value If a small change is desired use the left and right arrow keys to underline the digit to be changed SCPI FREQuency CW lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE CW Analyzer CW CW CF Coupled START CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference C 13 CW CF Coupled Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey couples the CW function to the center frequency function Any change initiated in either one of these parameters causes a change in the other SCPI FREQuency CW AUTO ON OFF 1 0
109. query forms are useful for determining the range of values allowed for a given parameter In some instruments extended numeric parameters accept engineering unit suffixes as part of the parameter value Refer to the command summary to see if this capability exists Note that extended numeric parameters are not used for common commands or STATus subsystem commands Examples of extended numeric parameters 100 any simple numeric values 1 23 largest valid setting 4 56e lt space gt 3 7 89E 01 256 5 MAX MIN valid setting nearest negative infinity 100 mV negative 100 millivolts 1 84 Getting Started Programming Discrete Parameters Use discrete parameters to program settings that have a finite number of values Discrete parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting They have a long and a short form just like command mnemonics You can used mixed upper and lower case letters for discrete parameters Examples of discrete parameters used with the ROSCillator subsystem INTernal internal frequency standard EXTernal external frequency standard NONE no frequency standard free run mode Although discrete parameters values look like command keywords do not confuse the two In particular be sure to use colons and spaces properly Use a colon to separate command mnemonics from each other Use a space to separate parameters from command mnemonics Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent a single bina
110. s display then pause 200 Return the source to local control 210 to 230 Print a message on the computer s display Setting Up A Typical Sweep Example Program 3 In swept operation the swept signal generator is programmed for the proper sweep frequency range sweep time power level and marker frequencies for a test measurement This program sets up the swept signal generator for a general purpose situation The instrument is the same as in program 1 Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program 10 Source 719 20 ABORT 7 30 LOCAL 7 40 CLEAR Source 50 REMOTE Source 60 OUTPUT Source RST 70 OUTPUT Source FREQuency MODE SWEep 80 OUTPUT Source FREQuency STARt 4 GHZ 90 OUTPUT Source FREQuency STOP 7 GHz 100 OUTPUT Source POWer LEVel 5 DBM 110 OUTPUT Source SWEep TIME 500MS 120 OUTPUT Source MARKer1 STATe ON FREQuency 4 5GHZ 130 OUTPUT Source MARKer2 STATe ON FREQuency 6111E6 140 OUTPUT Source 0PC 150 ENTER Source X 160 OUTPUT Source POWer STATe ON 170 OUTPUT Source INITIate CONTinuous ON 180 CLS 190 PRINT Source setup complete 200 PRINT Verify that the source is sweeping from 210 PRINT 4 GHz to 7 GHz at a power of 5 dBm 220 PRINT with a sweeptime of 0 5 seconds 230 END Run the program Program Comments 10 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable 20 to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 Set the source
111. sent POWer STATe 1 or POWer STATe ON 1 66 Getting Started Programming Types of Commands Commands can be separated into two groups common commands and subsystem commands Common commands are generally not measurement related They are used to manage macros status registers synchronization and data storage Common commands are easy to recognize because they all begin with an asterisk such as IDN OPC and RST Common commands are defined by IEEE 488 2 Subsystem commands include all measurement functions and some general purpose functions Subsystem commands are distinguished by the colon used between keywords as in FREQuency CW Each command subsystem is a set of commands that roughly corresponds to a functional block inside the instrument For example the POWer subsystem contains commands for power generation while the STATus subsystem contains commands for accessing status registers Common Subsystem Commands Commands RST MEAS VOLT IDN FREQ 1KHz po75b Figure 1 24 SCPI Command Types The remaining paragraphs in this subsection discuss subsystem commands in more detail Remember some commands are implemented in one instrument and not in another depending on its measurement function Getting Started Programming 1 67 Subsystem Command Trees The Command Tree Structure Most programming tasks involve subsystem commands SCPI uses a hierarchical structure for subsystem commands similar to the file
112. softkey is selected the swept signal generator waits for an GPIB trigger to trigger a sweep An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI TRIGger SOURce BUS Analyzer TS CONT SINGLE Sweep Menu Operating and Programming Reference S 63 Start Sweep Trigger Ext Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP When this softkey is selected the swept signal generator waits for an external hardware trigger to trigger a sweep Connect the trigger pulse to TRIGGER INPUT It is activated on a TTL rising edge An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI TRIGger SOURce EXT Analyzer T3 CONT SINGLE Sweep Menu Step Control Master Function Group Menu Map Description FREQUENCY This softkey lets you designate the swept signal generator as the master control in a dual swept signal generator measurement system A dual swept signal generator system two tone measurement system facilitates accurate device characterizations by providing one timebase reference for both sources This technique reduces instabilities from temperature or line voltage fluctuations or drift The swept signal generators can be operated in either ramp sweep or step sweep modes for both fixed offset and swept offset measurements Figure S 1 shows the connections required for a two tone system S 64 Operating and Programming Reference
113. status clear C 2 feature status D 6 filter transition 1 107 firmware datecode identify S 60 flatness array frequency value E 2 user F 4 flatness corrected power 1 33 flatness correction clear value C 3 copy frequency list C 11 frequency increment A 23 HP Agilent 437B measure at all frequencies M 7 HP Agilent 437B measure at one frequency M 7 M 8 HP Agilent 437B measure functions M 27 number of points A 24 start frequency A 25 stop frequency A 26 flatness correction example program 1 103 flatness menu F 4 flatness on off F 10 FM deviation I 4 rate L5 FM coupling M 17 FM deviation maximum M 17 FM input connector C 5 FM modulation M 17 FM on off AC F 12 FM on off DC F 13 FM on off ext F 14 FM on off int F 14 FM output rear panel M 11 FM waveform noise Il 5 ramp L 6 square 7 FNxfer fail F 3 forgiving listening 1 66 1 83 frequency center C 1 coupled to center C 13 CW C 13 difference marker D 5 display zero Z 1 stepped sweep functions S 68 sweep mode define start S 61 frequency calibration menu F 15 frequency correction pair E 2 frequency follow F 16 frequency increment A 23 frequency list dwell time E 3 dwell time all points G 1 frequency increment A 23 frequency value E 4 Index 9 Index 10 number of points A 24 E 4 offset value all points G 1 power offset E 4 start frequency A 25 step sweep activate S 73 stop freque
114. swept signal generator not just temporarily use the softkey Start M1 Stop M2 As an example of the delta marker function Select Marker M3 and enter 6 7 Ghz Select Delta Marker The frequency difference between marker 3 and marker 1 is displayed and the CRT trace is intensified between the two markers The active entry area displays gt DELTA MKR 3 1 2700 000000 MHz SWEEP OUTPUT Marker 1 was chosen because it is selected as the delta marker reference To change reference markers select Delta Mkr Ref Select M2 as the reference Watch the display change to indicate gt DELTA MKR 3 2 1200 000000 MHz You can choose any of the five markers as a reference but when delta marker is on if the reference marker has a frequency value higher than the last active marker the difference between the frequencies is negative and is displayed as such by the swept signal generator The CRT display continues to intensify the difference between the two markers When delta marker is showing in the active entry area the ENTRY area is active Rotate the rotary knob and watch the frequency difference change The last active marker in this case marker 3 changes frequency value not the reference marker Z AXIS BLANK MKR e e a oooo oooo000 oo00 aoon G6000 SHEPT SIGNAL OSCILLOSCOPE GENERATOR Marker Operation RF OUTPUT 10DB ATTENUATOR D
115. the default power subsystem units RST value is DBM Operating and Programming Reference S 55 SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION STANDARD OPERATION STATUS REGISTER SUMMARY BT REQUEST SERVICE RQS STANDARD EVENT STATUS REGISTER SUMMARY BIT MESSAGE AVAILABLE MAV DATA QUEST TIONABLE STATUS REGISTER SUMMARY BIT DESCRIPTION STANDARD EVE USER REQUEST KEY PRESET T STATUS GROUP EVENT REGISTER COMMAND REQUEST ESR ERROR CONTROL DECIMAL VALUE ENABLE REGISTER ESE lt num gt BIT UNUSED UNUSED RESERVED DECIMAL VALUE BIT S 56 Operating and Programming Reference ESE STATUS BYTE REGISTER STB SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE REGISTER SRE lt num gt SRE RESERVED FOR e TMSL DEFINITION UNUSED STANDARD OPERA UNUSED PROGRESS DISPLAY CHANGE UNUSED ALWAYS 0 MON STATUS GROUP UNUSED ALWAYS ALWAYS 9 UNUSED UNUSED ALWAYS 0 SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE SWEEPING UNUSED ALWAYS Ko SETTLING CALIBRA TING DECIMAL VALUE 14 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 2 0 BIT DECIMAL VALUE BIT RESERVED FOR lt _ _ UNUSED TMSL DEFINITIONS UNUSED DATA UNUSED QUESTIONABLE S HARDWARE ERRO
116. the next frequency point of the frequency list provided the swept signal generator is in sweep list mode SCPI LIST TRIGger SOURce EX Ternal Analyzer NONE List Menu Pt Trig Menu Sweep Mode List Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference L 9 Function Group INSTRUMENT STATE Menu Map NONE Description This hardkey lets you cancel remote operation and return the swept signal generator to front panel operation The front panel keys are deactivated when the swept signal generator is operated remotely If the external controller executes a LOCAL LOCKOUT command pressing the key does not return the swept signal generator to front panel control Programming Codes SCPI LOCAL Analyzer LOCAL See Also NONE Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 L 10 Operating and Programming Reference Mi M2 Sweep Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey lets you set the swept signal generator to start sweeping at the frequency of marker 1 M1 and stop sweeping at the frequency of marker 2 M2 M2 must have a higher frequency value than M1 If Mi M2 Sweep is activated when M2 is ata lower frequency than M1 the values of M1 and M2 are permanently interchanged While this function is active the start stop frequencies of the swept signal generator are changed to the values
117. the packing slip Procedures for checking the basic operation of the swept signal generator are in Chapter 4 Operator s Check and Routine Maintenance You will find procedures for checking electrical performance in the Performance Tests chapter of your Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide If there is any electrical or mechanical defect or if the shipment is incomplete notify the nearest Agilent Technologies office If the shipping container is damaged or if the cushioning material shows signs of stress notify the carrier as well as the Agilent Technologies office Keep the shipping material for the carrier s inspection The Agilent office will arrange for repair or replacement without waiting for a claim settlement Installation 3 1 Equipment Supplied Options Available 3 2 Installation All 8360 B Series swept signal generators are sent from the factory with the following basic accessories m Rack handles mounted m Power cord m Software package m A set of manuals The following adapters are also shipped with the swept signal generators Table 3 1 Adapter Descriptions and Part Numbers Shipped with Each Agilent Swept Signal Generator Model 83620B 83622B 83623B 83624B 83630B TypeN F to 3 5 mm F 1250 1745 3 5 mm F to 3 5 mm F 5061 5311 83640B 83650B 2 4mm F to K F 1250 2187 2 4 mm F to
118. the values are entered L 6 Operating and Programming Reference Note Programming Codes List Menu 2 If the minimum and maximum frequencies of the swept signal generator frequency range are not the endpoints desired for the frequency list use the Auto Fill Start and Auto Fill Stop softkeys to define the frequency list endpoints Then use either the Auto Fill Incr or Auto Fill Pts softkeys to create the list A list created by this method is ordered with the lowest frequency as the first point and the highest frequency as the last point of the frequency list Editing Frequency Points To add a frequency point to the list place the active entry arrow gt where you want the next frequency point to appear The frequency point is added directly after the value indicated by the arrow Lists created by the Auto Fill method are appended to an existing list much the same way frequency points are added to a list The newly created list is added between the frequency point indicated by the active entry arrow and the point directly after it If adding a new list of frequencies causes the existing list to exceed the maximum number of frequency points allowed 801 the new list is not appended to the existing list The error message TOO MANY LIST PTS REQUESTED is displayed To remove a frequency point and its associated offset value and dwell time use the delete menu Delete Current softkey To remove an entire frequency l
119. there is a discrepancy between voltages the power is increased or decreased until the desired output level is achieved For comprehensive theory on the ALC system refer to the entry in the A section of this manual The factory generated internal calibration data of the swept signal generator is digitally segmented into 1601 data points across the start stop frequency span chosen Subsequently these points are converted into 1601 reference voltages for the ALC system The digital ALC control scheme not only delivers excellent power accuracy and flatness at the output port of the swept signal generator but also provides the means to execute the user flatness correction feature Generally a power meter is required to create a table of correction data that produces flat power at the test port You may measure and enter correction data for up to 801 points The correction data contained in the table is linearly interpolated to produce a 1601 point data array across the start stop frequency span set on the swept signal generator The 1601 point data array is summed with the internal calibration data of the swept signal generator Figure F 3 Operating and Programming Reference F 7 Fltness Menu When user flatness correction is enabled the sum of the two arrays produces the 1601 reference voltages for the ALC system 1601 Equadistant Point Array CorPair Accessible Only Disable From a Computer Complete Yes 1601 Point
120. to a minimum value for a chosen span and meet all specifications The sweep time is limited by a 300 MHz ms sweep rate An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI SWEep TIME AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE SWEEP TIME Power Level and Sweep Time Operation in Chapter 1 SYSTEM menu Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This hardkey reveals the system menu Alternate Regs Causes the swept signal generator to alternate on successive sweeps between the present instrument state and a second instrument state stored in an internal register Dim Display Dims the swept signal generator s display Disp Status Displays the present status of the swept signal generator GPIB Menu Reveals the GPIB control menu Preset Mode Factory Sets the preset state as defined by the manufacturer to be recalled by the PRESET key Preset Mode User Sets the preset state as defined by the user to be recalled by PRESET Ref Osc Menu Reveals the frequency standard options menu Save User Preset Stores the present instrument state in a special preset storage register Security Menu Reveals the menu that controls the security features of the swept signal generator Operating and Programming Reference S 77 SYSTEM Software Rev Causes the swept signal generator to display the date code of its internal software Usrkey Clear Activates the USER DEFINED menu and lets you delet
121. value is INTernal e PULM STATe ONJOFF 1 0 e PULM STATe Sets and queries the state of pulse modulation The RST value is 0 e ROSCillator SOURce e ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal NONE Sets and queries the reference oscillator selection switch The command to set the switch will cause ROSC SOUR AUTO OFF to be done also The RST value is automatically determined e ROSCillator SOURce AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e ROSCillator SOURce AUTO Sets and queries the automatic reference selection switch The RST value is 1 e STATus OPERation CONDition Queries the Standard Operation Condition register e STATus OPERation ENABle lt num gt e STATus OPERation ENABle Sets and queries the Standard Operation Enable register The STATus PRESet value is 0 e STATus OPERation EVENt Queries the Standard Operation Event Register This is a destructive read e STATus OPERation NTRansition lt num gt e STATus OPERation NTRansition Sets and queries the Standard Operation Negative Transition Filter The STATus PRESet value is 0 e STATus OPERation PTRansition lt num gt e STATus OPERation PTRansition Sets and queries the Standard Operation Positive Transition Filter After STATus PRESet all used bits are set to 1s Operating and Programming Reference S 47 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e STATUS PRESet This command presets the following enable and transition registers MSIB OPERation QUEStionable and SRECeiver
122. value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register e ESR Queries the value of the Standard Event Status Register This is a destructive read e IDN This returns an identifying string to the GPIB The response is in the following format HEWLETT PACKARD model serial number DD MMM YY where the actual model number serial number and firmware revision of the swept signal generator queried is passed e LRN This returns a long string of device specific characters that when sent back to the swept signal generator restores that instrument state e 0PC Operation complete command The swept signal generator generates the OPC message in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending operations have finished such as sweep or selftest e 0PC Operation complete query The swept signal generator returns an ASCII 1 when all pending operations have finished S 14 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e O0PT This returns a string identifying any device options e RCL lt num gt The instrument state is recalled from the specified memory register The value range is from 0 to 8 e RST The swept signal generator is set to a predefined condition as follows AM DEPTH value is 50 AM INTernal FREQuency value is 1 kHz AM MODE NORMal AM SOURce EXTernal AM STATe OFF AM TYPE LINear CALibration PEAKing AUTO OFF CALibration POWer ATTenation 0 DBM CALibration POWer RANGe
123. varied at a rate determined by the AM input or at a rate set by softkey for internal AM See Specifications for the AM characteristics input range and damage level An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active A 18 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also AM Type 100 V SCPI AM TYPE EXPponential Analyzer NONE atc CONNECTORS mob Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 AM Type 100 V Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MOD MODULATION This softkey Option 002 only scales the amplitude modulation function linearly The amplitude of the RF output changes linearly as a function of AM input changes or at a rate set by softkey for internal AM See Specifications for the AM characteristics input range and damage level An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI AM TYPE LINear Analyzer AM1 function on AMO function off atc CONNECTORS mob Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference A 19 ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER Function Group NONE Menu Map NONE Description The following is the status register structure of the swept signal generator when the analyzer programming language is selected This status structure is the structurally and syntactical
124. 0 ft and telephone modem operation over any distance Agilent Technologies Sales and Service offices can provide additional information on the GPIB extenders The codes next to the GPIB connector illustrated in Figure C 2 describe the GPIB electrical capabilities of the swept signal generator using IEEE Std 488 1978 mnemonics GPIB GP IB IEEE 488 and IEC 625 are all electrically equivalent Briefly the mnemonics translate as follows SH1 Source Handshake complete capability AH1 Acceptor Handshake complete capability T6 Talker capable of basic talker serial poll and unaddress if MLA TEO Talker Extended address no capability L4 Listener capable of basic listener and unaddress if MTA LEO Listener Extended address no capability SR1 Service Request complete capability RL1 Remote Local complete capability PPO Parallel Poll no capability DC1 Device Clear complete capability DT1 Device Trigger complete capability CO 1 2 3 28 Controller capability options CO no capabilities C1 system controller C2 send IFC and take charge C3 send REN C28 send I F messages E1 Electrical specification indicating open collector outputs These codes are described completely in the IEEE Std 488 1978 document published by The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New York New York 11017 SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE sends and receives digital and analog signals to
125. 0 kHz causes it to select the high ALC bandwidth mode POWer ALC BANDwidth AUTO OFF 0 POWer ALC BANDwidth lt freq gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE ALC ALC BW Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 A 10 Operating and Programming Reference ALC BW Menu ALC Bandwidth Select Low Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey sets the swept signal generator to the ALC low bandwidth position 10 kHz In this mode the ALC bandwidth operates in a narrow bandwidth for all sweep and modulation conditions An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI Sending the swept signal generator an ALC bandwidth frequency value of lt 10 kHz causes it to select the low ALC bandwidth mode POWer ALC BANDwidth AUTO OFF 0 POWer ALC BANDwidth lt freq gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE ALC ALC BW Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 ALC BW Menu Function Group Menu Map Description ALC This softkey reveals the softkeys of the ALC bandwidth select menu Sets the ALC bandwidth to be automatically chosen by the swept signal generator depending on the current sweep and modulation conditions Sets the ALC bandwidth to the high bandwidth position 100 kHz and to remain there for all sweep and modulation conditions ALG Bandwidth Select
126. 1 112 in general programming model 1 110 IDN S 14 IEEE mailing address 1 120 IEEE 488 1 how to get a copy 1 120 IEEE 488 2 how to get a copy 1 120 IEEE 488 2 common commands S 14 IM Mediate set by RST 1 112 trigger command defined 1 118 trigger command discussed 1 112 trigger source defined 1 119 implied commands 1 72 increment key A 21 increment step size CW frequency U 2 power U 1 increment step size swept frequency U 3 initial inspection 3 1 initialize the swept signal generator P 8 INITiate CONTinuous initiatecont usage discussed 1 111 IM Mediate initiateimm usage discussed 1 111 initiate trigger state details of operation 1 111 INIT trigger configuration example commands using 1 115 instruments defined 1 63 instrument state A 12 instrument state recall R 1 instrument state recall command S 15 instrument state restore string S 14 instrument state save S 1 instrument state save command S 17 integer response data discussed in detail 1 86 integers rounding 1 84 interface address change 3 8 factory set 3 7 power meter M 8 printer P 11 view 3 8 interface bus trigger frequency list L 8 interface bus connector C 7 interface bus softkeys H 1 interface bus trigger stepped sweep S 70 interface bus trigger sweep mode S 63 interface language analyzer P 13 CHIL P 18 SCPI P 14 interface language selection 3 6 internal AM A 17 internal AM depth L 1 internal AM rate
127. 1 39 SWEPT SIGNAL 437B GENERATOR POWER METER oo 35 a eO GPIB oo oo oo 38 8 of SOURCE MODULE RF OUT INTERFACE DUT MM WAVE SOURCE ODULE 3 N TEST PORT SWEPT SIGNAL 437B GENERATOR POWER METER oo o 33 a oO GPIB oo DD oo 33 g of 90900 ooo000 o0 o ooo 0000 MICROWAVE AMPLIFIER SOURCE MODULE RF OUT INTERFACE RF OUT RF IN POWER SENSOR 0 DUT MM WAVE SOURCE MODULE RF IN TEST PORT SMFLATB Figure 1 20 Creating Arbitrarily Spaced Frequency Correction Pairs in a Swept mm wave Environment For this example refer to menu map 5 POWER 1 The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 20 assumes that you have followed the steps necessary to correctly level the configuration If you have questions about external leveling refer to Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator Setup Power Meter 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor 3 Connect the power sensor to test port 4 Enter and store in the power meter the power sensor s cal factors for correction frequencies to be used 1 40 Getting Started Advanced Note U V and W band power sensors are not available from Agilent Technologies For these frequencies use the Anritsu ML83A Power Meter with the MP71
128. 2 For the standard 002 Pulse Menu softkey go to the Pulse Menu heading that precedes this one This softkey accesses the pulse modulation softkeys These softkeys engage external internal and scalar pulse modulation They allow you to define the rise time and give access to the internal menu for defining the parameters of the internally generated pulse modulation Pulse On Off Ext Pulse On Off Scalar Pulse On Off Int Internal Menu Pulse Rise Time Fast Pulse Rise Time Slow Pulse Rise Time Auto Invert Input Toggles on and off the pulse modulation mode for an external pulse source Toggles on and off the internal scalar modulation mode Toggles on and off the internal pulse modulation mode Gives access to the internal menu for defining the parameters of the internally generated pulse modulation Applies a fast rise pulse filter to both internal and external pulse waveforms Applies a slow rise pulse filter to both internal and external pulse waveforms Automatically applies the appropriate filter fast or slow to both internal and external pulse waveforms Inverts the pulse input logic When active a 5 V input turns RF power off Programming Codes SCPI NONE see the individual softkeys listed Analyzer NONE See Also MOD also see Modulation and Pulse P 18 Operating and Programming Reference Pulse On OffIntrnl Pulse On Off Extrnl Function Group Menu Map De
129. 2 227 19 for other agencies Copyright Agilent Technologies 1996 1997 1999 2000 2001 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 USA Certification Warranty Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agi
130. 2c 5 Analog Power Sweep External Leveling Source Match 2c 6 Specifications Typical 83650B L Power Flatness dB 0 01 26 5 50 Frequency GHz Range 20 dBm to maximum available power can be offset using step attenuator Range At External HP Agilent 33330D E Detector 36 to 4 dBm At External Leveling Input 200 uV to 0 5 volts Bandwidth External Detector Mode 10 or 100 kHz sweep speed and modulation mode dependent nominal Power Meter Mode 0 7 Hz nominal internally leveled typical lt 20 GHz 1 6 1 SWR lt 40 GHz 1 8 1 SWR lt 50 GHz 2 0 1 SWR 6 Typically 2 0 1 SWR at frequencies below 50 MHz Spectral Purity Spurious Signals Typical ALC Linearity Frequencies lt 20GHz Linearity dB 20 10 O 10 20 ALC Level dBm Specifications apply in CW step list and manual sweep modes of operation Harmonics Output 83620B 83623B 83630B 83640B 83650B Frequencies 83622B 83624B lt 2 0 GHz Standard 307 257 307 307 307 Option 006 307 257 307 307 30 gt 2 0 and lt 26 5 GHz Standard 50 25 50 50 50 Option 006 60 60 60 50 50 gt 26 5 GHz Standard 40 40 Option 006 40 40 Subharmonics Output 83620B 83623B 83630B 83640B 83650B Frequencies 83622B 83624B lt 7 GHz None None None None None gt 7 and lt 20 GHz 50 50 50 50 50 gt 20 and lt
131. 40 41 Systems to 8360 B Series Systems The following paragraphs are intended to assist you in converting existing HP Agilent 8340 8341 based systems to 8360 B Series swept signal generator based systems Both manual and remote operational differences are addressed Manual operation topics are a functional compatibility m front panel operation m conditions upon instrument preset m connections to other instruments Remote operation topics are a language compatibility m status structure m programming languages Installation 3 19 3 20 Manual Operation Installation Compatibility The 8360 B Series swept signal generators are designed to be in all but very few cases a complete feature superset of the HP Agilent 8340 8341 synthesized sweepers The most notable omissions are that the 8360 B Series does not accept m line triggers ie 50 or 60 Hz line frequency m an external leveling input from positive diode detectors Front Panel Operation The 8360 B Series uses a softkey menu driven approach toward accessing instrument functions versus a front panel key or shift key sequence as with the HP Agilent 8340 8341 Instrument Preset Conditions The factory defined preset conditions for the 8360 B Series are identical to those for the HP Agilent 8340 8341 The 8360 B Series also allows you to define a different set of preset conditions Refer to Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 for examples and mor
132. 40 GHz 50 40 40 gt 40 GHz 358 T Specification is 20 dBc below 50 MHz 8 Specification typical below 0 dBm Specifications 2c 7 Typical 83620B Harmonics amp Subharmonics H Ap ae tama a DER E MLL TT al Mi T T NWP a 0 0 01 2 0 7 13 5 20 Carrier Frequency GHz Typical 83623B Harmonics at 17 dBm 0 01 2 7 13 5 20 Carrier Frequency GHz Non Harmonically Related Output Frequencies lt 2 0 GHz 60 gt 2 0 and lt 20 GHz 60 gt 20 GHz and lt 26 5 GHz 58 gt 26 5 and lt 40 GHz 54 gt 40 GHz 52 Specification applies at output levels 0 dBm and below 2c 8 Specifications Single Sideband Phase Noise dBc Hz Residual FM RMS 50 Hz to 15 kHz bandwidth Power Line Related lt 300 Hz offset from carrier 10 MHz to lt 7 GHz 55 7 GHz to lt 13 5 GHz 49 13 5 GHz to 20 GHz 45 gt 20 GHz to lt 26 5 GHz 43 26 5 GHz to lt 38 GHz 39 38 GHz to 50 GHz 37 Offset from Carrier Band s 100 Hz 1 kHz 10kHz 100 kHz 10 MHz to lt 7 GHz 70 78 86 107 7 GHz to lt 13 5 GHz 64 72 80 101 13 5 GHz to 20 GHz 60 68 76 97 gt 20 GHz to lt 26 5 GHz 58 66 74 95 26 5 GHz to lt 38 GHz 54 62 70 91 38 GHz to 50 GHz 52 60 68 89 Typical Phase Noise 10GHz Carrier 40 60 80 oO aay Z2 100 120 140 100Hz 1kHz 10kHz 100kHz 1MHz 1OMHz
133. 5 004 40 to 60 GHz the MP716A 50 to 75 GHz or the MP81B 75 to 110 GHz power sensors Since the Anritsu model ML83A Power Meter is not capable of internally storing power sensor cal factors you must manually correct the data entry Refer to example 2 for information on manual entry of correction data 10 11 Setup Swept Signal Generator Parameters Turn on the swept signal generator and press PRESET The following occurs a The source module s frequency span is displayed on the swept signal generator a The swept signal generator s leveling mode is automatically changed from internal to module leveling m The source module s maximum specified power is set and displayed Press FREQUENCY 000e G2 Stor WY GHz The frequency sweep is set from 26 5 to 40 GHz Press POWER LEVEL 7 dBm The source module power is set to 7 dBm for maximum power to the device under test Access User Flatness Correction Menu Press POWER MENU Select Fltness Menu Select Delete Menu Delete All This step insures that the flatness array is empty Press PRIOR Leave the delete menu and return to the previous softkey menu Select Enter Freq 2 6 Q C Ghz to enter 26 5 GHz as the first correction frequency Enter 31 32 5 and 40 GHz to complete the list Notice that the frequencies are arbitrarily spaced Getting Started Advanced 1 41 1 42 Getting Started Advanced 12 13
134. 801 The portion of the above command contained in can be entered from one to 801 times This command creates the frequency correction pair array similar to the front panel array The correction entered is at the associated frequency and frequencies in between are determined by linear interpolation m CORRection FLATness This command queries the flatness array created with CORR FLAT a CORRection ARRay i lt num gt DB 1601 1601 The portion of the above command contained in must be entered 1601 times This array must contain 1601 evenly spaced correction values This command creates the 1601 point correction set that has no equivalent front panel entry If this command is used to enter flatness correction information the CORRection SOURce command described below will be set to array There is an array for the foreground state i 0 and for the background state i 1 If i is not specified the default is the foreground state i 0 a CORRection ARRay i This command queries the entire 1601 point correction set a CORRection SOURce i ARRay FLATness Operating and Programming Reference F 9 Fltness Menu See Also When the above command is set to flatness CORR SOUR FLAT the array chosen is the frequency correction pair array When the command is set to array CORR SOUR ARR the array chosen is the 1601 point correction set CORRection SO UR cei Queries the source of correction CORRection STATe ON OFF 1 0
135. 9 select high A 10 select low A 10 ALC bandwidth selection 1 50 ALC disabled theory of A 8 ALC leveling internal L 3 mm wave module L 4 normal L 1 power meter L 4 search L 2 ALC menu A 2 4 ALC off L 1 ALC off mode 1 32 ALC open loop L 1 ALC search mode 1 32 align output filter A 27 P 1 alternate registers A 12 altitude pressure 3 9 always calibrate sweep span S 74 AM ALC off mode D 1 deep D 1 M 15 depth I 1 exponentially scaled A 15 A 18 linearly scaled A 15 A 19 rate L1 M 15 AM bandwidth calibration M 16 AM FM output connector C 4 AM input connector C 4 AM output rear panel M 11 amplitude markers 1 14 A 17 amplitude modulation M 13 display depth M 9 greater depth D 1 internal IT 1 softkeys A 14 amplitude modulation bandwidth calibration A 12 14 amplitude modulation on off A 15 16 A 18 19 AM waveform noise I 2 ramp 1 2 sine 3 I 6 square 3 triangle 1 4 L7 analog sweep mode S 73 analyzer compatibility P 13 analyzer language P 13 analyzer programming language A 19 angle brackets 1 64 apply flatness correction F 10 arrow keys A 21 assign softkey A 22 attenuator uncouple U 1 attenuator uncouple M 14 attenuator value set 59 auto fill increment A 23 auto fill number of points A 24 auto fill start A 25 auto fill stop A 26 automatically set sweep time S 76 automatic sweep time 1 10 automatic trigger stepped sweep S 69 auto track A 27 a
136. A lt 70 dB LpA lt 70 dB Operator position am Arbeitsplatz Normal position normaler Betrieb per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 t 19 Instrument Markings ISM1 A The instruction documentation symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product This is an ON symbol The symbol ON is used to mark the position of the instrument power line switch This is an ON symbol The symbol ON is used to mark the position of the instrument power line switch This is a STANDBY symbol The STANDBY symbol is used to mark the position of the instrument power line switch This is an OFF symbol The OFF symbol is used to mark the position of the instrument power line switch This is an AC symbol The AC symbol is used to indicate the required nature of the line module input power xi xii Table 0 1 Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Offices UNITED STATES Instrument Support Center Agilent Technologies 800 403 0801 EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters France Germany Agilent Technologies S A Agilent Technologies France Agilent Technologies GmbH 150 Route du Nant d Avril 1 Avenue Du Ca
137. ANY CORRECTION PTS REQUESTED List Menu When selected the swept signal generator waits for a frequency increment value to be entered gt Increment is displayed in the active entry area A list of frequencies is created automatically with all points separated by the frequency increment value The list begins at the auto fill start frequency and ends at a frequency less than or equal to the auto fill stop frequency If the increment value requested creates a list that exceeds the number of points available 801 the following message appears TOO MANY LIST PTS REQUESTED SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 A 24 Operating and Programming Reference Auto Fill Pts Auto Fill Pts Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 This softkey is used in two locations Fltness Menu and List Menu Flatness Menu When selected the swept signal generator waits for a numeric value representing the number of correction points to be entered gt Number of Correction Points is displayed in the active entry area A list of frequencies containing the number of specified points is created automatically The list begins at the auto fill start frequency and ends at the auto fill stop frequency The rest of the points are equally spaced between them A minimum of two points m
138. Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator Including Options 001 002 004 006 and 008 User s Guide Serial Number Prefixes This manual applies directly to any swept signal generator with the model and serial number prefix combination shown below You may have to modfiy this manual so that it applies directly to your instrument version Refer to the Instrument History chapter Agilent Technologies 83620B 22B 23B 24B 30B 3844A and Below Agilent Technologies 83640B 50B 3844A and Below opie Agilent Technologies Part No 08360 90127 Printed in USA May 2001 Supersedes March 2001 Notice Restricted Rights Legend The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights of Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 for DOD agencies and subparagraphs c 1 and c 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 5
139. Also MODULATION This softkey activates distortion reduction mode for deep AM operation Deep AM automatically switches to the ALC off leveling mode when the modulation level drives the detector logger part of the RF components see Figure A 1 below its detection range The modulated waveform is DC coupled and ALC leveled above 13 dBm Below 13 dBm the waveform is DC controllable but not ALC leveled and is subject to drift of typically 0 25 dB s This value is reduced by a factor of 10 if the low ALC bandwidth feature is selected An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI AM MODE DEEP AM STATe ON OFE 1 0 Analyzer NONE ALC AM On Off Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Delay Menu Function Group Menu Map Description oD This softkey Option 002 only accesses the pulse delay softkeys These softkeys let you delay the internally generated pulsed output from either the PULSE SYNC OUT signal or from the external pulse signal at the PULSE input Delays the output pulse from the PULSE SYNC OUT signal Pulse Delay Normal Delays the output pulse from the PULSE input Pulse Delay Trig d D 2 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Delete All SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE MOD also see Modulation and Pulse Delete Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programm
140. Auto ALC Bandwidth Select High Operating and Programming Reference A 11 ALC BW Menu See Also ALC Bandwidth Select Low Sets the ALC bandwidth to the low bandwidth position 10 kHz and to remain there for all sweep and modulation conditions TA Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Altrnate Regs Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey causes the swept signal generator to alternate on successive sweeps between the present instrument state and a second instrument state stored in an internal register 1 to 8 Select Altrnate Regs once to turn it on a second time to turn it off An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem ALTernate STATe ON OFF 1 0 SYSTem ALTernate lt num gt MAXimum MINimum Analyzer ALin where n 1 through 8 function on ALO function off RECALL Saving and Recalling an Instrument State in Chapter 1 A 12 Operating and Programming Reference AM BW Cal Once AM BW Cal Always Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes USER CAL This softkey causes an AM bandwidth calibration to be performed every time a frequency or power parameter is changed SCPI CALibration AM AUTO ON Analyzer NONE See Also Modulation AM BW Cal Once Function Group USER CAL Menu Map 9 Description This softkey causes a single AM bandwidth calibration to
141. B Pres OOOO The data display area indicates the start frequency and the stop frequency The green SWEEP LED is on periodically off when sweep is retracing Because this is the active function the active entry area indicates gt STOP FREQUENCY 7890 000000 MHz Any subsequent entries change the stop frequency To change the start frequency press START which remains the active function until you press a different function key SHEEP FREQUENCY CE oe f ee 4 J INSTRUMENT STATE OQULATION VAX m SWEEP LED CW START STOP Figure 1 4 CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep CW Operation Start Stop Frequency Sweep 1 Press Cw 2 Enter value 3 Press terminator key Press START Enter value Press terminator key Press STOP Enter value Press terminator key D T O WM rR Getting Started Basic 1 7 Center Frequency Span Operation 1 8 Getting Started Basic Center frequency span is another way of establishing swept operation This is just a different way of defining sweep limits As an example of center frequency span operation Press CENTER 4 GHz Press Sean Ga The swept signal generator is now sweeping from 3 5 to 4 5 GHz to view these figures press either or STOP then SPAN The data display area indicates the center frequency as well as the span Notice that the green SWEEP L
142. CPI ROSCillator SOURce EX Ternal Analyzer NONE Ref Osc Menu 10 MHz Freq Std Intrnl Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey sets the swept signal generator to select the internal 10 MHz signal as the frequency reference If the internal signal is disconnected or not working properly UNLOCK appears on the message line of the display An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI ROSCillator SOURce INTernal Analyzer NONE Ref Osc Menu T 2 Operating and Programming Reference Tracking Menu 10 MHz Freq Std None Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey sets the reference oscillator to a free run state where no frequency reference is used An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI ROSCillator SOURce NONE Analyzer NONE Ref Osc Menu Tracking Menu Function Group Menu Map Description POWER USER CAL 5 9 In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this softkey One occurs in the POWER menu the other occurs in the USER CAL MENU Both softkeys operate the same way These softkeys access the tracking menu Realigns the swept signal generator s output filter and oscillator to maximize output power for the swept frequency mode Auto Track Periodically realigns the swept signal generator s output
143. CPI instruments work together to perform a stimulus response measurement This program measures the linearity of a voltage controlled oscillator VCO A VCO is a device that outputs a frequency proportional to an input signal level Figure 1 28 shows how the hardware is configured Unit Under Test Response Counter 20 BASIC Controller vcotest cdr Figure 1 28 Voltage Controlled Oscillator Test Program Listing 30 INTEGER First Last Testpoint Dummy 40 DIM Id 70 50 ASSIGN Stimulus TO 717 60 ASSIGN Response TO 718 80 First 0 90 Last 100 Getting Started Programming 1 77 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 CLEAR Stimulus CLEAR Response OUTPUT Stimulus RST OUTPUT Response RST PRINT Voltage Controlled Oscillator Test PRINT PRINT Source Used OUTPUT Stimulus IDN ENTER Stimulus Id PRINT Id PRINT PRINT Counter Used OUTPUT Response IDN ENTER Response Id PRINT Id PRINT OUTPUT Stimulus OUTPUT ON PRINT PRINT INPUT mv OUTPUT kHz PRINT Moe eee eel n Lf n PRINT FOR Testpoint First TO Last OUTPUT Stimulus SOURCE VOLT VAL Testpoint 1000 0PC ENTER Stimulus Dummy OUTPUT Response MEAS FREQ ENTER Re
144. Cc CI seuanesteseees Delta Marker Reference M2 M3 Mu MARKER MENU 8 MENU SELECT MODULATION MENU 4 Tracking Power Fitness Power more Menu Offset Menu Sweep 2 3 m coD a Uncoupl Set Up On Power more Atten Atten Power Slope 1 3 Auto we Peak RF Track Always Once Doubler Amp Mode Off AUTO On Copy Freq Mtr Meas CorPair more List Follow Menu Disable 3 3 ons coD cD Cc Measure Undef Cu Undef Current POWER MENU Selftest Full Fault Info Fault Menu coD Foult Info2 Unlock Info Foult info3 Clear Fault SERVICE SWEEP SwpTime Start Sweep Trigger more Auto Auto Bus Ext 2 3 Cc Cc E Sirk Sweep Mode List Romp T3 Step Step Step Dwell more Step Swp Pt Trig more Step Control more Size Points Dwell Coupled 1 3 Auto Bus Ext 2 3 Master Slave 3 3 m Cc cc m cD om Cc au m CZJ SWEEP MENU T SYSTEM ae Preset Mode Save User Dim more Factory User Preset Display 3 3 UsrMenu Ref Osc Security Software more Clear Menu Menu Rev 2 3 HP IB Altrnate Disp Usrkey more Menu Regs Status Clear 1 3 Adrs Programming Language Zero Save Clear Blank Menu SCPI Analyzr COL intrni Extrn None sAuto Freq Lock Memory Display cD co D Cc Cc C cD 8360 Meter Printer Ad
145. Codes See Also MARKER See MARKER Mi SCPI MAR Ker3 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MARKer3 STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer M3 function on MO function off Ampl Markers MARKER MkrRef Menu Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference M 5 Marker M4 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER See MARKER M1 SCPI MARKer4 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MARKer4 STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer M4 function on MO function off Ampl Markers MARKER MkrRef Menu Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Marker M5 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER See MARKER M1 SCPI MARKer5 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MARKer5 STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer M5 function on MO function off Ampl Markers MARKER MkrRef Menu Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 M 6 Operating and Programming Reference Measure Corr All Markers All Off Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey lets you turn all the markers off The frequency value given to the markers remains in memory and will be recalled when the marker softkeys are pr
146. Copy List CorPair Disable Coupling Factor CW CF Coupled Dblr Amp Menu Deep AM Delay Menu Delete Menu Delete All Delete Current Delete Undef Delta Marker Delta Mkr Ref Disp Status Doubler Amp Mode AUTO Doubler Amp Mode Off Doubler Amp Mode On Dwell Coupled A 18 A 19 A 20 A 22 A 23 A 24 A 25 A 26 A 27 A 28 B 1 C 1 C 2 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 4 C 11 C 12 C 12 C 13 C 13 C 14 D 1 D 2 D 2 D 3 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 9 D 10 D 10 Contents 5 Contents 6 8360 Adrs Enter Corr Enter Freq Enter List Dwell Enter List Freq Enter List Offset ENTRY KEYS ENTRY ON OFF Ext Det Cal Fault Menu Fault Info 1 Fault Info 2 Fault Info 3 Fltness Menu FM Coupling 100kHz FM Coupling DC FM Menu FM On Off AC FM On Off DC FM On Off Ext FM On Off Int Freq Cal Menu Freq Follow FREQUENCY Freq Mult Freq Offset FullUsr Cal Global Dwell Global Offset F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 10 F 11 F 11 F 12 F 13 F 13 F 14 F 15 F 16 F 16 F 17 F 18 F 19 F 20 G 1 G 1 HP IB Address HP IB Menu Internal AM Depth Internal AM Rate Internal AM Waveform Noise Internal AM Waveform Ramp Internal AM Waveform Sine Internal AM Waveform Square Internal AM Waveform Triangle Internal FM Deviation Internal FM Rate Internal FM Waveform Noise Internal FM Waveform Ramp Internal FM Waveform Sine Internal FM Waveform Square Internal FM Wavefor
147. D You can still do a factory preset When the user preset mode is active the softkey Factory Preset appears when you press PRESET An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem PRESet TYPE USER Analyzer NONE PRESET Preset Mode Factory Save User Preset Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 Printer Adrs Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets the swept signal generator recognize a printer address between 0 and 30 The swept signal generator can act as a controller for a printer during self test if the log to a printer feature is initiated SCPI DIAGnostic INSTrument PRINTer ADDRess lt num gt Analyzer NONE Adrs Menu Selftest Full Operating and Programming Reference P 11 PRIOR Function Group MENU SELECT Menu Map NONE Description This hardkey lets you view previous menus All menus visited from the last preset are remembered and displayed in a last visited first seen order Refer to Figure P 1 and follow the arrow paths as indicated FREQUENCY SOME OTHER PREVIOUS MENU o s o BLANK EYLABEL K AREA Up Dn Size Freq Freq more List Step Swp CW CF more Swept cw Offset Mult 1 2 Zoom Menu Menu Coupled 2 2 eesesenens Enter List PRIOR Offset Dwell Menu We He PRIOR All Current CD CD Figure P 1 How Works
148. D is off during all of the following retrace band crossings phase locking at the start frequency of each new sweep and during manual sweeps SCPI INITiate CONTinuous ON 1 Analyzer 51 Manual Sweep SINGLE Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference C 11 Copy List Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you copy the frequency information of the frequency list to the flatness correction menu If there is no frequency list to copy nothing happens SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE atc Fltness Menu CorPair Disable Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you disable the user flatness array frequency correction pairs so that the 1601 point flatness array will be applied when ison The 1601 point flatness array is accessible only through the GPIB interface SCPI CORRection SOURce 0 1 ARRay Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 C 12 Operating and Programming Reference Coupling Factor Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey allows specification of the coupling factor of an external coupler detector used to externally level the swept signal generator
149. ED is on While span is the active function try the rotary knob and arrow keys This symmetrical increase or decrease of the frequency span about the center frequency is one reason that center frequency span swept operation is used instead of start stop frequency sweep Another example illustrates the subtleties of center frequency span Press CENTER 4 GHz Press GHz Notice that the center frequency changed This is because the center frequency could not accommodate a span of 8 GHz without exceeding the lower frequency limit of the swept signal generator s specified frequency range If the low or high frequency range limits are exceeded the inactive center or span function is reset Experiment with the rotary knob and the arrow keys as alternate methods of data entry SHEEP FREQUENCY CE oe for ee 9 POWER H INSTRUMENT STATE SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE Seol center cdr SWEEP LED CENTER SPAN Figure 1 5 Center Frequency and Span Operation Center Frequency Span Operation Operation 1 Press CENTER 1 Press SPAN 2 Enter value 2 Enter value 3 Press terminator key 3 Press terminator key Getting Started Basic 1 9 Power Level and Sweep Time Operation Power Level Operation Sweep Time Operation 1 10 Getting Started Basic The swept signal generator can produce leveled power for CW swept frequency or power swe
150. EQUENCY This softkey lets you enter an offset value for a frequency in the frequency list A frequency point must be entered before a power value can be accepted otherwise the following error message appears ERROR Must first enter a List Frequency The rotary knob and the up down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequency points available to change the default power values An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 ENTRY KEYS Function Group Menu Map Description See Also NONE NONE The entry keys consist of the numeric entry keys 0 through 9 the decimal point key the negative sign backspace key and the terminator keys These keys are active whenever the ENTRY ON OFF LED is lit ARROW KEYS ROTARY KNOB Entry Area in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference E 5 ENTRY ON OFF Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ENTRY NONE This hardkey lets you turn off blank the active entry area and disable the ARROW keys rotary knob and entry keys When any function key hard or soft is pressed the active entry area is reactivated The yellow LED ENTRY ON next to indicates whether the entry area is active LED on active SCPI No specific code activates ENTRY ON OFF Analyzer EF off Arrow Keys
151. ETECTOR Figure 1 8 Marker Operation Delta Marker Operation 1 Press MARKER 1 Press MARKER 2 Select a marker key M1 MB 2 Select a marker key M1 MB 3 Enter value 3 Enter value 4 Press terminator key 4 Press terminator key 5 Select a different marker key M41 M5 6 Enter value 7 Press terminator key 8 Select Delta Mkr Ref 9 Select one of the previously chosen markers 10 Press PRIOR 11 Select Pelta Marker Getting Started Basic 1 15 Saving and Recalling an Instrument State 1 16 Getting Started Basic The save recall registers store and access a previously set instrument state For example set the swept signal generator to sweep from 3 GHz to 15 GHz at a 10 dB power level with markers 1 and 2 set at 4 5 and 11 2 GHz Press START Ga Press STOP OQ O ara Press POWER LEVEL 0 4B m Press MARKER Select Marker M1 4 Q G Giz Select Marker M2 G G Gz To save this instrument state in register 1 press G To verify that the swept signal generator has saved this state Press PRESET Press RECALL 0 Press MARKER The active entry area displays gt RECALL REGISTER 1 RECALLED Notice the sweep end points power level and the asterisks next to the marker 1 and 2 key labels You can save instrument states in registers 1 through 8 Register 0 saves the last instrument state before power is t
152. F to determine the cause of the fault SCPI STATUS REGISTER Chapter 3 Operating and Programming Reference A 21 Arrow Keys Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ENTRY NONE This group of entry keys lets you manipulate numerical values in the active entry line and arrow keys identify by underlining the digit to be changed For example if CW frequency is in the active entry line and the display indicates gt CW 10005 000000 MHz You may wish to change the 5 to a6 Press the five times until the underline is under the 5 Now use the rotary knob or the f to change the 5 to a 6 The underlined digit remains the active character in this function until the swept signal generator is preset turned off or the underline is moved completely left or right The and J arrow keys increment or decrement the numeric value by a predetermined amount The increment value depends on the active function and the step value set All increment values are defaulted to their original values when the swept signal generator is preset unless Preset Mode User has defined the default differently SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Entry Area in Chapter 1 Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 A 22 Operating and Programming Reference CE Function Group USER DEFINED Menu Map NONE Description This hardkey lets you
153. GGER OUTPUT a STOP SWEEP IN OUT a GPIB INTERFACE a AUXILIARY INTERFACE The dedicated HP Agilent 8510 versions of the 8360 Agilent 83621B Agilent 83631B may be configured to power up to one of two possible system languages network analyzer language or SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments This configuration is controlled via a switch located on the rear panel of the instrument The factory default setting for this switch is network analyzer language at a GPIB address of 19 To interface with a network analyzer the language selected must be Analyzer language Refer to earlier paragraphs in this chapter for the rear panel switch settings Models other than the dedicated HP Agilent 8510 versions are set at the factory for SCPI To interface with a network analyzer the language selected must be Analyzer language Installation 3 21 3 22 Installation The HP Agilent 8757C E Scalar Network Analyzer The connections between the analyzer and the 8360 B Series are similar to the connections between the analyzer and the HP Agilent 8340 8341 The 8360 B Series differs from the HP Agilent 8340 8341 in one connection only It is unnecessary to connect the modulator drive signal from the analyzer to the source The 8360 B Series internally produces the 27 8 kHz modulated signal necessary for AC mode measurements on the analyzer The connections from the 8360 B Series to the analyzer are a Z AXIS BLANK MKRS a SWEEP
154. If you have problems study the details of how the input statement operates In particular investigate how the input statement handles punctuation characters such as comma and semicolon and how it handles lt new line gt and EOL To enter the previous response in HP BASIC you type ENTER Source CW_frequency Response examples do not show response message terminators because they are always lt new line gt lt END gt These terminators are typically automatically handled by the input statement The paragraph titled Details of Commands and Responses discusses message terminators in more detail Getting Started Programming 1 65 Essentials for Beginners Program and Response Messages This subsection discusses elementary concepts critical to first time users of SCPI Read and understand this subsection before going on to another This subsection includes the following topics Program and Response These paragraphs introduce the Messages basic types of messages sent between instruments and controllers Subsystem Command Trees These paragraphs describe the tree structure used in subsystem commands Subsystem Command Tables These paragraphs present the condensed tabular format used for documenting subsystem commands Reading Instrument Errors These paragraphs explain how to read and print an instrument s internal error messages Example Programs These paragraphs contain two simple measurement programs that ill
155. LOCK UNLVLED or FAULT An OVEN status message will appear on the message line if the swept signal generator has been disconnected from ac power This message will turn off within 10 minutes if it does not there may be a problem If a FAULT message is displayed refer to menu map 6 Service to access fault information 9 Terminate the RF output with a good source match either a 50 Q load or power sensor Press POWER LEVEL Increase the power level until the unleveled message is displayed on the message line Decrease the power level until the unleveled message turns off Note the power level reading Verify that the swept signal generator can produce maximum specified power without becoming unleveled This completes the operator s check If the swept signal generator does not perform as expected have a qualified service technician isolate and repair the fault See Service Information Operator s Check Routine Maintenance 4 3 Routine Maintenance WARNING How to Replace the Line Fuse Note Routine maintenance consists of replacing a defective line fuse cleaning the air filter cleaning the cabinet and cleaning the display These items are discussed in the following paragraphs Table 4 1 Fuse Part Numbers Voltage Fuse Part Number 115 V es 250 V 2110 0010 230 V 8A 250 V 2110 0003 For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating
156. MODE AM depth discrete DEEP NORMal SOURce AM source discrete INTernal EX Ternal STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 TYPE AM type discrete LINear EXPonential CALibration AM AUTO auto calibrate Boolean ON OFF 1 0 EXECute PEAKing AUTO auto RF peak Boolean ON OFF 1 0 EXECute PME Ter DETector INITiate type of det cal discrete IDETector DIODe NEXT power correction extended numeric lt num gt lvl suffix value 1 Parameter types are explained in the Getting Started Programming chapter S 18 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values CALibration PME Ter FLATness INITiate flatness array to cal discrete USER DIODE PMETer MMHead NEXT measured power extended numeric lt num gt lvl suffix SPAN AUTO auto calibrate state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 EXECute TRACk CORRection ARRay 0 1 1601 pts of extended numeric lt num gt DB 1601 1601 correction FLATness 801 freq extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix correction pairs DB 2 801 POINts num of freq extended numeric MA Ximum MINimum correction pairs SOURce 0 1 correction source discrete ARRay FLATness STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 DIA Gnostics ABUS AVERage ADC averages extended numeric lt num gt STATus INSTrument PME Ter ADDRess power meter address extended numeri
157. Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference A 27 Auto Track Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER USER CAL 5 9 This softkey optimizes the tracking of the swept signal generator s output filter to the oscillator Use it to maximize RF power output The swept signal generator displays Peaking At XXXXX MHz where XXXXX represents frequency values Peaking begins at the low frequency end and steps through to the high end of the frequency range Auto Track is complete when the display returns to its original state On swept signal generators without a step attenuator provide a good source match on the RF connector Use a power sensor or a 10 dB attenuator If a good source match is not provided the swept signal generator can mistrack because of excessive reflections at the output SCPI CALibration TRACk Analyzer SHRP Tracking Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 A 28 Operating and Programming Reference Blank Disp Function Group SYSTEM Menu Map 8 Description When this softkey is selected it causes the top four lines of the display to blank and remain blank until the PRESET key is pressed Blanking the display prevents sensitive information from being displayed As an added benefit remote execution time is reduced because the display does not require refreshing This
158. N EXECute Analyzer NONE Freq Cal Menu Using Frequency Calibration Operating and Programming Reference S 75 SWEEP TIME Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This hardkey lets you set a sweep time for frequency sweeps or power sweeps The sweep time range is 10 ms to 200s but the fastest sweep time is constrained by the frequency span The fastest possible sweep can be determined automatically 1 Press SWEEP MENU this reveals the sweep menu keys 2 Select more 1 3 to scroll to the next page of the sweep menu 3 Select SwpTime Auto to set the sweep time to automatic The swept signal generator calculates the fastest possible calibrated sweep time for any sweep span Whenever you press SWEEP TIME the active entry area displays the current sweep time and whether the sweep time is coupled to the frequency span far right hand side displays AUTO If the word AUTO is not displayed then the sweep time auto function is off SCPI SWEep FREQuency TIME lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer ST lt num gt sc ms Power Sweep Power Level and Sweep Time Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 swplime Auto Function Group Menu Map SWEEP S 76 Operating and Programming Reference Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you set the swept signal generator s sweep time
159. OFF appears in the message line of the display Press the key again to turn on RF power and restore the power value last entered Programming Codes SCPI POWer STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer RF 1 power on RFO power off See Also MOD POWER LEVEL ROTARY KNOB Function Group ENTRY Menu Map NONE Description The rotary knob is active whenever the entry area is on It controls a rotary pulse generator that allows analog type adjustment of the active entry area Although the rotary knob has the feel of analog control it is actually a digital control that generates 120 pulses per revolution Programming Codes NONE See Also ARROW KEYS ENTRY KEYS Entry Area in Chapter 1 R 2 Operating and Programming Reference Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This hardkey allows up to eight different front panel settings to be stored in memory registers 1 through 8 Swept signal generator settings can then be recalled with the RECALL key A memory register can be alternated with the current front panel setting using the Atrnate Regs softkey The information stored in memory registers is retained in memory indefinitely when ac line power is constantly available or for approximately three years without line power Pressing PRESET does not erase the memory registers 1 through 8 Register 0 is a memory register also It saves the last front panel settings automatically and can not
160. OMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values FM SOURce FM source discrete IN Ternal EX Ternal STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 FREQuency CENTer center freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN CW CW freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN AUTO coupled to center freq Boolean ON OFF 1 0 MANual manual freq extended numeric start stop limits or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN MODE free mode discrete CW SWEep LIST MULTiplier freq mult extended numeric 36 to 36 or MAXimum MINimum STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 OFFSet freq offset extended numeric 99 999 to 99 999 GHz or MAXimum MINimum STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 SPAN freq span extended numeric 0 to MAX MIN or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STA Rt start freq extended numeric specified freq range or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STEP AUTO auto freq step Boolean ON OFF 1 0 INCRement freq step extended numeric range or MAXimum MINimum STOP stop freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN INITiate CONTinuous cont sweep Boolean ON OFF 1 0 IMMediate sweep immediately LIST DWELI dwell time extended numeric 0 1 to 3200 ms 801 or MA Ximum MINimum 1 801 POINts FREQuency list freq extended numeric specified freq range 801 or MA Ximum MINimum 1 801 POINts num of freq points extended numeric
161. ON each time a frequency or power is changed CALibration AM EXECute is attempted e CALibration AML EXECute When AM is on and the swept signal generator is in the CW or manual mode the swept signal generator performs a modulator calibration as long as power sweep is not active e CALibration PEAKing AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e CALibration PEAKing AUTO Sets and queries the automatic peaking function If AUTO is ON then a peak is done at regular intervals automatically After RST the setting is OFF e CALibration PEAKing EXECute Peaks the SYTM e CALibration PMETer DETector INITiate IDETector DIODe Initiates the specified calibration These calibrations require the use of an external power measurement Once initiated the swept signal generator sets up for the first point to be measured and responds to the query with the frequency at which the power is to be measured The parameters mean IDETector Initiates a calibration of the internal detector logger breakpoints and offsets DIODe Initiates a calibration of an external detector s logger breakpoints and offsets e CALibration PMETer DETector NEXT lt num gt lvl suffix The parameter is the measured power that is currently produced by the swept signal generator You must supply this parameter after measuring the power using an external power meter The query response is issued after the swept signal generator processes the supplied parameter and settles on the next
162. OUTPUT a STOP SWEEP IN OUT a GPIB Interface Configure the general purpose 8360 B Series to GPIB address 19 and network analyzer language for operation with the analyzer For information on selecting the instrument address and language refer to earlier paragraphs in this chapter The dedicated HP Agilent 8510 versions 83621B 83631B of the 8360 B Series cannot be used with the HP Agilent 8757C E The HP Agilent 83550 Series Millimeter wave Source Modules Refer to Leveling with MM wave Source Modules in Chapter 1 for information and examples The HP Agilent 8970B Noise Figure Meter Connections from the 8360 B Series to the HP Agilent 8970B noise figure meter are identical to those used with the HP Agilent 8340 8341 Configure the 8360 B Series to an address corresponding to the source address of the HP Agilent 8970 typically GPIB address 19 and network analyzer language Remote Operation Converting from Network Analyzer Language to SCPI Language Compatibility The 8360 B Series swept signal generators support three GPIB programming languages network analyzer language SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments and M A T E CIIL language Option 700 Network Analyzer Language 8360 B Series network analyzer language is syntactically and semantically identical to the HP Agilent 8340 8341 GPIB mnemonics However fundamental hardware differences such as command execution time m instrument diagn
163. On O User Flatness Correction Array Array No O off 1 to 801 Point Frequency Linear FLTNESS ON OFF Correction Pairs Entered From a Computer or Interpolation the Front Panel 1601 Points of Correction Data 1601 Points for ALC 1601 Points of Correction 1601 Points of Internal Data Calibration Data Figure F 3 The Sources of ALC Calibration Correction Data If the correction frequency span is only a subset of the start stop frequency span set on the source no corrections are applied to the portion of the sweep that is outside the correction frequency span The following example illustrates how the data is distributed within the user flatness correction array Assume that the swept signal generator is set to sweep from 2 to 18 GHz but you only enter user flatness correction data from 14 to 18 GHz Linear interpolation occurs between the correction entries to provide the 401 points required for the 14 to 18 GHz portion of the array No corrections are applied to the 2 to 13 99 GHz portion of the array Refer to Figure F 4 Point Number 0 1200 1600 No Corrections Applied 401 Points of Data Frequency 2GHz 14UGHz 18GHz 1st Corr Freq Figure F 4 Array Configuration when the Correction Data Frequency Span is a Subset of the Swept Signal Generator Frequency Span Number of points interpolated between correction entries is calculated as follows freq span between correction ent
164. Operation a Lo Start Stop Frequency Sweep Center Frequency Span Operation Power Level and Sweep Time Operation Power Level Operation Sweep Time Operation Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation Marker Operation Saving and Recalling an Instrument State Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation Power Sweep Operation Power Slope Operation Getting Started Advanced Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator Leveling with Detectors Couplers Splitters External Leveling Used With the Optional Step Attenuator Leveling with Power Meters Leveling with MM wave Source Modules Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically Example 1 Creating a User Flatness Array Example 2 Swept mm wave Measurement with Arbitrary Correction Frequencies Example 3 Scalar Analysis Measurement with User Flatness Corrections Example 4 Using Detector Calibration 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 8 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 12 1 14 1 16 1 18 1 18 1 19 1 21 1 23 1 23 1 26 1 27 1 28 1 30 1 32 1 33 1 43 1 47 Contents 1 Using the Tracking Feature Peaking Tracking ALC Bandwidth Selection Using Step Sweep Creating and Using a Frequency List Using the Security Features Changing the Preset Pa
165. Programming Reference L 3 Leveling Pointintrnl Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also This softkey lets you set the swept signal generator to level at the output of the directional coupler located inside the swept signal generator An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC SOURce INTernal Analyzer Al axa Leveling Point Module Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you set the swept signal generator to level at the output of an HP Agilent 8355X series millimeter wave source module All models of the 8360 B Series swept signal generator drive mm wave source modules High power models of 8360 drive the mm wave source modules directly and to specified power levels An HP Agilent 8349B power amplifier is needed in other configurations The source module interface multi pin connector provides the communication path between the swept signal generator and mm wave source module An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC SOURce MMHead Analyzer SHA2 atc CONNECTORS Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator in Chapter 1 L 4 Operating and Programming Reference LINE SWITCH Leveling Point PwrMtr Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you set the swept signal generator to l
166. R FAULT SELF TEST FAILED CALIBRA TION ERROR TATUS MODULA TION ERROR OVERMOD FRE UNUSED oyency oO ERROR UNLOCKED POWER LEVELED UNUSED ALWAYS 2 UNUSED ALWAYS 0 UNUSED ALWAYS 9 DECIMAL VALUE 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 BIT DECIMAL VALUE BIT NOTE STAT PRES THIS COMMAND PRESETS THE FOLLOWING ENABLE AND TRANSITION REGISTERS OPER AND QUES CONDITION REGISTER STAT OPER COND NEGATIVE TRANSITION FILTER STAT OPER NTR lt num gt STAT OPER NTR POSITIVE TRANSITION FILTER STAT OPER PTR lt num gt STATus OPERation Ptransitian EVENT REGISTER STATus OPERation ENABLE REGISTER STAT OPER ENAB lt num gt STATus OPERation Enable CONDITION REGISTER STAT QUES COND NEGATIVE TRANSITION FILTER STAT QUES NTR lt num gt STAT QUES NTR POSITIVE TRANSITION FILTER STAT QUES PTR lt num gt STAT QUES PTR ENABLE REGISTER STAT QUES ENAB lt num gt STAT QUES ENAB EVENT REGISTER STAT QUES C EVENT Operating and Programming Reference S 57 security Menu Function Group Menu Map Description See Also SYSTEM This softkey accesses the security function softkeys Blank Display Turns off the swept signal generator s data display active entry
167. RST all lists for the current state are cleared and reset to a single value Analyzer NONE RECALL SAVE Sweep Mode List Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 List Mode Pt Trig Auto Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set the swept signal generator to automatically step through a frequency list when the swept signal generator is in sweep list mode SCPI LIST TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Analyzer NONE List Menu Pt Trig Menu Sweep Mode List Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 L 8 Operating and Programming Reference List Mode Pt Trigkxt List Mode Pt Trig Bus Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set the trigger point to be the GPIB When the swept signal generator receives an GPIB trigger it steps to the next frequency point of the frequency list provided the swept signal generator is in sweep list mode SCPI LIST TRIGger SOURce BUS Analyzer NONE List Menu Pt Trig Menu Sweep Mode List Creating and Using a Frequency List in Chapter 1 List Mode Pt Trig Ext Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set the trigger point to be an external hardware trigger When the swept signal generator receives an external hardware trigger it steps to
168. S ON Clg A EEE GMM Br TANTAY SEF TTT TIES O OSSEE AS NO LRS EEEE EEEE WAAAAABAARAABAL EAT SAV AVAVAVANAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAY A AES 4 Langad cdr Figure 3 2 Rear Panel GPIB Switch the swept signal generator acts as a controller for a power meter and a printer Because of this the address bj In certain applications GPIB Address Selection menu provides access not only to the swept signal generator s GPIB address but also to the address at which the swept signal generator expects to see a power meter and the address at which the see a printer See Table 3 3 for swept signal generator expects to factory set addresses Table 3 3 Factory Set GPIB Addresses GPIB Address Decimal 19 13 01 Instrument Swept Signal Generator Power Meter Printer Installation 3 7 3 8 Note Remember Mating Connectors 10 MHz Frequency Reference Selection and Warmup Time Installation How to View or Change an GPIB Address from the Front Panel To set a GPIB address from the front panel the instrument address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 must be set to 31 all Is 1 Press SYSTEM MENU 2 Select GPIB Menu Adrs Menu 3 The swept signal generator displays the three address softkeys 8360 Adrs Meter Adrs and Printer Adres 4 Select the desired softkey 5 The swept signal generator displays the address selected for that instrument 6 If you
169. TRIGger SOURce SOURce WIDTh WIDTh SLEW SLEW AUTO AUTO a STATus MSIB CONDition ENA Ble ENA Ble EVENt NTRansition NTRansition PTRansition PTRansition SREceiver CONDition ENA Ble ENA Ble EVENt NTRansition NTRansition PTRansition PTRansition m SWEep CONTrol STATe TYPE MANual POINt POINt RELative RELative MARKer STATe STATe XFER TRIGger SOURce SOURce m SYSTem DUMP PRINter PRINter S 12 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information ERRor KEY ASSign CLEar CODE CODE DISable ENA Ble LANGuage MMHead SELect AUTO AUTO SELect PRESet EXECute SAVE TYPE SECurity COUnt COUnt a TRIGger ODELay ODELay m TSWeep a UNIT AM AM POWer POWer Operating and Programming Reference S 13 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Introduction IEEE 488 2 Common Commands This entry is organized as follows 1 IEEE 488 2 common commands in alphabetical order 2 Command table of SCPI programming commands 3 Alphabetical listing of commands with descriptions e CLS Clear the Status Byte the Data Questionable Event Register the Standard Event Status Register the Standard Operation Status Register the error queue the OPC pending flag and any other registers that are summarized in the Status Byte e ESE lt num gt e ESE Sets and queries the
170. The up down arrow keys let you scroll through the frequency points available for power correction If no correction value is entered for a frequency point the swept signal generator display indicates Undefined The range of acceptable values is 40 to 40 dB An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 E 2 Operating and Programming Reference Enter Freq Enter Freq Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you enter a frequency point into the flatness correction array When the Power Fltness Menu is selected Enter Freq is automatically activated Frequency points must be entered before correction values can be accepted into the array Frequency points can be entered in any order and the swept signal generator automatically reorders them beginning with the lowest frequency One frequency correction pair is the minimum and 801 is the maximum number of points that can be entered An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see Fitness Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference E 3 Enter List Dwell Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY
171. The use of other fuses or material is prohibited The value for the line fuse is printed on the rear panel of the swept signal generator next to the fuse holder See Figure 4 1 1 Turn off the swept signal generator 2 Remove the ac line cord The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch 3 Using a small flat blade screwdriver rotate the fuse cap counter clockwise and remove the fuse holder 4 Replace the original fuse 5 Replace the fuse holder in the rear panel Using the screwdriver rotate the fuse cap clockwise to secure the fuse holder in place 6 Reconnect the swept signal generator to line power CAUTION FOR FIRE PROTECTION REPLACE FUSE HOLDER FUSE 230V 3A 250V Figure 4 1 Replacing the Line Fuse 4 4 Operator s Check Routine Maintenance How to Clean the Fan Filter Note The cooling fan located on the rear panel has a thin foam filter How often the filter must be cleaned depends on the environment in which the swept signal generator operates As the filter collects dust the fan speed increases to maintain airflow as the fan speed increases so does the fan noise If the filter continues to collect dust after the fan reaches maximum speed airflow is reduced and the swept signal generator s in
172. UENCY This hardkey allows access to the frequency functions listed below CW CF Coupled Freq Mult Freq Offset List Menu Step Swp Menu Up Down Size CW Up Down Size Swept Zoom Softkeys listed above When this feature is on the center frequency and the CW frequency is kept equal Changing either the center frequency or the CW frequency causes the other to change to the same value An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Sets the frequency multiplier value and applies it to all frequency parameters Sets the frequency offset value and applies it to all frequency parameters Displays the frequency list create edit softkeys Reveals the stepped frequency sweep edit softkeys Sets the frequency step size in the CW frequency mode Sets the frequency step size in the swept frequency mode Places the swept signal generator in the CF AF sweep mode where the rotary knob and numeric entry keys control CF and the up down arrow keys control AF Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference F 17 Freq Mult Function Group FREQUENCY Menu Map 2 Description This softkey lets you set a frequency multiplier value and applies it to all frequency parameters Any integer value between and including 36 is accepted Changing the multiplier value changes the display it does not affect the output of the swept signal ge
173. UTO OFF attenuator and ALC Couple internal attenuator PL POW ATT AUTO ON and ALC Set attenuator value and uncouple attenuator Set power step size Activate power slope function Do auto track Continuously peak RF Peak RF once SHSL AT lt num gt DB SHPL SP lt num gt DB SL1 lt num gt DB SHRP RP SHAK POW ATT lt num gt DB POW STEP lt num gt DB freq_suffix POW SLOP lt num gt freq suffix STAT ON CAL TRAC CAL PEAK AUTO ON CAL PEAK 3 28 Installation Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison continued Description Network Analyzer Language SCPI Language Sweep Set sweep time Sweep once Single sweep Sweep continuously Sweep manually Activate step sweep mode Activate ramp sweep mode ST lt num gt time_suffix 2 SG 2 SG S1 SM S3 SN SEST FA FB CF DF 1 S2 SWE TIME lt num gt time_suffix INIT INIT CONT OFF ABOR INIT INIT CONT ON SWE MODE MAN SWE GEN STEP MODE MAN FREQ MODE SWE SWE GEN ANAL FREQ MODE SWE Trigger external T3 TRIG SOUR EXT Trigger free run T1 TRIG SOUR IMM Trigger step TRSB System Recall an instrument state RC lt 0 9 gt RCL lt 0 8 gt Save an instrument state SV lt 1 9 gt SAV lt 1 8 gt Activate alternate AL1 lt 1 9 gt SYST ALT lt 1 8 gt ALT STAT ON state sweep Deactivate alternate ALO SYST ALT STAT OFF state sweep Display software revision Select an internal frequency
174. a standard starting configuration Two states can be defined for the standard configuration Factory or User Press PRESET at any time to test the swept signal generator and restore to a standard configuration If the red LED adjacent to THE PRESET KEY labeled INSTR CHECK stays on after preset the swept signal generator failed self test refer to Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Troubleshooting Guide Cycling power with the POWER switch does not have the same effect as presetting the swept signal generator Cycling power causes the swept signal generator to display the programming language the GPIB address and the firmware revision date After the swept signal generator displays this data it restores its configuration to the state before power was turned off SCPI SYSTem PRESet EXECute Analyzer IP Preset Mode Factory Preset Mode User Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference P 9 Preset Mode Factory Function Group SYSTEM Menu Map 8 Description This softkey sets the standard starting configuration of the swept signal generator when the key is pressed as set by the manufacturer An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The following is a description of the configuration Start sweep at the minimum specified frequency Stop swee
175. act definitions of words such as lt program message gt in a syntax diagram How to Use Examples It is important to understand that programming with SCPI actually requires knowledge of two languages You must know the programming language of your controller BASIC C Pascal as well as the language of your instrument SCPI The semantic requirements of your controller s language determine how the SCPI commands and responses are handled in your application Command Examples Command examples look like this FREQuency CW This example tells you to put the string FREQuency CW in the output statement appropriate to your application programming language If you encounter problems study the details of how the output statement handles message terminators such as lt new line gt If you are using simple OUTPUT statements in HP BASIC this is taken care of for you In HP BASIC you type OUTPUT Source FREQuency CW Command examples do not show message terminators because they are used at the end of every program message Details of 1 64 Getting Started Programming Commands and Responses discusses message terminators in more detail Response Examples Response examples look like this 1 23 These are the characters you would read from an instrument after sending a query command To actually pull them from the instrument into the controller use the input statement appropriate to your application programming language
176. active entry area displays the active marker and its frequency value Use the rotary knob the ARROW keys or the entry keys to set the frequency Markers are displayed normally as Z axis intensity dots but can be changed to amplitude pulses Ampl Markers When a marker is turned off the frequency value of that marker is retained in memory If the marker is reactivated the stored frequency value is recalled for that marker The frequency value of M1 and of M2 can also be used to define parameters in two other marker features M1 M2 Sweep and Start M1 Stop M2 Programming Codes SCPI MARKer 1 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MARKer 1 STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer M1 function on MO function off See Also Ampl Markers M1 M2 Sweep MARKER MkrRef Menu Start M1 Stop M2 Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 M 4 Operating and Programming Reference Marker M3 Marker M2 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER See MARKER M1 SCPI MARKer2 FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum MAR Ker2 STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer M2 function on MO function off Ampl Markers MI M2 Sweep MARKER MkrRef Menu Start M1i Stop M2 Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Marker M3 Function Group Menu Map Description Programming
177. addressed instruments to assume a cleared condition with the definition of cleared being unique for each device For the swept signal generator 1 All pending output parameter operations are halted 2 The parser the software that interprets the programming codes is reset and now expects to receive the first character of a programming code The syntax is device selector Getting Started Programming 1 59 Some BASIC examples 10 CLEAR 7 to clear all GPIB instruments or 10 CLEAR 719 to clear an addressed instrument Related statements used by some computers RESET CONTROL SEND The preceding statements are primarily management commands that do not incorporate programming codes The following two statements do incorporate programming codes and are used for data communication Output Output is used to send function commands and data commands from the controller to the addressed instrument The syntax is device selector numeric line number expression string expression where USING is a secondary command that formats the output in a particular way such as a binary or ASCII representation of numbers The USING command is followed by image items that precisely define the format of the output these image items can be a string of code characters or a reference to a statement line in the computer program Image items are explained in the programming codes where
178. agraph titled Details of Commands and Responses discusses message terminators in more detail 1 68 Getting Started Programming a Colon When it is between two command mnemonics a colon moves the current path down one level in the command tree For example the colon in MEAS VOLT specifies that VOLT is one level below MEAS When the colon is the first character of a command it specifies that the next command mnemonic is a root level command For example the colon in INIT specifies that INIT is a root level command a Semicolon A semicolon separates two commands in the same message without changing the current path m Whitespace White space characters such as lt tab gt and lt space gt are generally ignored There are two important exceptions White space inside a keyword such as FREQ uency is not allowed You must use white space to separate parameters from commands For example the lt space gt between LEVel and 6 2 in the command POWer LEVel 6 2 is mandatory White space does not affect the current path a Commas If a command requires more than one parameter you must separate adjacent parameters using a comma Commas do not affect the current path a Common Commands Common commands such as RST are not part of any subsystem An instrument interprets them in the same way regardless of the current path setting Figure 1 26 shows examples of how to use the colon and semicolon to navigate efficientl
179. al a command consists of mnemonics keywords parameters and punctuation A query is a special type of command Queries instruct the instrument to make response data available to the controller Query mnemonics always end with a question mark Getting Started Programming 1 63 Standard Notation This section uses several forms of notation that have specific meaning Command Mnemonics Many commands have both a long and a short form and you must use either one or the other SCPI does not accept a combination of the two Consider the FREQuency command for example The short form is FREQ and the long form is FREQUENCY this notation style is a shorthand to document both the long and short form of commands SCPI is not case sensitive so fREquEnCy is just as valid as FREQUENCY but FREQ and FREQUENCY are the only valid forms of the FREQuency command Angle Brackets Angle brackets indicate that the word or words enclosed represent something other than themselves For example lt new line gt represents the ASCII character with the decimal value 10 Similarly lt END gt means that EOI is asserted on the GPIB interface Words in angle brackets have much more rigidly defined meaning than words used in ordinary text For example this section uses the word message to talk about messages generally But the bracketed words lt program message gt indicate a precisely defined element of SCPI If you need them you can find the ex
180. ally performing a sweep in single sweep mode the green SWEEP LED lights The manual sweep mode lets you use the rotary knob to either sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency or to sweep power Refer to menu map 7 SWEEP Press PRESET Press SWEEP menu Select Manual Sweep The active entry area displays gt SWEPT MANUAL XXXXXXXXX MHz Use the rotary knob to sweep from the start to the stop frequency The green SWEEP LED is off in manual sweep mode because the sweeps are synthesized USER DEFINED SWEEP e LED Co a CS a S a C a CD SINGLE FREQUENCY RPOWER g LED CE ee e C CO e G2 ee G Ce me Be foe 4 INSTRUMENT STATE MODULATION _ mt a SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE 35 RO single cdr SINGLE CONT SWEEP MENU Figure 1 7 Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation Single Sweep Continuous Sweep Manual Sweep 1 Press SINGLE 1 Press CONT 1 Press SWEEP MENU 2 Press Manual Sweep 3 Use the rotary knob to adjust frequency Getting Started Basic 1 13 Marker Operation Caution 1 14 Getting Started Basic The swept signal generator has five frequency markers that can be used as fixed frequency landmarks or as variable frequency pointers on a CRT display To view the marker features of the swept signal generator on a CRT connect the swept signal generator as shown in Figure 1 8 Refer to menu ma
181. and message line areas Clear Memory Writes alternating ones and zeros over all swept signal generator state functions and save recall registers a selectable number of times then returns the swept signal generator to the factory preset state of operation Save Lock Disables the save function Zero Freq Displays zeros for all accessible frequency information The features listed above together with the softkeys Freq Offset and Freq Mult provide the swept signal generator with security controls for a variety of situations The local lockout LLO programming command adds security when the swept signal generator is used in an ATE environment A security calibration constant that can be accessed through the service adjustment menu requires a password for access is available also Refer to the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for information on calibration constants Softkeys listed above Using the Security Features in Chapter 1 S 58 Operating and Programming Reference Set Atten Selftest Full Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SERVICE This softkey activates the self test function of the swept signal generator SCPI TST Analyzer NONE Fault Menu SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Chapter 4 OPERATOR S CHECK and ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Set Atten Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Co
182. ata type error Decimal not allowed 104 Data type error Non dec not allowed 104 Data type error String not allowed 103 Invalid separator 2a 8 Error Messages 2b Menu Maps Menu Maps 2b 1 MENU SELECT PAE Leveling Point 0 aint ExtDet PwrMtr Module 1 3 Normal ALCoff Search ALC Bandwidth Select Low sHigh Auto MEA Leveling Mode Coupling Factor more 2 3 ALC BW Pwr Mtr Module Menu Range Menu lt m EN am Module Sense AUTO Front Rear None ALC MENU FREQUENCY CJ EG GE ey EY Up Dn Size Freq Freq more List Step Swp CW CF more Swept cw Offset Mult 1 3 Zoom Menu Menu Coupled 2 3 Cd CJ m ba E cD amp Cd Module Sense Front Rear seeren Enter List seess Delete Offset Dwell Menu 1 3 tears Global Offset Dwell Menu List Mode Pt Trig sAuto Bus Ext CS cS Cc Step Step Step Dwell more a Step Swp Pt Trig more Step Control more Size Points Dwell Coupled 1 3 sAuto Bus Ext 2 3 Master Slave 3 3 cI CI C co C Cc Cc Cc C FREQUENCY MENU MENU SELECT Morker Marker M1 M2 Stort M1 more Marker Marker Marker Center more Delta Delta Markers Ampi more M1 M2 Sweep Stop M2 1 3 M3 MY MS Marker 2 3 Mkr Ref Marker All Off Markers 3 3 a a EAR COD m Cc Cc CD Cc Cc Cc
183. ate of the rear panel output modulation BNC e MODulation STATe Queries the status of any modulation If any of the modulation states are on then it returns a 1 otherwise it returns a 0 Any place where dBm is accepted as a suffix any level suffix is accepted also In the absence of a suffix the units are assumed to be as set by the UNIT POW command e POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the ALC bandwidth This is actually not continuously variable so the input is rounded to the nearest possible switch position RST setting is automatically determined since AUTO is ON e POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e POWer ALC BANDwidth BWIDth AUTO Sets and queries the automatic ALC bandwidth selection switch The RST value is ON e POWer ALC CFACtor lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer ALC CFACtor MINimum MAXimum Sets and queries the coupling factor used when the command POWer ALC L SOURce is set to DIODe or PMETer e POWer ALC SOURce INTernal DIODe PMETer MMHead e POWer ALC SOURce Operating and Programming Reference S 41 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Sets and queries the ALC leveling source selection switch The RST value is INTernal e POWer ALC L STATe ON OFF 1 0 e POWer ALCL STATe Sets and queries the state switch of the ALC The positions are ON normal ALC operation
184. ater depth see the paragraph titled Related Documents Definitions of Terms This section defines most terms when they are first used you need a general understanding of the terms listed below before you continue controller instrument program message response message command query A controller is any computer used to communicate with a SCPI instrument A controller can be a personal computer a minicomputer or a plug in card in a card cage Some intelligent instruments can also function as controllers An instrument is any device that implements SCPI Most instruments are electronic measurement or stimulus devices but this is not a requirement Similarly most instruments use an GPIB interface for communication The same concepts apply regardless of the instrument function or the type of interface used A program message is a combination of one or more properly formatted SCPI commands Program messages always go from a controller to an instrument Program messages tell the instrument how to make measurements and output signals A response message is a collection of data in specific SCPI formats Response messages always go from an instrument to a controller or listening instrument Response messages tell the controller about the internal state of the instrument and about measured values A command is an instruction in SCPI You combine commands to form messages that control instruments In gener
185. ator Keys After the numeric entry keys are used to enter a value these keys define the units Negative Sign Backspace Key If a data entry is in progress this key backspaces over the last digit entered otherwise a negative sign is entered Numeric Entry Keys These keys enter specific numbers in the active entry area and must be followed by one of the terminator keys before the function value changes Getting Started Basic 1 5 CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep CW Operation Start Stop Frequency Sweep 1 6 Getting Started Basic CW operation is one of the major functions of the swept signal generator and is easy to do using front panel keys In CW operation the swept signal generator produces a single low noise synthesized frequency Try this example Press wJQQOQ OQ OOMB Check the active entry area It indicates gt CW 12345 678000 MHz The data display area indicates CW operation and the frequency that you entered The ENTRY ON LED is lit and the green SWEEP LED is off Try other frequencies Experiment with the rotary knob and the arrow keys as alternate methods of data entry The swept signal generator can sweep a frequency span as wide as the frequency range of the instrument or as narrow as 0 Hz swept CW In start stop sweep operation the swept signal generator produces a sweep from the selected start frequency to the selected stop frequency For example Press AR OOO G
186. ay C 12 discrete parameters discussed in detail 1 85 explained briefly 1 75 discrete response data discussed in detail 1 86 display 1 4 display blank B 1 display clean 4 6 display clear B 1 display status D 6 display status of phase lock loops U 1 display zero frequency Z 1 doubler amp mode auto D 8 doubler amp mode off D 9 doubler amp mode on D 9 doubler amp softkeys D 1 down arrow A 21 dual source control S 64 dwell coupled D 10 dwell time frequency point E 3 list array all points G 1 stepped frequency mode S 67 dwell time coupled D 10 EEROM fail F 3 EEROM failed lost CAL message 2a 2 EEROM failed message 2a 2 enable register 1 107 in general status register model 1 106 END 1 64 ENDf end 1 81 ending frequency flatness correction A 26 frequency list A 26 enter correction E 1 enter frequency value flatness E 2 enter list dwell E 3 enter list frequency E 4 enter list offset E 4 enter statement 1 61 entry area 1 4 E 5 entry keys E 5 entry on LED 1 5 entry on off E 5 EOI 1 64 1 81 EOL suppression of 1 61 equipment supplied 3 1 erase active array entry D 4 erase array D 3 erase array entries D 3 erase memory C 2 erase undefined entry D 4 erase user defined menu U 6 erase user defined softkey U 5 error messages 2 1 2a 1 8 error queue clear S 14 ESE S 14 ESR S 14 event commands 1 72 event detection trigger state details of operation 1 112 in
187. ay Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 USA Declares that the products Product Name Synthesized Sweeper Model Number 83620B 83622B 83623B 83624B 83630B 83640B 83650B Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above products Conform to the following product specifications EMC IEC 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 EN 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 Standard Limit CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A IEC 61000 4 2 1995 A1998 EN 61000 4 2 1995 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 61000 4 3 1995 EN 61000 4 3 1995 3 V m 80 1000 MHz IEC 61000 4 4 1995 EN 61000 4 4 1995 0 5 kV sig 1 kV power IEC 61000 4 5 1995 EN 61000 4 5 1996 0 5 kV L L 1 kV L G IEC 61000 4 6 1996 EN 61000 4 6 1998 3 V 0 15 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 11 1994 EN 61000 4 11 1998 1 cycle 100 Safety IEC 61010 1 1990 A1 1992 A2 1995 EN 61010 1 1993 A2 1995 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 Suppl ementary Information The products herewith comply with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and carry the CE marking accordingly Ay bof Greg Pfeiffer Quality Engineering Manager Santa Rosa CA USA 2 September 2000 Compliance with German Noise Requirements This is to declare that this instrument is in conformance with the German Regulation on Noise Declaration for Machines Laermangabe nach der Maschinenlaermrerordnung 3 GSGV Deutschland Acoustic Noise Emission Geraeuschemission Lp
188. ays between actions Figure 1 35 shows a simplified view of the generalized SCPI trigger model Instruments may implement some or all of this model to accommodate varying needs Each unshaded block in Figure 1 35 represents a particular trigger state The generalized trigger model allows an arbitrary number of event detection states Note that there can be two paths into a state and two paths out of a state These are called the downward entrance and exit and the upward entrance and exit Upward means moving towards the idle state and downward means moving towards instrument actions Getting Started Programming 1 109 An instrument moves between adjacent states depending on its internal conditions and the commands that you send When you first turn on power to an instrument it is in the idle state You can force the instrument to the idle state using ABORt or RST The initiate and event detection trigger states are essentially a list of conditions that must be satisfied to reach the adjacent states The sequence operation state signals the instrument hardware to take some action and listens for a signal that the action has been taken ABORt RST Event Detection 1 Event Detection N Sequence Instrument Operation Actions Figure 1 35 Generalized Trigger Model Details of Trigger States These paragraphs use flow charts to explain the decision making rules inside each trigger state These rules govern how the instrumen
189. be Programming Codes See Also performed SCPI CALibration AM EXECute Analyzer NONE Modulation Operating and Programming Reference A 13 AM Cal Menu Function Group Menu Map Description See Also USER CAL This softkey accesses the AM bandwidth calibration menu Causes an AM bandwidth calibration to be performed every time a frequency or power parameter is changed Causes a single AM bandwidth calibration to be performed AM BW Cal Always AM BW Cal Once Softkeys listed above AM Menu Function Group Menu Map Description oD This softkey Option 002 only accesses the amplitude modulation softkeys These softkeys engage external and internal amplitude modulation They allow you to define the scaling waveform rate and depth of the internal AM AM On Off Ext Toggles on and off the amplitude modulation mode for an external AM source AM On Off Int Toggles on and off the amplitude modulation mode using the internal AM generator Internal AM Rate Sets the rate of the internal amplitude modulation Internal AM Depth Sets the depth of the internal amplitude modulation AM Type 100 V Sets the scale to linear at 100 per volt AM Type 10dB y Sets the scale to exponential at 10 dB per volt Opens the ALC loop when the detected signal level power is below the detector s sensing range Deep AM A 14 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also
190. c 1 to 31 PRINter ADDRess printer address extended numeric 1 to 31 ORW I O device extended numeric lt num gt lt num gt number and value OUTPut FAULts RESult Operating and Programming Reference S 19 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY continued Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values DIA Gnostics TEST CONTinue DATA DESC MAXimum MINimum VALue DISable disable listed extended numeric lt num gt 1 ALL selftests or discrete ENABle enable listed extended numeric lt num gt 1 ALL selftests or discrete EXECute extended numeric 0 to 288 LOG SOURce log when discrete ALL FAIL STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 LOOP state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 NAME selftest number extended numeric 0 to 288 POINts number of selftests RESult condition of selftests TINT DISPlay STATe state Boolean ON OFF 1 0 FM COUPling coupling type discrete AC DC DEViation peak FM deviation extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum FILTer HPASs FM AC Bandwidth extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum INTernal FREQuency FM frequency extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum FUNCtion FM waveform discrete SINusoid SQUare TRlIangle RAMP NOISe SENSitivity extended numeric 100K HZ V 1MHZ V 10MHZ V or MAXimum MINimum S 20 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI C
191. cal Order This section lists the error messages that may be displayed by the front panel or transmitted by the swept signal generator over the interface bus Each error message is accompanied by an explanation and suggestions are provided to help solve the problem Where applicable references are given to related chapters of the user s and service guides A list of the messages displayed on the message line of the swept signal generator are included in separate list because they are considered status messages rather than error messages No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers ABILITY TO SAVE A RECALL REGISTER IS LOCKED OUT This message occurs when the save recall registers have been disabled by the save lock feature or by a calibration constant ADDR ERROR EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Auto Track Failed Cal Not Updated Occurs when auto track has been initiated and for some reason has failed Refer to Chapter 4 and follow the local operator s check procedures BUS ERROR EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician DEFAULTING LANGUAGE This error message is displayed in conjunction with one of the following messag
192. cations 2c 1 Frequency Range Resolution Frequency Bands for CW signals Frequency Modes CW and Manual Sweep 2c 2 Specifications Agilent 83620B 10 MHz to 20 GHz Agilent 83622B 2 to 20 GHz Agilent 83623B 10 MHz to 20 GHz High Power Agilent 83624B 2 to 20 GHz High Power Agilent 83630B 10 MHz to 26 5 GHz Agilent 83640B 10 MHz to 40 GHz Agilent 83650B 10 MHz to 50 GHz Standard 1 kHz Option 008 1 Hz Band Frequency Range 0 10 MHz to lt 2 GHz 2 GHz to lt 7 GHz 7 GHz to lt 13 5 GHz 13 5 GHz to lt 20 GHz 20 GHz to lt 26 5 GHz 26 5 GHz to lt 33 5 GHz 33 5 GHz to lt 38 GHz 38 GHz to 50 GHz Im oR WwW NMR WOrmnmbwmwmrer b 1 This band is 20 GHz to lt 25 5 GHz on the 83640B 2 This band is 25 5 GHz to lt 32 GHz on the 83640B 3 This band is 32 GHz to lt 40 GHz on the 83640B Accuracy Same as time base Switching Time For Steps Within a Frequency Band 15 ms step size 1 GHz x 5 ms Maximum or Across Band Switch Points 50 ms Step or List Modes within a frequency band 5 ms step size 1 GHz x 5 ms 1 Frequencies lt 2 GHz switching time 6 ms step size 1 GHz x 5 ms Synthesized Step Sweep Synthesized List Mode Ramp Sweep Mode Internal 10 MHz Time Base Accuracy Same as time base Minimum Step Size Same as frequency resolution Number of Points 2 to 801 Switching Time Same as CW Dwell Time 100 pus to 3 2 s Accuracy Same as time
193. ced version of these commands Consider the following explanations as a starting point but for detailed information consult the BASIC language reference manual the I O programming guide and the GPIB manual for the particular computer used Syntax drawings accompany each statement All items enclosed by a circle or oval are computer specific terms that must be entered exactly as described items enclosed in a rectangular box are names of parameters used in the statement and the arrows indicate a path that generates a valid combination of statement elements The seven fundamental command statements are as follows Abort Abort abruptly terminates all listener talker activity on the interface bus and prepares all instruments to receive a new command from the controller Typically this is an initialization command used to place the bus in a known starting condition The syntax is interface ABORT select code where the interface select code is the computer s GPIB I O port which is typically port 7 Some BASIC examples 10 ABORT 7 100 IF V gt 20 THEN ABORT 7 Related statements used by some computers ABORTIO used by HP 80 series computers HALT RESET Getting Started Programming 1 57 Remote Remote causes an instrument to change from local control to remote control In remote control the front panel keys are disabled except for the key and the POWER switch and the amber REMOTE annunciator is lighted The syntax is
194. corresponding to the SCPI version number to which the swept signal generator complies The response has the form YYYY V where the Ys represent the year version i e 1990 and the V represents an approved revision number for that year This is a query only and therefore does not have an associated RST state e TRIGger IMMediate Causes the trigger event to occur regardless of other settings in the subsystem This event does not affect any other settings in this subsystem This command has no effect unless the swept signal generator is in the wait for trig state If the swept signal generator is in the wait for trig state it performs its trigger action This is an event and has no RST condition e TRIGger ODELay lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e TRIGger ODELay MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the trigger output delay the time between when the source is settled when Bit 1 of the Standard Operation Status Register makes a negative transition and the trigger out signal is sent S 54 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e TRIGger SOURce IMMediate BUS EXTernal e TRIGger SOURce Sets and queries the source of the trigger event e TSWeep This is a convenience command that does the equivalent of ABORt INITiate IMMediate e UNIT AM DB PCT e UNIT AM Sets and queries the default units for AM depth The RST value is PCT e UNIT POWer lvl suffix e UNIT POWer Sets and queries
195. coupled from the ALC system and the key controls the Level DAC and Level Control Circuits see Figure A 1 within the ALC level range 25 to 20 dBm This mode of operation requires a feedback connection from the module to the swept signal generator through the SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt ATTEN X dB MODULE LEVEL X XX dBm where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Power dBm MDL X XX In ALCoff there is no feedback voltage to level the power so power level is uncalibrated A leveling point is not specified in this mode The key controls the linear modulator directly from 0 to approximately 80 dB The attenuator if present is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system When you press POWER LEVEL the active entry area displays gt ATTEN X dB REFERENCE X XX dB where X represents a numeric value The data display area indicates Ref dB OFF X XX and the message line indicates UNLVLED In Search any of the leveling points can be specified and used as the comparison feedback voltage Basically this mode operates the same as ALCoff after the searched for power level is reached The active entry area displays different information depending on the leveling point chosen P 4 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also POWER MENU SCPI POWer LEVEL lt num gt flvl suffix or MAXimu
196. ction and list mode with offsets are enabled the swept signal generator adjusts the output power by an amount equivalent to the sum of the correction data and offset for each test frequency You must make sure that the resulting power level is still within the ALC range of the swept signal generator SWEPT SIGNAL GENERATOR L F DEVICE UNDER TEST SOURCE l MODULE INTERFACE POWER METER US l FLATNESS 1 CORRECTED j OUTPUT PORT POWER SENSOR Figure 1 19 Creating a User Flatness Array For this example refer to menu map 5 POWER 1 The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 19 assumes that if your setup has an external leveling configuration the steps necessary to correctly level have been followed If you have questions about external leveling refer to Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator Setup Power Meter Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor Connect the power sensor to the point where flatness corrected power is desired Setup Swept Signal Generator Parameters On the swept signal generator press PRESET POWER LEVEL 5 dB m This sets the test port power to 5 dBm Po max Ppath loss Create A Frequency List On the swept signal generator press FREQUENCY menu Select List Menu Enter List Freq 6 GHz This enters 5 GHz as the first frequency in the list array Entering a frequency automatically sets
197. ctral width of the output improving measurements made on filters with steep skirts A slow pulse rise time approximately 2 us is available for externally generated pulse inputs as well M 22 Operating and Programming Reference Module Menu Module Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ara This softkey accesses the source module selection softkeys Millimeter wave source modules can be connected to the swept signal generator source module interface connectors there is one each on the front and rear panels These softkeys give you the option of letting the swept signal generator automatically look at both connectors for source modules or telling the swept signal generator to look only at the front or at the rear connector You can also turn off module sensing completely Module Select AUTO Module Select Front Module Select Rear Module Select None SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above Sets the swept signal generator to automatic selection of the source module Selects the front connector if source modules are present at both front and rear connectors This is the default after preset Sets the swept signal generator to select the source module connected to the front panel source module interface connector Sets the swept signal generator to select the source module connected to the rear panel source module interface connector Disables source modu
198. d feedback leveled at ALC levels above 13 dBm At ALC levels below 13 dBm output is DC controllable but subject to typical sample and hold drift of 0 25 dB second 14 The 8360 has two unleveled modes ALC off and search In ALC off mode the modulator drive can be controlled from the front panel to vary quiescent RF output level In search mode the instrument microprocessor momentarily closes the ALC loop to find the modulator drive setting necessary to make the quiescent RF output level equal to an entered value then opens the ALC loop while maintaining that modulator drive setting Neither of these modes is feedback leveled 15 Modulation depth is 40 dB below maximum available power for frequencies gt 20 GHz on 83640B and 83650B Specifications 2c 11 FM Simultaneous Modulations 2c 12 Specifications 0 00000s 8 00000us 4 000004 s Delta V Vmarker 1 29 60mvolts 600 00u volts Vrarker 2 30 200mvolts Timebase 800ns div Locked Mode Maximum Deviation 8 MHz Rates 3 dB bandwidth 500 kHz deviation 100 kHz to 8 MHz Maximum Modulation Index deviation rate n x 5 Unlocked Mode Maximum Deviation At rates lt 100 Hz 75 MHz At rates gt 100 Hz 8 MHz Rates 3 dB bandwidth 500 kHz deviation DC to 8 MHz Sensitivity 100 kHz 1 MHz or 10 MHz volt switchable Accuracy 1 MHz rate 1 MHz deviation 10 Full AM bandwidth and depth is ty
199. d mode RST value is 1 e SWEep MANual RELative lt num gt e SWEep MANual RELative Sets and queries a percent of sweep to go to and lock This command has no effect unless the sweep mode is set to manual and the sweep generation is set to analog RST value is 0 50 S 50 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e SWEep MARKer STATe ON OFF 1 0 e SWEep MARKer STATe Sets and queries the state of marker sweep When ON the frequency sweep limits are taken to be the positions of marker 1 and marker 2 RST value is 0 e SWEep MARKer XFER This transfers the values of marker 1 and marker 2 frequencies into start and stop frequency e SWEep MODE AUTO MANual e SWEep MODE Selects and queries the manual sweep mode switch AUTO The sweep is under the control of the INIT and SWEEP subsystems MANual FREQ MANual SWEep MANual RELative and SWEep MANual POINt control the output RST value is AUTO e SWEep POINts lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e SWEep POINts MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the number of points in a step sweep When points is changed SWEep STEP is modified by the equation STEP SPAN POINTS Span is normally an independent variable but is changed to STEP x POINTS if both of these parameters are changed in the same message RST value is 11 e SWEep STEP lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e SWEep STEP MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the size of each frequency step
200. de search Function Group Menu Map Description ALC This softkey causes the ALC to switch off once the desired power level is reached When this leveling mode is activated or when power or frequency is changed the swept signal generator switches to CW frequency and closes the ALC system until the desired power level is reached The swept signal generator reverts to its original frequency modulation state and opens the ALC system This mode is similar to ALC off mode and is useful for narrow pulse applications An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active L 2 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Leveling Pointintrnl SCPI POWer ALC STATe SEARch Analyzer SHA1 atc Pulse Modulation Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Leveling Point ExtDet Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you set the swept signal generator to accept an external feedback connection from a negative output diode detector to level power The EXT ALC BNC is the input connection for the required signal An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC SOURCce DIODe POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF 0 Analyzer A2 TA Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator in Chapter 1 Leveling Point Intrnl Function Group ALC Operating and
201. des See Also POWER This softkey lets you set the attenuator separately from the rest of the ALC system When an entry is made using this key the attenuator is automatically uncoupled from the ALC system so that the POWER LEVEL key controls the ALC system apart from the attenuator SCPI POWer ATTenuation lt num gt DB or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN Analyzer SHLS lt num gt DB DM ALC POWER LEVEL Uncoupl Atten Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference S 59 GiNGtE Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This hardkey selects single sweep mode aborts any sweep in progress and initiates a single sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time function If you press in the middle of a continuous sweep the sweep is aborted and the swept signal generator retraces to the starting point but does not start a sweep Press SINGLE a second time to start the sweep The amber LED above the hardkey is lit when the function is on SCPI INITiate CONTinuous OFF 0 ABORt INITiate IM Mediate Analyzer 52 Con Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Software Rev Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey displays the swept signal generator s programming language GPIB addres
202. do not send the implied command the instrument assumes you intend to use the implied command and behaves just as if you had sent it Note that this means the instrument expects you to include any parameters required by the implied command The following example illustrates equivalent ways to program the swept signal generator using explicit and implied commands Example swept signal generator commands with and without an implied commands SWEep MANual RELative 6 using explicit commands SWEep MANual 6 using implied commands Optional Parameters Optional parameter names are enclosed in square brackets in the command table If you do not send a value for an optional parameter the instrument chooses a default value The instrument s command dictionary documents the values used for optional parameters Program Message Examples The following parts of the swept signal generator SCPI command set will be used to demonstrate how to create complete SCPI program messages gt FREQuency cw MULTiplier STATE POWER LEVEL 1 72 Getting Started Programming Example 1 FREQuency CW 5 GHZ MULTiplier 2 The command is correct and will not cause errors It is equivalent to sending FREQuency CW 5 GHZ FREQuency MULTiplier 2 Example 2 FREQuency 5 GHZ MULTiplier 2 This command results in a command error The command makes use of the default CW node When using a default node there is no change to the current pat
203. drs Menu My Adrs The active entry area indicates the present decimal address If the number displayed is not 19 reset it to 19 Press 2 e ENTER If the swept signal generator does not respond to a front panel address change set the GPIB address switch rear panel to 31 all ones enabling front panel changes to both address and interface language Now check that the interface language is set to SCPI Press PRIOR An asterisk denotes the selected interface language If an asterisk is not next to the SCPI key label select Power Up Language SCPI Getting Started Programming 1 87 Use of the Command Tables In Table 1 4 notice that a new column titled Allowed Values has been added to the command table This column lists the specific values or range of values allowed for each parameter A vertical bar separates values in a list from which you must choose one value The commands listed in the table are only part of all the available SCPI commands of the swept signal generator For a complete listing of the programming codes see SCPI Command Summary in Chapter 2 Operating and Programming Reference Table 1 4 Sample Swept Signal Generator Commands Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values CALibration PMETer FLATness INI Tiate flatness array discrete USER DIODE PMETer MMHead to cal NEXT measured power extended numeric lt num gt lvl suffix gt CORRectio
204. ds closest to the root level are at the top of the table Commands in square brackets are implied commands which are discussed in later paragraphs If a command requires one or more parameters in addition to the keyword the parameter names are listed adjacent to the command Parameters in square brackets are optional parameters which are discussed in later paragraphs If the parameter is not in square brackets it is required and you must send a valid setting for it with Getting Started Programming 1 71 the matching command The parameter type is listed adjacent to each named parameter More About Commands Query and Event Commands Because you can query any value that you can set the query form of each command is not shown explicitly in the command tables For example the presence of the swept signal generator SWEep DWEL1 command implies that a SWEep DWEL1 also exists If you see a table containing a command ending with a question mark it is a query only command Some commands are events and cannot be queried An event has no corresponding setting if it causes something to happen inside the instrument at a particular instant For example INITiate IMMediate causes a certain trigger sequence to initiate Because it is an event there is no query form of INITiate IMMediate Implied Commands Implied commands appear in square brackets in the command table If you send a subcommand immediately preceding an implied command but
205. due to an FEROM failure Indicates a phase lock loop error caused by either a hardware failure or misadjustment Indicates a phase lock loop error caused by either a hardware failure or misadjustment Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the transfer of fractional N data has failed Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Operating and Programming Reference F 3 Fault Info 2 Programming Codes SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also Fault Menu Fault Info 3 Function Group SERVICE Menu Map 6 Description This softkey displays the latched status of the following fault messages CALYO FAIL Indicates that the YO adjusted at power on or at CALMAN FAIL TMR CNFLCT FAIL SEARCH Programming Codes SCPI NONE preset is unable to calibrate Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the manual sweep DAC adjusted at power on or at preset is unable to calibrate Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates a possible internal software error Two routines are trying to use the same timer Indicates that the ALC search leveling algorithm has failed This fault indication is possible only if the search leveling mode is on Analyzer NONE See Also Fault Menu F 4 Operating and Programming Reference Fltness Menu
206. e If you send more than one command in the same message you must separate them with 1 80 Getting Started Programming a semicolon You must always end a program message with one of the three program message terminators shown in Figure 1 29 Use lt new line gt lt END gt or lt new line gt lt END gt as the program message terminator The word lt END gt gt means that EOI is asserted on the GPIB interface at the same time the preceding data byte is sent Most programming languages send these terminators automatically For example if you use the HP BASIC OUTPUT statement lt new line gt is automatically sent after your last data byte If you are using a PC you can usually configure the system to send whatever terminator you specify Subsystem Command Syntax Figure 1 30 describes the basic syntax of SCPI subsystem commands parameter mnemonic NOTE SP white space ASCII characters O16 to 9 ig and 11 to 32 io Figure 1 30 Simplified Subsystem Command Syntax As Figure 1 30 shows there must be a lt space gt between the last command mnemonic and the first parameter in a subsystem command This is one of the few places in SCPI where lt space gt is required Note that if you send more than one parameter with a single command you must separate adjacent parameters with a comma Parameter types are explained later in this subsection Common Command Syntax Figure 1 31 describes the syntax of com
207. e control of the linear modulator circuit LVL DAC and attenuator ATN is possible see Figure A 1 The power level must be set using an external indicator power meter sensor If the power level is set when the swept signal generator is in CW mode and then pulse modulation is activated the peak pulse level equals the CW level The attenuator value is set via the Set Atten softkey in the POWER menu An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC STATe OFF 0 POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF 0 Analyzer SHA3 ALC MOD Pulse On Off External Set Atten Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference L 1 Leveling Mode Normal Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you set the leveling mode of the swept signal generator to continuous leveling at the desired leveling point In this mode the RF OUTPUT is controlled by the automatic level control ALC circuit otherwise referred to as the leveling loop The attenuator works in conjunction with the ALC to achieve the full range of power levels At factory preset ALC normal is the default state An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC STATe ON 1 Analyzer Al internal normal A2 external normal A3 external power meter normal SHA2 source module normal axa Leveling Mo
208. e unit under test and end the program All HP BASIC programs must have END as the last statement of the main program Getting Started Programming 1 79 Details of Commands and Responses In This Subsection This subsection describes the syntax of SCPI commands and responses It provides many examples of the data types used for command parameters and response data The following topics are explained Program Message These paragraphs explain how to properly Syntax construct the messages you send from the computer to instruments Response Message These paragraphs discuss the format of Syntax messages sent from instruments to the computer SCPI Data Types These paragraphs explain the types of data contained in program and response messages Program Message These paragraphs examine the construction of SCPI program Syntax messages in more detail Recall that program messages are the messages you send from the computer to an instrument These program messages contain commands combined with appropriate punctuation and program message terminators Figure 1 29 illustrates the simplified syntax of a program message subsystem command common command NOTES line gt A END lt new lt new line gt ASCII character decimal 10 SEND EOI asserted concurrent with last byte Figure 1 29 Simplified Program Message Syntax As Figure 1 29 shows you can send common commands and subsystem commands in the same messag
209. e ON OFF Analyzer NONE MoD also see AM and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference A 17 Ampl Markers Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER Active markers are normally displayed as intensified dots on a CRT display With Ampl Markers selected active markers are displayed as amplitude spikes an abrupt discontinuity in the sweep trace The marker amplitude can be varied The swept signal generator displays gt AMPLITUDE MARKER SIZE XXXX dB Where XXXX represents an amplitude value Use the rotary knob the step keys or the numerical entry keys with the dB m terminator key to set the desired value If a small change is required the left and right arrow keys can be used to underline the digit to be changed Select Ampi Markers again to return to the normal intensified dot representation See Specifications for the range of acceptable amplitude values An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI MARKer AOFF Analyzer AK1 function on AKO function off MARKER Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Setting Up A Typical Sweep Example Program 3 in Chapter 1 AM Type 10 dB V Function Group Menu Map Description MOD MODULATION This softkey Option 002 only scales the amplitude modulation exponentially Amplitude modulation lets the RF output of the swept signal generator be continuously and exponentially
210. e a single key within that menu UsrMenu Clear Activates the USER DEFINED menu and clears all keys in that menu Programming Codes SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also Softkeys listed above CONNECTORS USER DEFINED menu S 78 Operating and Programming Reference 10 MHz Freq Std Auto Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey sets the swept signal generator to choose its frequency standard automatically If an external standard is connected to the 10 MHz REF INPUT BNC then it is chosen as the reference If no external standard is connected the internal standard is chosen as the reference If the internal standard has been disconnected also the swept signal generator operates in a free run state An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI ROSCillator SOURce AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE Ref Osc Menu Operating and Programming Reference T 1 10 MHz Freq Std Extrnl Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey tells the swept signal generator to accept an external 10 MHz signal as the frequency reference The external signal must be applied to the 10 MHz REF INPUT BNC connector located on the rear panel If no external signal is applied UNLOCK and EXT REF appears on the message line of the display An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active S
211. e information Table 3 7 illustrates the factory instrument preset conditions for the 8360 B Series and the HP Agilent 8340 8341 An instrument preset turns off all the functions and then sets the following Table 3 7 Instrument Preset Conditions for the HP Agilent 8360 8340 8341 Function Condition Sweep Mode Full Span Sweep Continuous Auto Trigger Free Run Markers All Off Modulation Off Frequency Step Size 10 of span Status Bytes Cleared Leveling Internal RF Output On Power Level 0 dBm Power Step Size 10 dB Power Sweep Slope 0 dB Storage Registers Retain current values GPIB Address Retains current value Status Byte Mask Unchanged Extended Status Byte Mask Unchanged Language Mode Unchanged System Connections Note The HP Agilent 8510 Network Analyzer The 8360 B Series swept signal generator is compatible with any HP Agilent 8510 network analyzer with firmware revision 4 0 or higher To upgrade firmware for an existing HP Agilent 8510 an HP Agilent 11575C Revision 4 0 Upgrade Kit or an HP Agilent 11575D Revision 5 0 Upgrade Kit is required HP Agilent 8510 revisions prior to 6 0 not inclusive require that you use the following connections a SWEEP OUTPUT a STOP SWEEP IN OUT a GPIB INTERFACE a AUXILIARY INTERFACE HP Agilent 8510 revisions 6 0 and greater use the connections as designated on the rear panel of the swept signal generator They are a TRI
212. e is 1 e LIST MODE AUTO MANual e LIST MODE Selects and queries whether the list is played back automatically or manually as described in LIST MANual 38 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY LIST MODE LIST TRIGger SOURce How the list is played back AUTO IMMediate Each new frequency point is stepped to automatically after waiting the specified DWELI time Wait fora lt GET gt or TRG over the GPIB before advancing to the next frequency in the list AUTO BUS AUTO EX Ternal Wait for a signal to be received on the external input before advancing to the next frequency in the list MANual Only the list point specified by LIST MANual is played back Don t care RST state is AUTO e LIST POWer CORRection lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum 1 801 LIST POWer CORRection Sets and queries the list of correction levels that correspond to each of the frequencies entered using the LIST FREQ command The attenuator is not allowed to change during the list execution The number of parameters can be from 1 to 801 After RST the value is 0 e LIST POWer CORRection POINts MAXimum MINimum Returns the number of correction points that have been entered into the list array After RST returns a 1 e LIST TRIGger SOURce IMMediate BUS EXTernal e LIST TRIGger SOURce Sets and queries the list point to point trigger source when in the automatic list m
213. e number is not specified then an array of all the selftest names is returned e DIAGnostics TEST POINts Returns the number of points of selftest that is output using DIAGnostics TEST NAME or DIAGnostics TEST RESult e DIAGnostics TEST RESult lt num gt Queries the result of a selftest by number The response is a string containing either Passed Failed or NotRun If lt num gt is missing an array of selftest results are returned e DIAGnostics TINT lt num gt A test feature that returns the value passed to it This is used to test the GPIB interface e DISPlay STATe ON OFF 1 0 e DISPlay STATe Sets and queries the display ON OFF switch After RST the value is 1 Operating and Programming Reference S 33 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e FM COUPling AC DC e FM COUPling Sets and queries the FM input coupling mode The RST value is AC e FM DEViation lt num gt freq suffix gt MAXimum MINimum e FML DEViation MAXimum MINimun Sets and queries the peak FM deviation in Hz when the internal FM generator is used After RST the value is 1 MHz e FM FILTer HPASs lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e FM FILTer HPASs MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the FM AC bandwidth There are only two positions to the bandwidth lt 20 Hz and gt 100 kHz but any numeric is accepted The value is compared to 1 kHz and the correct position is determined gt 1 kHz sets the position to 100 kHz and lt
214. e range of the ALC modulator alone If so the LOW UNLVLED warning message is displayed Inserting 40 dB of attenuation results in an ALC level of 0 dBm which is well within the range of the ALC At 20 GHz 30 dB attenuation is a better choice as it results in an ALC level of 10 dBm This gives a margin for AM or other functions that vary the power level For optimum display accuracy and minimum noise the ALC level should be greater than 10 dBm This is achieved by using attenuation equal to the tens digit of output power Example desired output power 43 dBm use gt ATTEN 40 dB ALC 3 dBm 1 Press POWER menu 2 Select Set Atten 4 0 4B m To obtain flatness corrected power refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in the Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance section Leveling with Power Leveling with a power meter is similar to leveling with a diode Meters detector Figure 1 13 shows the setup for power meter leveling SWEPT SIGNAL GENERATOR D oo a o o oo ool SS oono 2 o D000 o go0o00 oooo00 Ooo00 LEVELED OUTPUT RF OUTPUT POHER SPLITTER OR RECORDER DIRECTIONAL COUPLER OUT POWER SENSOR Figure 1 13 Leveling with a Power Meter 1 Set up the equipment as shown Be sure to set the power meter to manual range mode and note the range Refer to menu map 1 Press ALC
215. e setting of the rear panel GPIB switch Printer Adrs Controls the system printer address Operating and Programming Reference A 1 Adrs Menu Programming Codes SCPI NONE see the individual softkeys listed Analyzer NONE See Also GPIB Menu softkeys listed above Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 GPIB Address Selection in Chapter 3 A 2 Operating and Programming Reference TO Function Group Menu Map Description ALC ALC This hardkey accesses the automatic level control ALC functions ALC BW Menu Coupling Factor Leveling Mode ALCoff Leveling Mode Normal Leveling Mode Search Leveling Point ExtDet Leveling Point Internal Leveling Point Module Accesses the ALC bandwidth menu Specifies the coupling factor of an external coupling device and causes the display to indicate the power at the coupler main output Disables the ALC leveling circuits Relative power level is controlled by means of the level DAC and attenuator Power is not sensed at any point and absolute power level is uncalibrated Sets the swept signal generator to continuous leveling at the specified leveling point The swept signal generator activates power search leveling mode Similar to ALCoff mode but first automatically searches for the correct modulator setting so that the desired power level is produced Sets the swept signal generator to level power externally A ne
216. e the available AM depth if you are modulating near the minimum power range of the ALC loop m To offset the power sweep range m To reduce AM noise by operating at a higher ALC level AM Rate The maximum AM rate available is limited by the bandwidth of the components in the RF path At rates of about 100 kHz the integrator can no longer respond so the ALC loop is effectively opened The feedforward path provides the capability to modulate at much faster rates RF components in the ALC loop limit the ALC bandwidth to 250 kHz High power and Option 006 swept signal generators are also limited to 100 kHz by the components in the RF path Swept signal generators with frequency doublers A32 are limited by the 100 kHz bandwidth of the doubler for carrier frequencies greater than 20 GHz Note that due to the feedforward scheme AM bandwidth is not affected when amplitude and pulse modulation are simultaneously activated Deep AM Deep AM mode is a means of reducing distortion when the desired AM depth is very deep greater than 90 or when modulating below an ALC level of 20 dBm Amplitude modulation is summed with the reference level signal The detected signal is compared to the reference Therefore the ALC loop should follow the AM input However the detector s ability to sense low power levels limits the maximum AM depth When the modulation signal reduces the output power level to a level which is below the detector s range li
217. e the bandwidth selection the swept signal generator determines which functions are activated such as M 16 Operating and Programming Reference FM Modulation FM Modulation frequency list mode step sweep mode search leveling mode sweep frequency mode AM or pulse modulation among others For a complete explanation of the selection sequence see Getting Started Advanced Frequency modulation can be accepted from an external source at the FM connector or can be internally generated by swept signal generators with Option 002 The damage level of the FM input is 15 V DC The input impedance is set to 50 Q A jumper on the All FM Driver board allows you to change the input impedance to 600 Q See Adjustments in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide The FM sensitivity can be scaled to either 100 kHz V 1 MHz V or 10 MHz V When internal FM is chosen Option 002 the rate and deviation are set by softkeys in the FM menu The waveform menu provides a choice of sine square triangle ramp or noise waveforms The monitor menu lets you output the internally generated modulation waveforms to the rear panel AM FM OUTPUT connector The scale of the FM output depends on the FM deviation chosen The following table shows the scale versus deviation The monitor menu also lets you display the value of the FM deviation Internal FM Scale FM Dev
218. each of the notes and its meaning before operating this instrument Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met General Safety Considerations WARNING No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating F 5A 250V The use of other fuses or material is prohibited This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited If this instrument is used in a manner not specified by Agilent Technologies the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired This product must be u
219. ecifically an attempt has been made to write to a test patch and EEROM failed to store the data ERROR CALIBRATION FAILED This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically an A14 sweep ramp calibration has been attempted and failed Run the sweep ramp selftest Refer to the MENU MAPS chapter in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide ERROR Must first enter correction freq This error occurs when a correction point does not have its corresponding frequency entered first Refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 ERROR Must first enter a List Frequency This error occurs when a dwell or offset value does not have its corresponding frequency entered first Refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 ERROR Power Search Failed This error occurs when the ALC is in the ALC search mode and is unable to level to the desired power level Refer to Chapter 4 and follow the local operator s check procedures ERROR Start must be lt Stop This error occurs in association with the frequency list auto fill feature If the start frequency entered is greater than the stop frequency you will see this error Correct by entering a start frequency less than the stop frequency ERROR Stop must be gt Start This error occurs in associatio
220. ection a Generalized Trigger Model Overview Details of Trigger States Inside the Idle State Inside the Initiate State Inside Event Detection States Inside the Sequence Operation State Common Trigger Configurations The INIT Configuration The TRIG Configuration Description of Triggering in the HP 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generators Advanced Trigger Configurations Trigger Keyword Definitions ABORt IM Mediate ODELay SOURce Related Documents The International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Hewlett Packard Company Operating and Programming Reference How To Use This Chapter Address Adrs Menu ALC 2 eee ee ALC Bandwidth Select Auto ALC Bandwidth Select High ALC Bandwidth Select Low ALC BW Menu Altrnate Regs AM BW Cal Always AM BW Cal Once AM Cal Menu AM Menu AM On Off 10 aay AM On Off 1004 V AM On Off Ext AM On Off Int Ampl Markers 1 107 1 109 1 109 1 109 1 109 1 110 1 111 1 111 1 112 1 114 1 115 1 115 1 116 1 117 1 118 1 118 1 118 1 118 1 118 1 119 1 120 1 120 1 120 2 1 A 1 A 1 A 3 A 10 A 10 A 11 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 13 A 14 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 16 A 17 A 18 AM Type 10 dB V AM Type 100 V a ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER Arrow Keys Auto Fill Incr Auto Fill Pts Auto Fill Start Auto Fill Stop Auto Track Blank Disp Center Marker Clear Fault Clear Memory Clear Point CONNECTORS
221. ections The HP Agilent 8510 Network Analyzer Lo The HP Agilent 8757C E Scalar Network Analyzer The HP Agilent 83550 Series Millimeter wave Source Modules The HP Agilent 8970B Noise Figure Meter Remote Operation Loe Loe Language Compatibility Network Analyzer Language 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 10 3 11 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 20 3 20 3 20 3 21 3 21 3 22 3 22 3 22 3 23 3 23 3 23 Contents 13 Contents 14 Test and Measurement System Language Control Interface Intermediate Language Converting from Network Analyzer Language to SCPI Numeric Suffixes Status Bytes Operator s Check and Routine Maintenance Operator s Checks Service Information Local Operator s Check Description Preliminary Check Main Check Routine Maintenance a How to Replace the Line Fuse How to Clean the Fan Filter How to Clean the Cabinet How to Clean the Display Filter Instrument History Index 3 23 3 23 3 23 3 24 3 24 4 1 4 1 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 6 Figures 0 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 18 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 27 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 36 Typical Serial Number Label a The Agilent 83620B Swept signal Generator D
222. ed until either the increment value or the number of points is assigned The auto fill start frequency does not affect the swept signal generator start frequency When Auto Fill Start is selected the active entry area indicates gt Fill Start XXXXXXXXX MHz where X represents a numeric value Unless a previous entry was made the display indicates the swept signal generator minimum frequency SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 A 26 Operating and Programming Reference Auto Fill Stop Auto Fill Stop Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 This softkey is used in two locations Fltness Menu and List Menu The operation is the same in both applications This softkey enables the entry of a stop frequency used to determine the ending frequency of the automatic filling array The array is not created until either the increment value or the number of points is assigned The auto fill stop frequency does not affect the swept signal generator stop frequency When Auto Fill Stop is selected the active entry area indicates gt Fill Stop XXXXXXXXX MHz where X represents a numeric value Unless a previous entry was made the display indicates the swept signal generator maximum frequency SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness
223. edures do not clear the problem contact a qualified service technician A list of Agilent Technologies Sales and Support Offices is provided behind the PREFACE tab at the front of this manual To help the service technician identify the problem quickly fill out and attach a service repair tag Service repair tags are provided at the end of this chapter If a self test error occurs note the name of the failure and the referenced paragraph number in the failure symptoms special control settings section of the tag Provide any information that you feel is important to recreate the failure Operator s Check Routine Maintenance 4 1 Local Operator s Check Description Preliminary Check The preliminary check provides assurance that most of the internal functions of the swept signal generator are working The main check provides a general check of the overall functions of the swept signal generator No external equipment is needed Each time the swept signal generator is turned on the swept signal generator performs a series of self tests on the internal CPU power supplies and front panel When the self test is complete the swept signal generator returns to the same functional configuration that it was in prior to power off When the PRESET key is engaged the swept signal generator returns to the factory or user preset functional configuration 1 Turn the swept signal generator on Note the functional configuration
224. eeps to take 0 to exit INPUT N IF N gt O THEN FOR I 1 TO N DISP Taking sweep number I OUTPUT Source INIT IMM 0PC ENTER NEXT I END IF UNTIL N 0 END Run the program Program Comments 10 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable 20 to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 Clear the computer s display 70 Set the source to its initial state for programming 80 Set up the frequency parameters using a compound message 90 Set up the source s power level and state using a compound message 100 Set up the source s sweep time to 1 second 110 Send the OPC command to the source to ensure that the previous commands are completed and the source is ready to begin controlled sweeps 120 Enter the response to the OPC into the variable X The response should be a 71 130 Start of the loop Getting Started Programming 1 99 140 and 150 Prompt the operator for the number of sweeps to take The number of sweeps to take is stored in the variable N Enter 0 to quit the program 160 Don t take any sweeps if N is less than 0 170 Start a FOR NEXT loop to take N sweeps 180 Display the number of this sweep on the computer display 190 Initiate a single sweep on the source and then wait until the pending operation is complete Return a 1 when the sweep completes 200 Enter the response to the OPC into the variable X The program execution wil
225. efore connecting power to the swept signal generator For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating The use of other fuses or material is prohibited Refer to the Routine Maintenance in Chapter 4 for information on changing fuses Before switching on this product make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Assure the supply voltage is in the specified range Installation 3 3 3 4 Power Cable WARNING CAUTION Installation In accordance with international safety standards this instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate power line outlet this cable grounds the instrument cabinet Figure 3 1 shows the styles of plugs available on power cables supplied with Agilent Technologies instruments The part numbers indicated are part numbers for the complete power cable plug set The specific type of power cable plug shipped with the instrument depends upon the country of shipment destination This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption i
226. egardless of sweep width In CW mode voltage is proportional to percentage of full instrument frequency range Minimum load impedance 3 kilohms Accuracy 0 25 10 mV typical BNC female rear panel Stop Sweep Input Output Sweep will stop when grounded externally TTL high while sweeping TTL low when 8360 stops sweeping Damage level 5 5 0 5 volts BNC female rear panel Z Axis Blanking Markers Output Supplies positive rectangular pulse Approximately 5 volts into 2 kQ during the retrace and bandswitch points of the RF output Also supplies a negative pulse 5 volts when the RF is at a marker frequency intensity markers only BNC female rear panel Volts GHz Output Supplies voltage proportional to output frequency at 0 5 volts GHz internally switchable to 0 25 or 1 volt GHz Maximum output 18 volts Minimum load impedance 2 kQ Accuracy 0 5 10 mV typical BNC female rear panel Source Module Interface Provides bias flatness correction and leveling connections to HP Agilent 83550 series millimeter wave source modules Special front and rear panels Auxiliary Interface Provides control signal connections to HP Agilent 8516A S parameter Test Set 25 pin D subminiature receptacle rear panel Pulse Video Output Option 002 only Outputs the pulse modulation waveform that is supplied to the modulator This can be either the internally or externally generated pulse mod
227. enable up SYST KEY 133 enable down Increment frequency IF TRG See SCPI common commands Input learn string IL SYST ILRN Keyboard release KR Select network NA analyzer mode Output active value OA See SCPI Command Summary Output next bandcross OB DIAG OUTP BAND frequency Output coupled parameters OC FREQ STAR CENT SWE TIME Output diagnostics OD DIAG OUTP FREQ UNL YOD YTMD Output fault information OF DIAG OUTP FAUL Output identity OI IDN See SCPI common commands Output last lock frequency OK DIAG OUTP FREQ Output interrogated value OP See SCPI Command Summary Output power level OR POW LEV 3 26 Installation Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison continued Description Network Analyzer Language SCPI Language Set remote knob Request status byte mask Reset sweep Number of steps in a stepped sweep Swap network analyzer channels Test GPIB interface Sets sweep time lower limit RB RE lt num gt RM lt num gt RS SN lt num gt SW lt 1 0 gt TI lt num gt TL lt num gt time_suffix SRE lt num gt SRE ESE lt num gt ESE ABOR SWE POIN lt num gt DIAG TINT lt num gt SWE TIME LLIM lt num gt time_suffix Take sweep TS TSW WAl Instrument State Instrument preset IP SYST PRES Local instrument control LOCAL 7XX LOCAL 7XX XX Source GPIB address Markers n is 1 to 5 1 is default Turn on
228. ency CW FIXed lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency CW MAXimum MINimum e FREQuency FIXed MAXimum MINimum Operating and Programming Reference S 35 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Sets and queries the CW frequency This does not change the swept CW mode switch RST value is MAX MIN 2 See FREQ CENTER for more information e FREQuency CW AUTO ON JOFF 1 0 e FREQuency FIXed AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e FREQuencyL CW AUTO e FREQuency FIXed AUTO Sets and queries the CW center frequency coupling switch This switch keeps the two functions coupled together when ON Changing one of them changes both RST setting is OFF See FREQ CENTER for more information e FREQuency MANual lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency MANual MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the manual frequency This controls the output frequency in swept manual mode The limits are START and STOP RST value is the same as FREQ CENTER See FREQ CENTER for more information e FREQuency MODE FIXed CW SWEep LIST e FREQuency MODE Sets and queries the switch that selects either swept CW or list operation RST value is CW e FREQuency MULTiplier lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e FREQuency MULTiplier MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency multiplier The numeric value is rounded to the nearest integer This function changes mapping of frequency parameters on input to and output from the swep
229. enerator to CW frequency mode so that the corresponding correction values can be entered Reveals the softkeys in the power meter measure correction menu Operating and Programming Reference F 5 Fltness Menu The softkeys in this menu help front panel users enter and edit flatness correction parameters These editing softkeys are not accessible over GPIB To load correction arrays over GPIB the correction arrays must be created in the controlling program and then downloaded to the swept signal generator The corresponding SCPI array creation and control commands are given after the description of this feature The 8360 B Series swept signal generator provide extremely flat power to a test port for testing power sensitive devices such as amplifiers mixers diodes or detectors The user flatness correction feature of the swept signal generator compensates for attenuation and power variations created by components between the source and the test device User flatness correction allows the digital correction of up to 801 frequency points 1601 points via GPIB in any frequency or sweep mode i e start stop CW power sweep etc Using a power meter to calibrate the measurement system as shown in Figure F 1 a table of power level corrections is created for the frequencies where power level variations or losses occur see Figure F 2 These frequencies may be sequential linear steps or arbitrarily spaced To allow for the correction of
230. ent Status Register One of the following events has occurred a A syntax error has been detected Possible errors are a data element that violates the device listening formats or whose type is unacceptable to the instrument a A semantic error has been detected indicating that an unrecognized header was received a A Group Execute Trigger GET was entered into the input buffer inside a SCPI program message Events that generate Command Errors do not generate Execution Errors Device specific Errors or Query Errors 178 Expression data not allowed 170 Expression error Bad terminator 161 Invalid block data Bad terminator 160 Block data error 160 Block data error Bad block type 151 Invalid string data Bad terminator 144 Character data too long gt 12 chars 141 Invalid character data Bad char in token 138 Suffix not allowed 131 Invalid suffix This one not allowed 123 Exponent too large Decimal number 123 Exponent too large Numeric overflow 122 RESERVED Error Messages 2a 7 121 Invalid character in number 120 Numeric data error Bad format 120 Numeric data error Bad terminator 113 Undefined Header Query not allowed 113 Undefined header Bad mnemonic 109 Missing parameter 108 Parameter not allowed Too many 105 GET not allowed 104 Data type error 104 Data type error Block not allowed 104 Data type error Char not allowed 104 D
231. ently produced 0 The calibration is complete lt 0 An error has occurred and the calibration is aborted e CALibration SPAN AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e CALibration SPAN AUTO Sets and queries the automatic sweep span calibration ON A calibration is done whenever the sweep span is changed OFF A calibration is done only when CALibration SPAN EXECute is sent After RST the setting is OFF e CALibration SPAN EXECute Causes a sweep span calibration e CALibration TRACk Causes an automatic tracking calibration procedure e CORRection ARRayLli lt num gt DB 1601 1601 e CORRection ARRay i Sets and queries the entire 1601 point array of correction values that can be added to the internal flatness correction array The 1601 points are added to the internal flatness array synchronized on the trigger output lus pulses These TTL level pulses are 1601 evenly spaced points across an analog sweep or at each point in step or list mode Entering this array causes the CORRection SOURceLi command to set to ARRay There is one array for the foreground state i 0 and one for the background state i 1 If the i is not specified the default value is i 0 After RST these arrays are cleared Operating and Programming Reference S 29 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e CORRection FLATness lt num gt freq suffix lt num gt DB 2 801 e CORRection FLATness Sets and queries an array of up to 801 frequency correction pairs This correction inf
232. ep operation The selected power level can range from 20 dBm 110 dBm for option 001 swept signal generators to 25 dBm For practice Press POWER LEVEL 2 0 dB m The active entry area shows gt POWER LEVEL 20 00 dBm If the selected power level is beyond the range of the swept signal generator the closest possible power is shown in both the data display area and the active entry area If the selected power level exceeds the maximum leveled power the swept signal generator is able to produce the unleveled message UNLVLED appears on the message line Experiment with the rotary knob and the arrow keys as alternate methods of data entry In typical applications the sweep time can vary tremendously from milliseconds in a network analyzer system to more than a minute in thermistor based power meter systems Press GARY Gi Press TOP 6 GHz _ Press SWEEP TIME 2 Ga Watch the green SWEEP LED it blinks every 2 5 seconds The LED blinks at each retrace For the fastest sweep speed for which all specifications are guaranteed the swept signal generator must be in automatic sweep time selection Refer to menu map 7 Press SWEEP menu Select more 1 3 Select SwpTime Auto Notice that the active entry area indicates gt SWEEP TIME 100 0 mSec AUTO When the swept signal generator is in automatic sweep time selection the active entry area displays AUTO along with the current swee
233. equency is incremented decremented by pressing the up down arrow keys If an underline cursor appears under a digit in the entry display then the value will be modified by the up down arrow keys or the rotary knob The increment decrement size in this case is the underlined digit by the power of 10 If the up down function is on asterisk next to key label and the cursor is not under one of the active entry area digits then frequency value is changed by the up down size using either the up down arrow keys or the rotary knob U 2 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Up Dn Size Swept SCPI FREQuency STEP INCR lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer SF or SHCF lt num gt Hz Kz Mz Gz Manual Sweep Sweep Mode Step Up Dn Size Swept Up Dn Size Swept Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey sets the frequency step size in the swept frequency step mode The step size may be set from 1 Hz to 10 GHz The factory preset step size is 100 MHz Step size values are entered using the entry area If an underline cursor appears under a digit in the entry display then the value will be modified by the up down arrow keys or the rotary knob The increment decrement size in this case is the underlined digit by the power of 10 If the up down function is on asterisk next to key label and the cursor is not under one of the active e
234. equency list List Mode Pt Trig Bus Steps the swept signal generator to the next point in the frequency list when an GPIB trigger is received List Mode Pt Trig Ext Steps the swept signal generator to the next point in the frequency list when an external hardware trigger is received SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above List Menu Operating and Programming Reference P 15 Pulse Delay Normal Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set a value for the internal pulse generator s pulse delay The output pulse is delayed from the leading edge of the PULSE SYNC OUT signal The range of acceptable values is from 0 to a maximum of 25 ns less than the period The factory preset default is 0 ns Use the numeric entry keys arrow keys or rotary knob to change the value When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area SCPI PULM INTernal DELay lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE MOD also see Pulse and Modulation Pulse Delay Trig d Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set a value for the internal pulse generator s pulse delay The output pulse is delayed from the leading edge of the PULSE input signal The range of acceptable values is from 225 ns to 419 ms The factory pr
235. equest TOO MANY CORRECTION PTS REQUESTED This error occurs in association with the user power flatness menu The maximum number of correction points has been reached or the addition of the points requested will exceed the maximum The maximum number of points available is 801 TOO MANY LIST POINTS REQUESTED This error occurs in association with the frequency list menu The maximum number of list points has been reached or the addition of the points requested will exceed the maximum The maximum number of points available is 801 TRACE EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician TRAPO EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician TRAP3 EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Too many test patches This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically the maximum number of test patches has been reached and can accept no more WAIT SAVING CALIBRATION This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically a save calibration has been initiated and not yet completed when another request is made WRONG PASSWORD This error occurs when the service adjustment me
236. equivalent to the reference power measured in step 2 5 Modulation is re enabled if appropriate These steps are performed in approximately 200 us and are repeated any time power or frequency is changed See Also Softkeys listed above Fltness Menu MOD POWER LEVEL Set Atten Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator in Chapter 1 Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Working with Spectrum Analyzers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference A 9 ALC Bandwidth Select Auto Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey sets the swept signal generator to choose the ALC bandwidth automatically depending on the current sweep and modulation conditions An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC BANDwidth AUTO ON 1 Analyzer NONE ALC BW Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 ALC Bandwidth Select High Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey sets the swept signal generator to the ALC high bandwidth position 100 kHz In this mode the ALC bandwidth operates in a wide bandwidth for all sweep and modulation conditions An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI Sending the swept signal generator an ALC bandwidth frequency value of gt 1
237. er ammonia does not hurt the plastic surface Use a soft lint free cloth Do not use abrasive cleaners tissues or paper towels which can scratch the plastic 4 6 Operator s Check Routine Maintenance Instrument History This chapter is left blank until this manual requires changes Instrument History 5 1 Index 10 MHz frequency standard chosen automatically T 1 10 MHz frequency standard external T 1 10 MHz frequency standard internal T 2 10 MHz frequency standard none chosen T 2 10 MHz reference functions R 1 10 MHz reference input connector C 6 10 MHz reference output connector C 6 1601 point flatness array C 12 2 4 mm connector C 11 27 778 kHz square wave P 20 3 5 mm connector C 11 8360 Adrs E 1 8360 as controller 3 7 ABORt command defined 1 118 effect on trigger state 1 111 example using 1 115 ABORt abort affect on trigger state 1 110 abort statement 1 57 AC FM F 12 ac power switch L 5 active entry area 1 4 active entry area on off E 5 active entry arrow 1 4 adapters 3 1 GPIB C 7 adapter three prong to two prong 3 4 ADC fail F 2 address swept signal generator A 1 E 1 address changes no front panel 3 8 address changes prevent 3 8 address changes to 3 8 addresses factory set interface 3 7 address menu A 1 address printer P 11 address programming power meter M 8 airflow 3 9 ALC bandwidth M 16 Index 1 Index 2 menu A 11 select auto A
238. er of points E 4 L 6 power offset E 4 list frequency functions L 5 list frequency step sweep activate S 73 list menu L 5 list mode point trigger external L 9 point trigger interface bus L 8 trigger functions P 14 list mode point trigger automatic L 8 local key L 9 local lockout example program 1 91 local lockout statement 1 58 local statement 1 58 lock save S 1 looping and synchronization example program 1 99 LRN S 14 M1 M2 sweep M 1 maintenance routine 4 4 making entries 1 5 manual part number vii manual sweep 1 12 manual sweep key M 1 marker center frequency C 1 delta 1 14 D 5 delta reference D 6 difference between 1 14 marker 1 key M 3 marker 2 key M 4 marker 3 key M 5 marker 4 key M 5 marker 5 key M 6 marker functions M 2 marker key M 2 markers amplitude 1 14 A 17 frequency 1 14 markers 1 2 set start stop S 62 markers all off M 6 marker sweep M 1 master step control 64 MATE compatibility P 18 mating connectors 3 8 maximize RF power A 27 measure correction all M 7 measure correction current M 7 measure correction undefined M 8 memory erase C 2 memory registers 1 16 memory registers 1 to 8 save S 1 menu maps 2 1 menus previous P 11 message annunciators 1 4 message line 1 4 messages details of program and response 1 66 simple examples 1 72 messages error 2a 1 8 message terminators response message terminator defined 1 82 meter address M
239. er offset This function changes mapping of absolute power parameters on input to and output from the swept signal generator Changing this does not affect the output power of the swept signal generator Only the displayed parameters and query responses are changed The equation implied by this is The entered or displayed power Hardware Power Offset After RST the value is 0 e POWer OFFSet STATe ON OFFI1 0 e POWer OFFSet STATe Queries and turns the power offset off and on After RST the setting is OFF e POWer RANGe lt num gt lvl suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer RANGe Sets and queries the setting of the power meter range This is used when the command POWer ALC SOURce is set to PMETer e POWer SEARch ON OFF 1 0 ONCE e POWer SEARch Sets and queries the power search switch This has an interaction with POWer ALC STATe as described below Operating and Programming Reference S 43 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY POWer ALC STATe POWer SEARch Power Switch Action ON ON ALC is momentarily closed to level at the requested power and then the modulator is set to the same voltage in open loop mode This repeats automatically any time that the power level or frequency is changed ON OFF Normal mode ON ONCE Immediately performs a power search This leaves POWer SEARch in the ON position OFF not applicable Modulator setting is explicitly set by user e POWer SLOPe lt num gt
240. eries Swept CW Generator Service Guide for more information Error Messages From 499 To 400 These error messages indicate that the Output Queue Control of the swept signal generator has detected a problem with the message exchange protocol This type of error sets the Query Error Bit bit 2 in the Event Status Register One of the following has occurred m An attempt has been made to read data from the Output Queue when no output is present or is pending m Data in the Output Queue has been lost Events that generate Query Errors do not generate Command Errors Execution Errors or Device specific Errors 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite res 430 Query DEADLOCKED 430 Query DEADLOCKED Output Buffer Full 420 Query UNTERMINATED 420 Query UNTERMINATED Nothing To Say 410 Query INTERRUPTED Error Messages From 399 To 300 These error messages indicate that some device operations did not properly complete possibly due to an abnormal hardware or firmware condition This type of error sets the Device specific Error bit 3 in the Event Status Register Events that generate Device specific Errors do not generate Command Errors Execution Errors or Query Errors 350 Too many errors and also 32768 330 Self test failed 330 Self test failed Power On Tests 313 Calibration memory lost Defaulted Error Messages From 299 To 200 These error messages indicate that an error
241. error string gt where the error number is as shown in the Error Messages section and error string is lt Generic HP SL string gt lt More specific information gt An example response to SYST ERR is 23 NUMERIC OVERFLOW YOU PUT IN A NUMBER TOO BIG e SYSTem LANGuage SCPI CIIL COMPatible Causes the swept signal generator to perform a language switch to another language system e SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO ON OFFIOI1 e SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO Sets and queries automatic selection of the millimeter source module interface connector If the swept signal generator finds a source module connected at both the front and the rear connectors the source module at the front connector is selected Programming a specific state via SYSTem MMHUead SELect sets SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO to OFF RST value is 1 e SYSTem MMHead SELect FRONt REAR NONE e SYSTem MMHead SELect Sets and queries the active millimeter source module interface Programming a specific state FRONt REAR NONE sets SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO to OFF Programming a specific state will cause the instrument to examine the selected interface to determine the type of source module connected The instrument frequency limits and multiplier will be altered accordingly However the leveling point is not changed see POWer ALC SOURce e SYSTem PRESet EXECute Sets the swept signal generator to its local operation state This is the same as pressi
242. es m Invalid Language set on rear panel switch The GPIB Language switch located on the rear panel has been set to an invalid programming language selection The programming language is defaulted to the previous setting Check the rear panel switch See Chapter 3 for information on language selection Error Messages 2a 1 2a 2 Error Messages OPTION NOT INSTALLED The language selected and the corresponding firmware hardware necessary to run that language is not present in the swept signal generator See Chapter 3 for information on language selection DISPLAY IS NOT RESPONDING Can appear on the front panel emulator if the internal processor can not communicate with the display properly This error indicates a display failure or a display connector problem DIVIDE BY ZERO EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician EEROM FAILED LOST CAL This error indicates that the swept signal generator has lost its calibration constants and may not meet specifications Refer to Chapter 4 and follow the local operator s check procedures If you are a qualified service technician and this failure occurs read the Calibration Constants section in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide EEROM Failed This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Sp
243. es access to the swept signal generator s programming language 1 Press SYSTEM MENU 2 Select GPIB Menu 3 The swept signal generator displays the three language softkeys Programming Language SCPI Programming Language Analyzr and Programming Language CIIL An asterisk indicates the selected language 4 Select the desired softkey Remember If the swept signal generator displays Rear panel GPIB language must be 7 111 in order to change current language XXX the address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 is set to something other than 7 all 1s Note If the swept signal generator does not have Option 700 and you select Power Up Language CIIL the instrument displays KOPTION NOT INSTALLED 5 The asterisk indicates the selected softkey and the swept signal generator displays LANG XXXX ADRS XX REV da mo yr How to Select a Language on an Instrument without a Front Panel If your swept signal generator does not have a front panel set the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 for the language you want See Table 3 2 for language addresses Table 3 2 Language GPIB Addresses Language GPIB Address Decimal SCPI 0 Analyzer 1 CIIL 2 3 6 Installation GPIB LANG ADDRESS LV CV ov nv L C HUUUUUUU OPEN AARNA EET ERER NA A NNN KAW SS anana TSX ee ERY YSN CGS eRRERNREREAZERSCS RN METH PITT TAN Ey OO LTA AA
244. es that the internal YO V GHz line adjusted at power on or at preset is unable to calibrate Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the ADC analog to digital converter is not responding to a measurement request within the time out period The ADC is used extensively in the operations of the swept signal generator Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Programming Codes See Also Fault Info 2 SCPI See Fault Menu Analyzer NONE Fault Menu Fault Info 2 Function Group Menu Map Description SERVICE This softkey displays the latched status of the following fault messages EEROM FAIL PWRON FAIL CALCO FAIL PLLZERO FAIL PLLWAIT FAIL FNXFER FAIL Indicates that the EEROM electrically erasable read only memory has failed to store data properly Whenever any data is stored in EEROM the integrity of the data is checked read back and compared to the data in RAM The EEROM is the main storage location for calibration data If this fault is indicated the present calibration data may be lost Indicates that the test of the processor ROM RAM and I O system performed at power on has failed The front panel INSTR CHECK LED lights Initiate a full self test to gather more information if this fault is indicated Indicates that the internal calibration data has been defaulted either deliberately or
245. eset default is 225 ns Use the numeric entry keys arrow keys or rotary knob to change the value When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area SCPI PULM EXTernal DELay lt num gt time suffix MA Ximum MINimum Analyzer NONE MOD also see Pulse and Modulation P 16 Operating and Programming Reference Pulse Menu Pulse Menu Function Group Menu Map Description See Also moD This description is for the Pulse Menu softkey for swept signal generators without Option 002 For the Option 002 Pulse Menu softkey go to the Pulse Menu heading that follows this one This softkey reveals the pulse parameter softkeys Pulse Period Sets the internal pulse generator s pulse period Pulse Rate Sets the internal pulse generator s pulse repetition rate Pulse Rise Time Auto Applies the appropriate filter fast slow to both internal and external pulse waveforms Pulse Rise Time Fast Applies a fast rise pulse filter to both internal and external pulse waveforms Pulse Rise Time Slow Applies a slow rise pulse filter to both internal and external pulse waveforms Pulse Width Sets the internal pulse generator s pulse width Softkeys listed above ALC MoD Operating and Programming Reference P 17 Pulse Menu Function Group op Menu Map 4 Description This description is for the Pulse Menu softkey for swept signal generators with Option 00
246. essed again Softkeys Ampl Markers Center Marker and M1 M2 Sweep are not affected by turning the markers off The function or the frequency values is retained as the swept signal generator settings SCPI MARKer AOFF Analyzer SHMO Ampl Markers Center Marker M1 M2 Sweep MARKER Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Measure Corr All Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey enables the swept signal generator to act as a controller to command an HP Agilent 437B power meter to measure flatness correction values at all frequency points defined in the flatness array SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Mtr Meas Menu Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference M 7 Measure Corr Current Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you enable the swept signal generator to act as a controller to command an HP Agilent 437B power meter to measure a single flatness correction value at the current flatness array frequency SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Mtr Meas Menu Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 Measure Corr Undef Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets yo
247. etting Started Advanced in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Power Offset Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey changes the mapping of absolute power parameters on input to the swept signal generator It does not change the RF output produced by the swept signal generator The equation used to determine the displayed value is Entered or Displayed Power Hardware Power ALC Active Offset SCPI POWer OF Fset STATe ONJOFF 1 0 POWer OF Fset lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN Analyzer NONE POWER LEVEL and POWER MENU P 6 Operating and Programming Reference Power Slope Power Slope Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you compensate for system cable and waveguide variations due to changes in frequency by linearly increasing or decreasing power output as the frequency increases RF slope values may range from 2 50 to 2 50 dB per GHz The power at the beginning of the sweep equals the current power level An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer SLOPe STATe ON OFF 1 0 POWer SLOPe lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN Analyzer SL1 function on SLO function off Note that because SL functions in the fundamental units of dB Hz you program the SL code 5Lmdt where m is 1 on or 0 off d is the numer
248. evel at the power sensor of an external power meter This mode of operation requires a feedback connection from the power meter to the EXT ALC BNC located on the swept signal generator An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer ALC SOURce PMETer Analyzer A3 atc CONNECTORS Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator in Chapter 1 LINE SWITCH Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also NONE NONE The line switch on off switch has two positions off or standby and on If line power is connected to the swept signal generator and the line switch is set to off the swept signal generator is in the standby state amber LED on Standby provides power to the internal frequency standard oven When line power is connected and the line switch is set to on the swept signal generator power supplies are enabled and a limited self test is initiated The CPU self test is performed power supplies and the front panel processor are checked NONE INSTALLATION for information on fuses Error Messages for information on messages displayed at power on Operating and Programming Reference L 5 List Menu Function Group FREQUENCY Menu Map 2 Description Auto Fill Incr Auto Fill Pts Auto Fill Start Auto Fill Stop Delete Menu Enter List Dwell Enter List Freq Enter List Power Global Dwell Global Offset Pt Trig
249. f steps necessary to generate the correction information at each frequency point If a GPIB error message is displayed verify that the interface connections are correct Check the GPIB address of the power meter and ensure that it is the same address the swept signal generator is using address 13 is assumed Refer to the menu map 8 System for the key sequence necessary to reach softkey Meter Adrs Enable User Flatness Correction When the operation is complete a message is displayed the flatness correction array is ready to be applied to your setup Disconnect the power meter sensor On the swept signal generator press POWER LEVEL n dBm Where n Po max Ppath loss for maximum leveled power at the test port To save the swept signal generator parameters including the correction table in an internal register press SAVE n n number 1 through 8 Getting Started Advanced 1 45 1 46 Getting Started Advanced 21 22 23 Reactivate the HP Agilent 8757 System Interface Set the analyzer to SYSINTF ON the analyzer and swept signal generator preset Press G Recall the swept signal generator parameters from storage register 1 On the swept signal generator press FLTNESS ON OFF amber LED on The power produced at the point where the power meter sensor was disconnected is now calibrated at the frequencies and power level specified above Using Detector Calibration Detector calibra
250. ff portion of the cycle In search leveling mode the RF amplitude is set with pulse modulation off and the ALC loop closed Then the loop integrator output is measured Next the integrator is disconnected and the modulator is driven directly with a DC voltage which has been set to the value that was provided by the loop integrator Any AM signal present is added to this DC voltage This procedure is automatic with search leveling mode engaged The level setting procedure is automatically repeated whenever the carrier frequency or power level is changed and takes approximately 250 ms This procedure should also be repeated periodically to correct for the effects of temperature drift Unleveled operation can be used for very narrow pulses by opening the ALC loop see Leveling Mode ALCoff The power level is set in CW operation with pulse modulation off using an external power meter With Option 006 pulses as narrow as 20 ns can be produced in this mode Changes due to temperature drift can be expected in this mode also Pulse Envelope The best pulse envelopes are obtained with the peak RF function see Peak RF Always This feature aligns the output filter so that its passband is centered on the RF output The pulse envelope changes with frequency and changes slightly with power level Swept signal generators with Option 006 pulse capability vary little with frequency The pulse envelope produced by the swept signal genera
251. fference between M2 and M1 marker reference If markers have not been activated after preset selecting Delta Marker indicates the difference between M2 and M1 Both of these markers have an asterisk next to their key label indicating that they are on Whenever Delta Marker is selected it reactivates the last marker selected and makes that marker the m frequency If the delta marker feature is active selecting a marker causes the m frequency to change to the marker selected If a frequency entry is made when delta marker is in the active entry area the frequency value of the m frequency is changed to the new frequency entry causing the new difference in frequency to be displayed Negative frequency differences are possible if n is greater than m Operating and Programming Reference D 5 Delta Marker Programming Codes See Also SCPI MARKer n DELTa lt num gt lt num gt Analyzer MD1 function on MDO function off MARKER Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Delta Mkr Ref Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey displays the five markers available as the delta marker reference The delta marker frequency is calculated using the equation Sm fm fnref where fm is the frequency of the active marker and fmref is the frequency of the reference marker SCPI MARKer REFerenc l
252. ffset list array G 1 GPIB analyzer language P 13 CIIL language P 13 printer address P 11 SCPI programming P 14 technical standard 1 120 trigger frequency list L 8 GPIB address changes to 3 8 factory set 3 7 power meter M 8 swept signal generator A 1 E 1 GPIB address identify S 60 GPIB address menu A 1 GPIB check example program 1 90 GPIB connecting cables 1 56 GPIB connector C 7 GPIB connector mnemonics C 9 GPIB control functions H 1 GPIB definition of 1 55 GPIB syntax error message 2a 3 GPIB trigger stepped sweep mode S 70 sweep mode 63 grounding pin 3 4 Group Execute Trigger 1 119 group execute trigger command S 17 HP Agilent 437B detector calibration E 6 programming address M 8 HP Agilent 437B flatness correction measure all M 7 HP Agilent 437B measure correction M 7 M 8 HP Agilent 437B measure correction functions M 27 HP Agilent 8340 status register A 19 HP Agilent 8340 41 system convert to 8360 system 3 19 HP Agilent 83550 series interface connector C 9 HP Agilent 83550 series system connections 3 22 HP Agilent 8510 system connections 3 21 HP Agilent 8516A interface connector C 6 Index 11 Index 12 HP Agilent 8757C E system connections 3 21 HP Agilent 8970B system connections 3 22 humidity range 3 9 identify current datecode 5 60 identifying string S 14 identify options command S 14 idle trigger state 1 109 details of operation 1 111
253. filter and oscillator to maximize output power for the CW frequency mode Peak RF Always Peak RF Once Realigns the swept signal generator s output filter and oscillator to maximize output power for the CW frequency mode Operating and Programming Reference T 3 Tracking Menu Programming Codes See Also SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above Using the Tracking Feature in Chapter 1 TrigOut Delay Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This softkey lets you specify the amount of time after phase lock before a trigger pulse is sent out of the TRIGGER OUTPUT BNC The delay can be set from 0 to 3 2 seconds An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI TRIGger ODELay lt num gt time suffix Analyzer NONE Start Sweep Trigger Auto Start Sweep Trigger Bus Start Sweep Trigger Ext T 4 Operating and Programming Reference Uncoupl Atten Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey uncouples the attenuator if there is one from the ALC system It allows independent control of attenuator settings An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active To set the attenuator after it is uncoupled select Set Atten To view the current ALC and attenuator settings press POWER LEVEL SCPI POWer ATTentuation AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer SHPS lt num gt DB DM
254. ft there The RST value is ON e POWer CENTer lt num gt lvl suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer CENTer MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the center power for power sweep Default units and units for query response are determined by the UNIT POWer command S 42 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY The coupling equations for power sweep are exactly analogous to those for frequency sweep Power sweep is allowed to be negative unlike frequency sweeps See FREQ CENT for a description RST value is 0 dBm e POWerl LEVel lt num gt lvl suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWerl LEVel MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the output level Default units and units for the query response are determined by the UNIT POWer command Maximum and minimum levels refer to the leveling mode at the time the command is sent For example RST POWer LEVel MIN ALC SOURce MMHead has different effects from RST POWer ALC SOURce MMHead POWer LEVel MIN After RST the value is 0 dBm e POWer MODE FIXed SWEep e POWer MODE Sets and queries the setting of the power sweep mode switch If in the sweep mode then the output level is controlled by the start stop center and span functions If in the fixed power mode then the output is controlled by the POW LEVEL command The RST value is FIXed e POWer OFFSet lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e POWer OFFSet MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the pow
255. g edge of the internally generated pulse PULSE VIDEO OUT Option 002 only Outputs the pulse modulation waveform that is supplied to the modulator This can be either the internally or externally generated pulse modulation SWEEP OUTPUT provides a voltage range of 0 to 10 V When the swept signal generator is sweeping the SWEEP OUTPUT is 0 V at the beginning of the sweep and 10 V at the end of the sweep regardless of the sweep width In CW mode the SWEEP OUTPUT ranges from 0 V at the swept signal generator minimum Operating and Programming Reference C 5 CONNECTORS C 6 Multi pin Connectors frequency to 10 V at the specified maximum frequency with a proportional voltage for frequencies between the specified minimum and maximum When the swept signal generator is in manual sweep operation the sweep output voltage is a percentage of the span Minimum load impedance is 3 kQ STOP SWEEP IN OUT stops a sweep when this input is pulled low Retrace does not occur and the sweep resumes when this input is pulled high The open circuit voltage is TTL high and is internally pulled low when the swept signal generator stops its sweep Externally forcing this input high will not cause damage or disrupt normal operation 10 MHz REF INPUT accepts a 10 MHz 100 Hz 0 to 10 dBm reference signal for operation referenced to an external time base Nominal input impedance is 50 2 10 MHz REF OUTPUT provides a 0 dBm 10 MHz signal derived f
256. g the sequence of steps necessary to generate the compensation information Getting Started Advanced 1 47 If a GPIB error message is displayed verify that the interface connections are correct Check the GPIB address of the power meter and ensure that it is the same address the swept signal generator is using address 13 is assumed Refer to the menu map 8 System for the key sequence necessary to reach softkey Meter Adrs 9 When the operation is complete a message is displayed disconnect the power meter sensor The swept signal generator has stored the compensation information in its memory and is using it to calibrate the detector s output voltage relative to power 1 48 Getting Started Advanced Using the Tracking Feature Note Peaking Peaking is the function that aligns the output filter YTM so that its passband is centered on the RF output in CW or manual sweep mode Use peaking to obtain the maximum available power and spectral purity and best pulse envelopes at any given frequency above 2 0 GHz The YTM is inactive for the low band frequencies 10 MHz to 2 0 GHz To peak at the present CW frequency Press USER CAL Select Tracking Menu Peak RF Once This causes an instantaneous execution of the peaking function This is a one time implementation of the peaking where the function is turned on and then turned off To peak at the present CW frequency and continue to peak at new frequencies as they a
257. gative detector output must be connected to the EXT ALC input Sets the swept signal generator to level power internally Sets the swept signal generator to level power at the output of a millimeter wave module Either an HP Agilent 8349B or 8355X series millimeter wave source module must be connected to the SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE Operating and Programming Reference A 3 ALC Leveling Point PwrMtr Sets the swept signal generator to level power at an external power meter A power meter s recorder output must be connected to the EXT ALC input Pwr Mtr Range Specifies the operating range of an external power meter used in an external leveling setup This causes the swept signal generator display to agree with the power meter s power indication The following paragraphs explain the power control leveling function of the swept signal generator in detail ALC SYSTEM OVERVIEW The ALC system referred to as a system because it encompasses more than one functional area is shown as a simplified block diagram in Figure A 1 The purpose of this system is to control the amplitude or power level of the RF energy generated by the swept signal generator It is a feedback control system in which the output power is measured and compared to the desired power level If the output power does not equal the desired power level the ALC system changes the output until they are equal Desired power level can be set by either fron
258. general programming model 1 110 event register 1 107 in general status register model 1 106 1 107 events event commands 1 72 Index 7 Index 8 example program flatness correction 1 103 GPIB check 1 90 local lockout 1 91 looping and synchronization 1 99 setting up a sweep 1 93 synchronous sweep 1 101 use of queries 1 95 use of save recall 1 97 example programs 1 87 105 examples equipment used 1 2 examples simple program messages 1 72 example stimulus response program 1 77 extended numeric parameters discussed in detail 1 84 explained briefly 1 74 extenders GPIB C 9 EXTernal trigger source defined 1 119 external ALC BNC L 3 L 4 external ALC connector C 5 external AM A 16 external detector calibration E 6 external detector leveling L 3 external frequency standard T 1 external leveling 1 23 29 coupling factor C 12 detector calibration E 6 low output 1 26 theory of A 7 with detectors couplers or splitters 1 23 26 with power meters 1 27 with source modules 1 28 external power meter range P 23 external pulse modulation P 18 external trigger frequency list L 9 external trigger stepped sweep S 70 external trigger sweep mode S 63 factor coupling C 12 factory preset P 10 factory set interface addresses 3 7 fan filter clean 4 5 fastest sweep retrace cycle S 62 fault information F 1 fault information 1 F 2 fault information 2 F 3 fault menu F 1 fault
259. gramming the Trigger System In This Subsection Generalized Trigger Model This subsection discusses the layered trigger model used in SCPI instruments It also outlines some commonly encountered trigger configurations and programming methods Trigger system topics are explained in the following paragraphs Generalized Trigger These paragraphs explain the structure and Model components of the layered trigger model used in all SCPI instruments Common Trigger These paragraphs explain the INIT and TRIG Configurations configurations implemented in the swept signal generator Trigger Command These paragraphs provide condensed definitions Definitions for the keywords used in this subsection Understanding trigger systems requires more technical expertise than most other topics covered in this section If you find this subsection difficult keep in mind that you do not have to program the trigger system to make measurements or output signals Using MEASure READ or INITiate you can avoid having to learn the information in this subsection Overview An instrument trigger system synchronizes instrument actions with specified events An instrument action may be to make a measurement or source an output signal The events used to synchronize these actions include software trigger commands changing signal levels and pulses on BNC connectors The trigger system also lets you specify the number of times to repeat certain actions and del
260. h position Since there is no command MULT at the root an error results A correct way to send this is FREQ 5 GHZ FREQ MULT 2 or as in example 1 Example 3 FREQuency MULTiplier 2 MULTiplier STATE ON FREQuency CW 5 GHZ This command results in a command error The FREQ CW portion of the command is missing a leading colon The path level is dropped at each colon until it is in the FREQ MULT subsystem So when the FREQ CW command is sent it causes confusion because no such node occurs in the FREQ MULT subsystem By adding a leading colon the current path is reset to the root The corrected command is FREQuency MULTiplier 2 MULTiplier STATE ON FREQuency CW 5 GHZ Example 4 FREQ 5 GHZ POWER 4 DBM Notice that in this example the keyword short form is used The command is correct It utilizes the default nodes of CW and LEVEL Since default nodes do not affect the current path it is not necessary to use a leading colon before POWER Parameter Types As you saw in the example command table for SWEep there are several types of parameters The parameter type indicates what kind of values are valid instrument settings The most commonly used parameter types are numeric extended numeric discrete and Boolean These common types are discussed briefly in the following paragraphs The paragraph titled Details of Commands and Responses explains all parameter types in greater depth Numeric Parameters Numeric pa
261. hange the center frequency of the sweep to that of the marker The frequency span does not change unless the new sweep limits fall outside the frequency range of the swept signal generator in that case the swept signal generator automatically scales the frequency span to be within the swept signal generator s operating frequency range SCPI MARKer n FREQuency FREQuency CENTer lt freq from above gt freq suffix Analyzer MC MARKER Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Clear Fault Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SERVICE This softkey clears all the latched fault status indicators SCPI DIAGnostics OUTPut FAULts The above command relays the fault information and clears all faults Analyzer NONE Fault Menu C 2 Operating and Programming Reference Clear Memory Clear Memory Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey causes the swept signal generator to return to the factory preset instrument state after writing alternating ones and zeroes over all state information frequency lists and save recall registers You can select the number of times to clear memory When you select Clear Memory the swept signal generator displays the following in the active entry area gt OF TIMES TO CLEAR MEMORY X Enter the number of times the state information should be overwritten While the swept signal generato
262. has been detected by the swept signal generator s Execution Control Block An error of this type sets the Execution Error Bit bit 4 in the Event Status Register One of the following events has occurred a A data element following a header was evaluated by the swept signal generator as outside of its legal input range or is inconsistent with the swept signal generator s capability a A valid program message can not be properly executed due to some instrument condition Execution Errors are reported by the swept signal generator after rounding and expression evaluation operations have taken place Errors that generate Execution Errors do not generate Command Errors Device specific Errors or Query Errors 240 Hardware error Rear panel HP IB switch 224 Illegal parameter value 222 Data out of range Expected 0 1 222 Data out of range 221 Settings conflict 221 Settings conflict List Arrays Invalid 221 Settings conflict Power And Level Mode 221 Settings conflict Power and attenuator 221 Settings conflict mm Module Mismatch 220 Parameter error Value not allowed 213 Init ignored 200 Execution error No more room in EEROM 200 Execution error Option Not Installed Error Messages From 199 to 100 These error messages indicate that a SCPI syntax error has been detected by the swept signal generator s parser An error of this type sets the Command Error Bit bit 5 in the Ev
263. he factory preset value is 500 Hz When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area SCPI PULse FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE atc MoD Pulse Menu Operating and Programming Reference P 21 Pulse Rise Time Auto Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MODULATION This softkey lets you set the pulse rise time to depend on the state of the swept signal generator pulse scalar function If pulse scalar is on rise time is set to slow Conversely if pulse scalar is off then the rise time is set to fast The factory default is pulse rise time set to auto An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this function is active SCPI PULM SLEW AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE Pulse Menu Pulse Rise Time Fast Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MODULATION This softkey lets you set the pulse rise time to lt 50 ns regardless of any other conditions An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this function is active SCPI PULM SLEW lt num gt time suffix MINimum Analyzer NONE Pulse Menu P 22 Operating and Programming Reference Pulse Width Pulse Rise Time Slow Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MODULATION This softkey lets you set the swept signal generator to apply a slow rise pulse filter to both internal
264. he mm source module 0 5V GHz Internal 0 5 V GHz to the mm source module 15V Power supply Range is 14 25 to 15 90 V 15V Power supply Range is 14 25 to 16 40 V 8V Power supply Range is 7 75 to 8 25 V 5V Power supply Range is 4 75 to 5 45 V DIG GND Digital ground MOD ANLG GND Source module analog ground ANLG GND RET Analog ground return C 10 Operating and Programming Reference RF Output Connector The swept signal generator is equipped with a precision 3 5 mm male connector 2 4 mm male connector on 40 GHz models The output impedance SWR and other electrical characteristics are listed in Specifications When making connections carefully align the center conductor elements then rotate the knurled barrel while the mating component remains still Tighten until firm contact is made Take care when working with either of these connectors If this connector is mechanically degraded in any way high frequency losses occur Refer to Application Note 326 Connector Care for more information Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This hardkey initiates continuous sweep retrace cycling of the swept signal generator The sweep is initiated by one of the trigger functions while the sweep speed is controlled by the sweep time function The green LED located above this key lights when the swept signal generator is performing an list step or analog sweep The LE
265. he source into REMOTE 60 Clear the display of the computer 70 Print a message to the computer s display 1 90 Getting Started Programming Local Lockout Demonstration Example Program 2 When the swept signal generator is in REMOTE mode all the front panel keys are disabled except the LOCAL key But when the LOCAL LOCKOUT command is set on the bus even the LOCAL key is disabled The LOCAL command executed from the controller is then the only way to return all or selected instruments to front panel control Continue example program 1 Delete line 90 END and type in the following commands 90 PRINT Verify that all keys are ignored except the LOCAL key 100 PRINT Verify that LOCAL causes the REMOTE LED to go OFF 110 PRINT press CONTINUE 120 PAUSE 130 REMOTE Source 140 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 150 PRINT 160 PRINT Source should now be in LOCAL LOCKOUT mode 170 PRINT Verify that all keys including LOCAL have no effect 180 PRINT press CONTINUE 190 PAUSE 200 LOCAL Source 210 PRINT 220 PRINT Source should now be in LOCAL mode 230 PRINT Verify that the swept signal generator s keyboard is functional 240 END To verify and investigate the different remote modes do the following 1 Reset the controller 2 On the swept signal generator Press PRESET 3 Clear the controller display and run the program 4 Verify that the REMOTE LED on the swept signal genera
266. he system enclosure 9 Lift the swept signal generator into position Align the inner and outer slide assemblies and slide the instrument into the rack Realign the hardware as needed for smooth operation MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR AGILENT SYSTEMS ENCLOSURES MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR NON AGILENT SYSTEMS ENCLOSURES Figure 3 4 Chassis Slide Kit slide cdr 3 12 Installation Rack Flange Kit for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Removed Option 908 CAUTION Option 908 swept signal generators are supplied with rack flanges and the necessary hardware to install them on the swept signal generator after removing the instrument handles The following table itemizes the parts in this kit Table 3 5 Rack Flange Kit for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Removed Contents Quantity Description 2 Rack Mount Flanges 8 Screws Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Installation 3 13 Installation Procedure 1 Refer to Figure 3 5 Remove handle trim strips 2 Remove the four screws on each side that attach the handles to
267. here are two waveform menus The waveform menu in the AM menu sets the waveform for amplitude modulation only The waveform menu in the FM menu sets the waveform for frequency modulation only Programming Codes SCPI NONE see the individual softkeys listed Analyzer NONE See Also MOD also see AM FM and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference W 1 Zero Freq Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you enable a security feature that displays zeroes for all accessible frequency information Once this security feature is activated it can be turned off by a front panel PRESET An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem SECurity STATe ON Analyzer NONE Security Menu Zoom Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey activates the CF Span sweep mode zoom In this mode span is controlled by the up down arrow keys Center frequency is controlled by the rotary knob or the numeric entry keys The left and right arrows control the resolution with which the center frequency can be changed This is a front panel only feature and is inaccessible over GPIB SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE CENTER SPAN Operating and Programming Reference Z 1 Error Messages 2a Introduction WARNING Front Panel Error Messages in Alphabeti
268. iation 1 Hz to lt 100 kHz 100 kHz V gt 200 kHz to lt 2 MHz 1 MHz V gt 2 MHz to 10 MHz 10 MHz V FM Coupling Whether provided from an external source or generated internally Option 002 the FM system can be either AC or DC coupled If you choose AC coupled FM you will be modulating a phase locked carrier This is the specified synthesized operation The modulation rate must be 100 kHz or greater If not the frequency changes caused by the modulation are inside the phase lock loop bandwidth and the output will not be linear FM For modulation frequencies below 100 kHz choose DC coupled FM In this mode the phase locked loop is de activated This means that the swept signal generator is operating as an open loop sweeper The swept signal generator will not be phase locked and therefore be aware that the phase noise and CW frequency accuracy specifications do not apply Operating and Programming Reference M 17 FM Modulation OVERMOD Message Maximum Deviation The maximum FM deviation is limited by the following two conditions e Maximum FM deviation must be less than 8 MHz and e Maximum FM deviation must be less than n x 5 x FM rate refer to the Frequency Bands specification for the value of n The following chart shows the limits of each band given these two conditions For example in band 1 at a 1 MHz FM rate the FM deviation must be less than 5 MHz n 1 x 5x FM Rate 1 MHz 5 MHz
269. ic pulse P 21 rise time fast pulse P 22 rise time pulse modulation and scalar analyzers M 22 rise time slow pulse P 22 root defined 1 68 root commands defined 1 68 rotary knob 1 5 R 2 rounding 1 84 routine maintenance 4 4 RPG R 2 RST S 15 SAV S 17 save instrument state command S 17 save key S 1 save lock S 1 save recall example program 1 97 save register recall R 1 save registers 1 16 save user preset S 2 scalar network analyzer pulse modulation rise time M 22 scalar network analyzer system connections 3 21 scalar pulse modulation P 20 SCPI conformance information S 2 SCPI error messages 2a 5 SCPI language P 14 search fail F 4 Index 21 Index 22 search leveling mode L 2 M 21 security functions S 57 selftest command S 17 selftest full S 58 selftest requires system interface off message 2a 4 semicolon examples using 1 69 problems with input statements 1 65 proper use of 1 69 sequence operation trigger state details of operation 1 114 in general programming model 1 110 serial number vil service information 4 1 service keys 2 1 service request enable register S 17 service tags gt 4 6 set attenuator S 59 setting GPIB addresses A 1 shipment 3 17 shipping damage 3 1 sine AM waveform L 3 FM waveform I 6 single 1 12 single frequency C 13 single sweep 1 12 59 slave step control S 65 slope power P 6 slow rise time pulse modulation M 22 soft
270. ical value in dB Hz and t is either DB or the ASCII LF terminator For example for a slope of 1 5 dB GHz use this procedure 1 1 5 dB GHz 1 5 dB 1 000 000 000 Hz 2 1 5 dB 1E9 Hz 1 5E 9 dB Hz 3 The programming code is 5L11 5E 9 DB POWER LEVEL Power Sweep Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference P 7 Power Sweep Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey enables the power sweep function RF output power can be swept both positively and negatively over a selected range The level of the power sweep starting point is the power level programmed Power sweep widths can be 45 dB wide in either direction However the settable power sweep range is dependent on the ALC level set An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer MODE SWEep FIXed POWer STARt lt num gt level suffix MAXimum MINimum POWer SPAN lt num gt level suffix MAXimum MINimum Analyzer PS1 function on PSO function off POWER LEVEL Power Slope Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation in Chapter 1 P 8 Operating and Programming Reference PRESET Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also INSTRUMENT STATE NONE This hardkey green causes the swept signal generator to perform a short version of self test and initializes the swept signal generator to
271. ignal generator to level at the output of the source module An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active M 24 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Module Select None SCPI SYSTem MMHead SELect FRONt REAR NONE SYSTem MMHead SELect Analyzer NONE Module Menu Module Select None Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER and FREQUENCY 2 and 5 This command disables millimeter source module sensing The swept signal generator will not alter its frequency limits and multiplier even if a source module is connected to either source module interface connector An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI SYSTem MMHead SELect FRONt REAR NONE SYSTem MMHead SELect Analyzer NONE Module Menu Operating and Programming Reference M 25 Module Select Rear Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER and FREQUENCY 2 and 5 This command causes the swept signal generator to examine only the rear panel source module interface connector to determine the type of source module if any connected The instrument frequency limits and multiplier are altered according to the source module connected However the leveling point is not changed See Leveling Point Module to set the swept signal generator to level at the output of the source module An asterisk next t
272. in any shape as packaging materials They do not adequately cushion the instrument or prevent it from shifting in the carton Styrene pellets cause equipment damage by generating static electricity and by lodging in the swept signal generator fan 2 Use the original packaging materials or a strong shipping container that is made of double walled corrugated cardboard with 159 kg 350 lb bursting strength The carton must be both large enough and strong enough to accommodate the swept signal generator and allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the swept signal generator for packing material 3 Surround the instrument with at least 3 to 4 inches of packing material or enough to prevent the instrument from moving in the carton If packing foam is not available the best alternative is SD 240 Air Cap from Sealed Air Corporation Hayward CA 94545 Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet covered with 1 1 4 inch air filled bubbles Use the pink Air Cap to reduce static electricity Wrap the instrument several times in the material to both protect the instrument and prevent it from moving in the carton 4 Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape 5 Mark the shipping container FRAGILE HANDLE WITH CARE to ensure careful handling 6 Retain copies of all shipping papers In any correspondence refer to the swept signal generator by model number and full serial number Converting HP Agilent 83
273. ing Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this softkey It leads to the delete choices for both the frequency list menu and the power flatness menu Delete All Deletes the complete array Delete Current Deletes the active line in the array Appears in the power flatness menu only It deletes the points that are undefined Delete Undef SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Delete All Function Group Menu Map FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 Operating and Programming Reference D 3 Delete All Description In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this softkey One occurs in the frequency list menu The other occurs in the power flatness menu In the both applications this softkey lets you delete all entries in the array with one keystroke Programming Codes SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE See Also Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Delete Current Function Group FREQUENCY POWER Menu Map 2 5 Description In the menu structure there are two occurrences of this softkey One occurs in the frequency list menu The other occurs in the power flatness menu In the list menu application the frequency entry and the associated offset and dwell values in the acti
274. ing Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e DIAGnostics INSTrument PMETer ADDRess lt num gt e DIAGnostics INSTrument PMETer ADDRess Sets and queries the GPIB address to use for the power meter during swept signal generator calibration routines Allowable values are 0 through 31 RST or power on does not effect this value Default is 13 It is defaulted only when memory is initialized e DIAGnostics INSTrument PRINter ADDRess lt num gt e DIAGnostics INSTrument PRINter ADDRess Sets the GPIB address of the printer to use during some of the calibration procedures when the swept signal generator assumes GPIB control RST and power on do not effect this command The default is 1 The default value is set at memory initialization only e DIAGnostics IORW lt num gt lt num gt Performs a write to the I O Device number specified in the first lt num gt and sets it to the value in the second lt num gt e DIAGnostics IORW lt num gt Reads from the specified I O device number and returns the response data DIAGnostics OUTPut FAULt Returns a string of 16 1s and 0s that are equivalent to the fault display Bit 0 PEAK Bit 1 TRACK Bit 2 RAMP Bit 3 SPAN Bit 4 V GHz Bit 5 ADC Bit 6 EEROM Bit 7 PWRON Bit 8 CALCO Bit 9 PLLZERO Bit 10 PLLWAIT Bit 11 FNXFER Bit 12 CAL YO Bit 13 CAL MAN Bit 14 TMR CNFLCT Bit 15 SEARCH Operating and Programming Reference S 31 SCPI COMMAND
275. ing Started Programming Saving and Recalling States Example Program 5 When a typical sweep like example program 3 is set up the complete front panel state may be saved for later use in non volatile memories called registers 1 through 8 This can be done remotely as a part of a program Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program 10 Source 719 20 ABORT 7 30 LOCAL 7 40 CLEAR Source 50 REMOTE Source 60 CLS 70 OUTPUT Source RST FREQ MODE SWE STAR 4GHZ STOP SGHZ INIT CONT ON 80 OUTPUT Source SAV 1 90 CLS 100 PRINT A sweeping state has been saved in REGISTER 1 110 OUTPUT Source RST FREQ CW 1 23456GHZ POW LEV 1DBM 120 OUTPUT Source SAV 2 130 PRINT A CW state has been saved in REGISTER 2 140 PRINT Press Continue 150 PAUSE 160 OUTPUT Source RCL 1 170 PRINT Register 1 recalled Verify source is sweeping 180 PRINT Press Continue 190 PAUSE 200 OUTPUT Source RCL 2 210 PRINT Register 2 recalled 220 PRINT Verify source is in CW mode 230 END Run the program Program Comments 10 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable 20 to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 Clear the computer s display 70 Set up the source for a sweeping state Note the combination of several commands into a single message This single line is equivalent to the following lines OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ MODE SWEep OUTPUT Sou
276. ion of phase locking and the settling of the RF source use the OK code to determine the last lock frequency Bit 4 SRQ on end of sweep or mid sweep update in NA network analyzer code mode Bit 5 SRQ caused by GPIB syntax error Bit 6 SERVICE REQUEST by IEEE 488 convention the instrument needs service from the controller when this bit is set true Bit 7 SRQ caused by a change in the coupled parameters start frequency center frequency and sweep time Use the OC code to determine the new values of the coupled parameters Status Byte 2 Extended Status Byte Bit 0 Self test failed at power on or at Instrument Preset This bit remains latched until this status byte has been read or until cleared by the CS or CLEAR 719 commands Bit 1 Excessive amplitude modulation input Bit 2 Oven for the reference crystal oscillator is not at operating temperature Bit 3 External reference frequency is selected Bit 4 RF is unlocked UNLOCK appears in the message line Use OF to determine the source of the unlocked output This bit remains latched until this status byte has been read or until cleared by the CS or CLEAR 719 commands Bit 5 ac line power interruption has occurred since the last Instrument Preset This bit also remains latched until read or cleared Bit 6 RF is unleveled use OR to determine present power level This bit also remains latched until read or cleared Bit 7 FAULT message is displayed Use O
277. ion systems High band gt 2 0 GHz employs a tracking YIG filter that essentially eliminates video feedthrough except in Option 006 because the pulse modulator is after the YIG filter Attempts to measure high band video feedthrough can turn out to be measurements of ground currents in coaxial cables Low band lt 2 0 GHz employs a low level mixer followed by a high gain amplifier At high power levels gt 10 dBm the bias levels in the amplifier shift slightly as the RF is turned on or off The slew of the bias from one level to another couples to the output and produces the video feedthrough waveform At low ALC levels 10 dBm another mechanism dominates Mixer imbalance produces DC at the output of the mixer and its magnitude varies with RF amplitude and modulator state This shifting DC level couples through the amplifier as video feedthrough spikes In percentage terms this mechanism gets worse at low levels N RF ENVELOPE WITH L VIDEO FEEDTHROUGH RLL S SIS S KOO QLL RF ENVELOPE J a VIDEO FEEDTHROUGH D Figure M 6 Video Feedthrough Slow Rise Time Pulse Modulation for Scalar Network Analyzers For use with HP Agilent scalar analyzers the swept signal generator offers a scalar pulse modulation mode that provides approximately 2 us rise and fall times An internal oscillator provides the 27 778 kHz square wave with no external connections necessary The slow waveform reduces the spe
278. ircuit The integrator output drives the RF output power level via the linear modulator When the sum of the detected and reference signals is 0 volts the output of the integrator is held at a constant level and the RF output is leveled Trace 4 is the delayed signal from the pulse input which controls the switch in the integrate and hold circuit Trace 4 is timed to coincide with trace 3 Since the integrate and hold switch is closed only when trace 3 is high the integrator responds to correct the power level only when the RF power is on Operating and Programming Reference M 19 Pulse Modulation BROADBAND MICROWAVE OSCILLATOR TRACE 2 DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 4 ar MICROWAVE OUTPUT i LINEAR PULSE MODULATOR MODULATOR H _ PULSE INPUT LOG TRACE 1 TRACE 4 TRACE 3 HOLD it LOOP INTEGRATE INTEGRATOR DETECTOR RANGE LIMIT COMPARATOR LEVEL DAC VOLTAGE LOG DELAY AM INPUT Figure M 4 ALC Block Diagram B PULSE WAVEFORMS PULSE INPUT EEE TT POO THIS PEDESTAL REPRESENTS THE RF AMPLITUDE Figure M 5 Pulse Modulation System M 20 Operating and Programming Reference Pulse Modulation Leveling Narrow Pulses For narrow pulses of less than 1 ys width either use search leveling mode or use unleveled operation If you do not you will see the output level continue to rise as the swept signal generator tries to correct for the o
279. is a numeric value Power slope is now active notice that an asterisk is next to the key label Use the entry keys rotary knob or arrow keys to enter a value for the linear slope Press Power Slope again to turn this feature off SWEPT SIGNAL GENERATOR POWER METER RF OUTPUT ADAPTER POWER SENSOR Figure 1 10 Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation Power Slope Press POWER MENU Select Power Enter a value Press termina 1 Press POWER MENU 2 Select Power Slope 3 Enter a value 4 Press terminator key Sweep tor key Getting Started Basic 1 19 Getting Started Advanced Advanced This section of Chapter 1 describes the use of many of the unique features of the 8360 B Series swept signal generators The format used is similar to the one used on the previous pages When referred to a menu map number go to the Menu Map tab and unfold the menu map so that you can view it together with the text Some menus have more than one page of softkeys Select the more m n softkey to view the next page of softkeys more m n is not included in the keystrokes given in these procedures Table 1 1 Keys Under Discussion in This Section Paragraph Heading Keys Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator Leveling Point ExtDet Coupling Factor POWER LEVEL Set Atten Leveling Point PwrMtr Pwr Mtr Range
280. isk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Programming Codes SCPI FREQuency OFFSet lt num gt MAXimum MINimum FREQuency OFFSet STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer SHFB lt n gt Hz Kz Mz Gz See Also FREQUENCY Menu Freq Mult Operating and Programming Reference F 19 FullUsr Cal Function Group USER CAL Menu Map 9 Description This softkey initiates a full swept signal generator user calibration The calibration performed is instrument state dependent For example if the swept signal generator is in ramp sweep mode a sweep span calibration and an auto track is done If the swept signal generator has amplitude modulation active on a CW signal then RF peaking and an AM bandwidth calibration is performed Programming Codes SCPI See the individual types of calibration Analyzer NONE See Also AM BW Cal Always AM BW Cal Once Auto Track Peak RF Always Peak RF Once Swp Span Cal Always Swp Span Cal Once F 20 Operating and Programming Reference Global Dwell Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey is used to set a dwell time value for all points in the frequency list array SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE Enter List Dwell List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Global Offset Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey is used
281. isplay a Lee Entry Area CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep Center Frequency and Span Operation Power Level and Sweep Time Operation Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation Marker Operation Saving and Recalling an Instrument State Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation ALC Circuit Externally Leveled Typical Diode Detector Response at 25 C Leveling with a Power Meter MM wave Source Module Leveling MM wave Source Module Leveling Using a Microwave Amplifier Reverse Power Effects Coupled Operation with 8 dBm Output Reverse Power Effects Uncoupled Operation with 8 dBm Output Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically Creating a User Flatness Array Creating Arbitrarily Spaced Frequency Correction Pairs in a Swept mm wave Environment Scalar System Configuration Automatically Characterizing and Compensating for a Detector Decision Tree for ALC Bandwidth Selection SCPI Command Types A Simplified Command Tree Proper Use of the Colon and Semicolon Simplified SWEep Command Tree Voltage Controlled Oscillator Test Simplified Program Message Syntax Simplified Subsystem Command Syntax Simplified Common Command Syntax Simplified Response Message Syntax Generalized Status Register Model Typical Status Register Bit Changes Generalized Trigger Model Inside the Idle State vii 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 7 1 9 1 11 1 13 1 15 1 17 1 19 1 23 1 25 1 27 1 28 1 31 1 34 1 37
282. ist use the delete menu Delete A11 softkey Editing ALC Offset and Dwell Time Once a frequency point has been entered you can assign an ALC offset and a dwell time value Use either the Enter List Power or Global Offset softkey to enter offset values Use either the Enter List Dwell or Global Dwell softkey to enter dwell time values The editing softkeys of this menu are not accessible over GPIB Frequency lists to be loaded over GPIB must first be created in the controlling program and then downloaded in their entirety to the swept signal generator SCPI LIST FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum LIST POWer CORRection lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum LIST DWEL I lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum In the above three commands the entries contained in can be repeated between 1 to 801 times LIST DWELIL POINts MAXimum MINimum LIST FREQuency POINts MAXimum MINimum Operating and Programming Reference L 7 List Menu See Also LIST POWer CORRection POINts MAXimum MINimum In the above three commands the swept signal generator responds with the number of points for the named parameter that are in the list array If a particular list is shorter than another an error is generated upon execution An exception is made for the case where the shorter list is of length 1 In this case the list of length 1 is treated as though it were a list of equal length with all values the same At
283. key does not disable any other key functions An asterisk next to the key label indicates this function is active Programming Codes SCPI DISPlay STATe ON OFF 0 1 Analyzer SHS11 disables the display SHS10 re enables the display See Also Security Menu Operating and Programming Reference B 1 CENTER Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY NONE This hardkey lets you select the center frequency for center frequency frequency span swept operation When you press CENTER the swept signal generator displays gt CENTER XXXXX MHz where XXXXX represents a frequency value Use the entry area to set the desired value Certain center frequency and frequency span combinations cause the swept signal generator to limit the value entered In general any combination that would cause the swept signal generator to exceed its minimum or maximum specified frequency will be limited SCPI FREQuency CENTer lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE SWEep Analyzer CF CEM TART TOP Center Frequency Span Operation in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference C 1 Center Marker Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also MARKER This softkey sets the center frequency of the sweep to the frequency of the most recently activated marker Select any marker Mi M5 then select Center Marker to c
284. key label area 1 4 software revision 5 60 SOURce in general programming model 1 112 trigger command defined 1 119 source match pulse modulation M 21 source module interface L 4 source module interface connector C 9 M 23 M 24 M 25 source module interface mnemonics C 10 source module leveling L 4 source module selection M 22 M 23 M 24 M 25 space proper use of 1 69 span fail F 2 span frequency 5 60 span key S 60 span operation 1 8 S parameter test set interface connector C 6 specifications 2 1 spectral purity enhancement of 1 49 spectrum analyzers 1 32 square AM waveform L 3 FM waveform I 7 square wave pulses scalar P 20 SRE S 17 SRQ analyzer language A 19 standard event status enable register S 14 standard event status register clear S 14 standard event status register query value S 14 standard frequency chosen automatically T 1 standard frequency external T 1 standard frequency internal T 2 standard frequency none T 2 standard notation 1 64 standard operation status register clear S 14 start frequency S 61 flatness correction A 25 frequency list A 25 start m1 stop m2 S 62 start stop frequency 1 6 start sweep trigger S 62 start sweep trigger bus S 63 start sweep trigger external S 63 status display D 6 status byte clear S 14 status byte query S 17 status bytes analyzer compatible A 19 status bytes compatible 3 24 status of phase locked loops display U 1 sta
285. l Points Size Swp Pt Trig Auto Swp Pt Trig Bus Swp Pt Trig Ext SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Couples the dwell time for stepped sweep points to ramp sweep sweep time Causes the swept signal generator to act as the master control in a dual swept signal generator measurement setup Causes the swept signal generator to act as the slave in a dual swept signal generator measurement setup Sets the dwell time for points in stepped sweep Sets the number of points in a stepped sweep Sets the increment value for the points in a stepped sweep Automatically steps the swept signal generator to the next point in a stepped sweep Steps the swept signal generator to the next point in a stepped sweep when an GPIB trigger is received Steps the swept signal generator to the next point in a stepped sweep when an external hardware trigger is received START STOP Sweep Mode Step SWEEP TIME Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference S 69 Step Swp Pt Trig Auto Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY When this softkey is selected the swept signal generator automatically steps to the next point in the stepped frequency sweep until all points are swept The time between points is equal to the sum of the dwell and phase lock times An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SWEep TRIGge
286. l 10 ns typical t10 ns typical 5 ns typical 11 Tn the 83623B 24B specification applies at ALC levels 0 dBm and above and over the 20 to 55 C temperature range Specification degrades 5 dB below 20 C and 1 dB per dB below ALC level 0 dBm in those models 12 Option 002 adds 30 ns delay and 5 ns pulse compression for external pulse inputs AM and Scan Internal Pulse Generator Width Range 1 us to 65 ms Period Range 2 us to 65 ms Resolution 1 us Bandwidth 3 dB 30 depth modulation peaks 3 dB below maximum rated power DC to 100 kHz typically DC to 300 kHz Modulation Depth ALC levels noted can be offset using step attenuator Normal Mode 20 dBm to 1 dB below maximum available power Deep Mode 15 50 dB below maximum available power Unleveled Mode 15 50 dB below maximum available power Sensitivity Linear 100 volt Accuracy 1 kHz rate 30 depth normal mode 5 Exponential 10 dB volt Accuracy Normal Mode 0 25 dB 5 of depth in dB Incidental Phase Modulation 30 depth 0 2 radians peak typical Incidental FM Incidental phase modulation x modulation rate Typical AM Distortion ALC level OdBm Carriers lt 20GHz 5 Normal hit 4 F Deep Mode 37 x Sot 100kHz Rate I E i IkHz Rate T ATT O f f f f f 0 20 40 60 80 100 AM Depth 13 Deep mode offers reduced distortion for very deep AM Waveform is DC coupled an
287. l Generators Idle State Sweep Initiated Waiting for the Trigger Signal to be True Sweep Started Sweep State Perform a Sweep Frequency Power Stepped List or Analog Figure 1 42 8360 Simplified Trigger Model The process of sweeping involves all 3 of these states The IDLE state is where the sweep begins The IDLE state is left when the sweep is initiated This can happen on a continuous basis INIT CONT ON or on a demand basis INIT CONT OFF The functions of continuous and single sweeps are handled by this command When the INIT CONT ON command is given the sweep is continuously re initiated When in the OFF state the sweep is initiated with the INIT IMMediate command Once initiated the wait for trigger state is entered Here the trigger signal selected by the TRIG SOURce command is examined until a TRUE condition is detected These trigger signals are IMMediate This signal is always TRUE EX Ternal This is the external trigger input jack A positive transition on this jack constitutes a TRUE signal BUS This signal is the GPIB lt get gt Group Execute Trigger message or a TRG command When a TRUE signal is found the sweep is actually started The act of producing the sweep in some cases involves the use of trigger signals For example the stepped and list sweeps have modes that allow triggering for point to point advancement through the sweep These trigger signals are selected by individual
288. l halt on this ENTER statement until the sweep is finished 210 Repeat the INIT IMM sequence N times 220 End of the IF statement to skip sweeps if N is negative 230 Exit the program if the value of N is 0 1 100 Getting Started Programming Using the WAI Command Example Program 7 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 The following example illustrates the use of the WAI command to cause the swept signal generator to perform a synchronous sweep Source 719 ABORT 7 LOCAL 7 CLEAR Source REMOTE Source CLS OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ STAR 4GHZ STOP 5GHZ MODE SWE OUTPUT Source SWE TIME 2 OUTPUT Source 0PC ENTER Source X FOR I 1 TO 4 OUTPUT Source INIT OUTPUT Source WAI OUTPUT Source POW STAT ON OUTPUT Source INIT OUTPUT Source WAI OUTPUT Source POW STAT OFF NEXT I PRINT Finished sending commands to source PRINT Note that execution is continuing for four cycles END Run the program Program Comments 10 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable 20 to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 Clear the computer s display 70 Set the source to its initial state for programming 80 Set the source up for a sweep from 4 GHz to 5 GHz 90 Set the sweep time to 2 seconds In SCPI suffixes are optional if you program in fundamental units for sweep time that would be seconds
289. le sensing Operating and Programming Reference M 23 Module Select AUTO Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER and FREQUENCY 2 and 5 This command sets the automatic selection of the millimeter source module interface connector The swept signal generator looks at both front and rear connectors and determines the type of source module if any connected If a source module is present at both connectors the swept signal generator selects the front connector as the active one After selecting the interface the instrument frequency limits and multiplier are altered accordingly However the leveling point is not changed See Leveling Point Module to set the swept signal generator to level at the output of the source module An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active This feature is the default after preset SCPI SYSTem MM Head SELect AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SYSTem MMHead SELect AUTO Analyzer NONE Module Menu Module Select Front Function Group Menu Map Description POWER and FREQUENCY 2 and 5 This command causes the swept signal generator to examine only the front panel source module interface connector to determine the type of source module if any connected The instrument frequency limits and multiplier are altered according to the source module connected However the leveling point is not changed See Leveling Point Module to set the swept s
290. lent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HEWLETT PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Safety Notes WARNING CAUTION The following safety notes are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with
291. llowed in the AUTO mode causes this switch to change to AUTO ON even if it was previously in the AUTO OFF mode RST state is ON e SWEep TIME LLIMit lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e SWEep TIME LLIMit MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the lower sweep time limit This value specifies the fastest sweep time that you wants the swept signal generator to allow either on input or when calculated internally when in AUTO ON mode This value must be greater than 10 ms RST value is 10 ms e SWEep TRIGger SOURce IMMediate BUS EXTernal e SWEep TRIGger SOURce Sets and queries the stepped sweep point to point trigger source This only applies when SWEep GEN is set to STEPped e SYSTem ALTernate lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e SYSTem ALTernate MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the save recall register number to alternate the foreground state of the instrument The RST value is 1 e SYSTem ALTernate STATe ON OFF 1 0 e SYSTem ALTernate STATe Sets and queries the state of the Alternate State function RST setting is OFF e SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess lt n gt Changes the GPIB s General Purpose Interface Bus address The RST value is 19 S 52 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e SYSTem DUMP PRINter Causes a dump of the display contents to be made to the GPIB e SYSTem ERRor Returns the next message in the error queue The format of the response is lt error number gt lt
292. lope Rf Slope Off Off On On Power Sweep Pwr Swp Off Off On On Sweep Mode SwpMode Ramp Swept Step Step List List CW CW Span 0 Zero Span Peak RF Always AutoCal On Peaking or Peak AM BW Cal Always AutoCal On AM BW or AmBw or Am SwpSpan Cal Always AutoCal On SweptFreq or Freq or Frq Programming Codes SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also STATUS MESSAGES Doubler Amp Mode AUTO Function Group POWER Menu Map 5 Description This softkey is applicable to instrument models with a doubler installed The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is controlled by the instrument firmware The use of the amplifier depends on the frequency of operation and on the calibration constants set at the factory The instrument defaults after preset to this automatic mode of operation which is the specified operation This softkey has no effect on instruments without a doubler An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active This feature is the default after preset D 8 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Doubler Amp Mode Off SCPI POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO ON OFF 0 1 POWer AMPLifier STATE AUTO Analyzer NONE Dbir Amp Menu Doubler Amp Mode Off Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey is applicable to instrument models with a doubler installed The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operati
293. ly the same as on the HP Agilent 8340 41 0S 2B Output Status bytes is used to read the two 8 bit status bytes from the swept signal generator The first status byte concerns the cause of an SRQ Service Request while the second status byte concerns failures and faults as follows STATUS BYTE 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Value Function SRQ on new REQUEST SRQ on SRQ on SRQ on SRQ on SRQ on SRQ on frequencies SERVICE GPIB or End of RF Settled Changed in Numeric Any Front or sweep RQS syntax error Sweep Extended Entry Panel Key time in Status Completed Pressed effect Byte GPIB or Front Panel EXTENDED STATUS BYTE 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal 128 64 32 6 8 4 2 1 Value Function Fault RF Unleveled Power RF Unlocked External Oven Over Self Test Indicator Failure Frequency Cold Modulation Failed On Reference Selected A 20 Operating and Programming Reference Status Byte 1 Bit 0 SRQ caused by a key closure on the front panel of the swept signal generator use the OM code to determine the front panel status Bit 1 SRQ caused by the completion of a numeric entry use the OA code to determine the value of the numerical entry Bit 2 SRQ caused by a change in the extended status byte status byte 2 affected by the RE coded mask see the RE code for an explanation of this masking See Also ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER Bit 3 SRQ caused by the complet
294. m 2 to 801 Step Size and Step Points are dependent variables If you know how many steps are desired in a given sweep use the softkey Step Points to set the desired value The step size will be calculated automatically SCPI SWEep FREQuency POINts lt num gt MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE Step Size Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 step 5ize Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you specify the step size in a stepped frequency sweep The range of increment size is dependent on frequency span and the number of step points desired as given by the formula STEP SIZE SPAN STEP POINTS Step Size and Step Points are dependent variables as shown by the formula If a particular step size is desired use the Step Size softkey to set the desired increment The number of step points is then calculated automatically SCPI SWEep FREQuency STEP lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE Step Points Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 S 68 Operating and Programming Reference Step Swp Menu Step Swp Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey reveals the stepped frequency sweep entry menu Dwell Coupled Step Step Step Step Step Step Step Step Control Master Control Slave Dwel
295. m MINimum UP DOWN Analyzer PL atc CONNECTORS Det Cal Menu FLTNESS ON OFF Set Atten Tracking Menu Uncoupl Atten Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 POWER menu Function Group Menu Map Description POWER This hardkey accesses the power function softkeys Fltness Menu Accesses the softkeys in the flatness correction menu Power Offset Changes the displayed power to include an offset but does not change the output power of the swept signal generator Power Slope Activates the linear power per frequency mode of power output and makes RF slope dB GHz the active function Power Sweep Activates power sweep mode and makes power sweep dB swp the active function Set Atten Activates uncoupled attenuator as the mode of operation and makes the attenuator value the active function Tracking Menu Accesses the softkeys in the tracking calibration menu Uncoupl Atten Uncouples the attenuator from the ALC system Up Dn Power Allows you to enter values for the power level step size All RF power functions except for power level flatness on off and RF on off are contained in the power menu Operating and Programming Reference P 5 POWER Programming Codes See Also SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed previously under this menu key ALC FLTNESS ON OFF POWER LEVEL and RF_ON OFF Introducing the 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generators in Chapter 1 G
296. m Triangle Internal Menu Internal Pulse Generator Period Internal Pulse Generator Rate Internal Pulse Generator Width Internal Pulse Mode Auto Internal Pulse Mode Gate Internal Pulse Mode Trigger Invert Input Leveling ModeALCoff Leveling ModeNormal Leveling ModeSearch Leveling PointExtDet Leveling PointIntrnl Leveling PointModule Leveling PointPwrMtr LINE SWITCH List Menu List Mode Pt TrigAuto List Mode Pt TrigBus List Mode Pt Trigkxt Ta H 1 H 1 I 1 I 2 I 2 1 3 1 3 I 4 I 4 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 7 1 7 I 8 I 8 1 9 I 10 I 10 I 11 I 11 I 12 I 12 L 1 L 2 L 2 L 3 L 3 L 4 L 5 L 5 L 6 L 8 L 9 L 9 L 10 Contents 7 Contents 8 Mi M2 Sweep Manual Sweep MARKER Marker M1 Marker M2 Marker M3 Marker M4 Marker M5 Markers All Off Measure Corr All Measure Corr Current Measure Corr Undef Meter Adrs Meter On Off AM Meter On Off FM Mop ModOut On Off AM ModOut On Off FM Modulation o Amplitude Modulation FM Modulation Pulse Modulation Module Menu Module Select AUTO Module Select Front Module Select None Module Select Rear Monitor Menu more n m Mtr Meas Menu Peak RF Always Peak RF Once POWER LEVEL POWER MENU Power Offset Power Slope Power Sweep PRESET Preset Mode Factory Preset Mode User M 1 M 1 M 3 M 4 M 5 M 5 M 6 M 6 M 7 M 7 M 8 M 8 M 9 M 9 M 10 M 10 M 11 M 12 M 13 M 14 M 17 M
297. may be trying to modulate beyond the swept signal generator s maximum output power capability OVRMOD Message The maximum AM depth is limited to approximately 90 by the detector s ability to sense low power levels If you try to amplitude modulate too deep without using deep AM mode explained later you will see an message displayed on the message line Also if you modulate below 20 dBm ALC level without using deep AM mode or below 50 dBm with deep AM or search ALC mode you will see an amp message Dynamic Range The ALC and attenuator combination when an optional attenuator is present are automatically set by the swept signal generator to keep the ALC in its most accurate range 0 to 10 dBm This is called the coupled attenuator operating mode For applications where modulating across an attenuation switch point is undesirable you can uncouple the attenuator and manually set the power level of the ALC and the attenuator For example setting the power level to 0 dBm in coupled mode will give an ALC level of 0 dBm and 0 dB of attenuation In uncoupled mode the attenuator can be set to 10 dB and the ALC to 10 dBm M 14 Operating and Programming Reference Amplitude Modulation giving 0 dBm output power and greater AM depth potential The ALC can now be varied over its entire range and the attenuator remains at a fixed level Uncoupled mode can also be used for the following m To increas
298. ment or output sequence in process is aborted as quickly as possible ABORt does not alter the settings programmed by other commands unlike RST ABORt is a root level event command and cannot be queried IMMediate The IMMediate command provides a one time override of the normal downward path in an event detection state The instrument must be in the specified event detection state when IMMediate is received or an error is generated and the command has no effect For example the instrument must be in the TRIG state for TRIGger IMMediate to work properly If the instrument is in the idle state the command has no effect and an error would be generated IMMediate is an event command and cannot be queried ODELay The ODELay command specifies the time between the source settling and the time the trigger out signal is sent Specifying TRIGger O0DELay lt num gt time suffix instructs the swept signal generator to set the specified time as the delay necessary to ensure proper settling Sending RST sets ODELay to an instrument dependent value usually zero 1 118 Getting Started Programming SOURce The SOURce command selects the trigger source for an event detection state Only one source can be specified at a time and all others are ignored Sending RST sets SOURce to IMMediate The most commonly used sources are a BUS The event detector is satisfied by either Group Execute Trigger lt GET gt or a TRG command lt GET gt
299. mit the error signal generated sends the integrator to rail resulting in gross AM distortion This is where deep AM mode should be used Deep AM engages a comparator circuit see Figure M 1 to sense the power level of the detected signal When the signal level is out of the detector s range the loop integrator switch opens opening the ALC loop The output of the integrator is frozen applying a constant drive to the modulator Since the modulator s most linear range is at low power levels the AM envelope distortion is minimal When the comparator senses a signal that is within the detector s range the integrator switch is closed re engaging ALC loop leveling Figure M 2 shows the leveled AM characteristics in the different modes The maximum leveled output with ALC engaged is shown as the swept signal generator s maximum leveled output specification Individual swept signal generators may have more power watch Operating and Programming Reference M 15 Amplitude Modulation for an gt message The minimum level is limited by the detector s range approximately 20 dBm With deep AM engaged the minimum level where the ALC loop is opened is set to 13 dBm This guarantees that the detector can still sense the signal level with no distortion With the ALC loop open the minimum level is limited by the modulator s range to approximately 50 dBm F Out Maximum Specified Power AM In M On
300. mming Reference ALC firmware In coupled operation when desired power output is set via POWER LEVEL the ALC level and attenuator are set automatically to provide the most accuracy for the power requested Uncoupled Operation In some applications it is advantageous to control the ALC level and attenuator separately using combinations of settings that are not available in coupled operation In uncoupled mode Uncoupl Atten when the desired power output is set via POWER LEVEL only the ALC level is changed The attenuator setting is changed via Set Atten One use of uncoupled operation is power sweep where the output power linearly tracks the sweep voltage ramp The swept signal generator can generate power sweeps of up to 40 dB depending on frequency The power at the start of the sweep is set via POWER LEVEL coupled operation or by a combination of POWER LEVEL and Set Atten uncoupled operation The sweep range is entered by selecting Power Sweep If the sweep range entered exceeds the ALC range stop power greater than maximum available power the UNLVLED warning message appears at the end of sweep No warning is given at the time of entry If the start power is entered when the swept signal generator is in coupled operation the ALC level is set no lower than 10 dBm limiting the available power sweep range Using uncoupled operation and setting the ALC level to 20 dBm gives an additional 10 dB of sweep range
301. mon commands Getting Started Programming 1 81 parameter mnemonic NOTE SP white space ASCII characters 01 to 9 and Wi to 32 1 10 Figure 1 31 Simplified Common Command Syntax As with subsystem commands use a lt space gt to separate a command mnemonic from subsequent parameters Separate adjacent parameters with a comma Parameter types are explained later in this subsection Response Message Figure 1 32 shows a simplified view of response message syntax Syntax Figure 1 32 Simplified Response Message Syntax Response messages can contain both commas and semicolons as separators When a single query command returns multiple values a comma separates each data item When multiple queries are sent in the same message the groups of data items corresponding to each query are separated by a semicolon For example the fictitious query QUERY1 QUERY2 might return a response message of lt datal gt lt data1 gt lt data2 gt lt data2 gt Response data types are explained later in this subsection Note that lt new line gt lt END gt is always sent as a response message terminator 1 82 Getting Started Programming SCPI Data Types These paragraphs explain the data types available for parameters and response data They list the types available and present examples for each type SCPI defines different data formats for use in program messages and response messages It does this to accommodate
302. mum Analyzer NONE MoD also see AM and Modulation Internal FM Rate Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the FM rate for internally generated FM Use the numeric entry keys arrow keys or rotary knob to change the value of the rate The swept signal generator accepts values from 1 Hz to 1 MHz however it is specified to 1 MHz only for a sine waveform Refer to the specifications The factory preset rate is 1 MHz note that the swept signal generator also presets to a sine waveform SCPI FM INTernal FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimu Analyzer NONE MoD also see FM and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference l 5 Internal FM Waveform Noise Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the FM waveform to noise white noise FM rate gaussian distribution centered around FM deviation for internally generated FM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The factory preset default is sine wave SCPI FM INTernal FUNCtion NOISe Analyzer NONE MOD also see FM and Modulation Internal FM Waveform Ramp Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the FM waveform to
303. n FLATness 801 freq extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix correction pairs DB 2 801 FREQuency CENTer center freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN CW CW freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN AUTO coupled to Boolean ON OFF 1 0 center freq MODE free mode discrete CW SWEep LIST STARt start freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN STEP AUTO auto freq step Boolean ON OFF 1 0 INCRement freq step extended numeric 20 to 0 01 dB or MAXimum MINimum STOP stop freq extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN MARKer n n is 1 to 5 1 is the default FREQuency marker frequency extended numeric specified freq range or MAXimum MINimum 1 88 Getting Started Programming Table 1 4 Sample Swept Signal Generator Commands continued time Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values PO Wer ATTenuation atten setting extended numeric 0 to 90 DB or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN AUTO coupled atten Boolean ON OFF 1 0 LEVel output level extended numeric specified power range or MA Ximum MINimum UP DOWN STATe RF on off Boolean ON OFF 1 0 SWEep GENeration type of sweep discrete STEPped ANA Log TIME sweep time extended numeric 200s to 133 ms or MA Ximum MINimum AUTO auto sweep Boolean ON OFF 1 0 time switch LLIMit fastest sweep extended numeric lt num gt time suffix
304. n maximum available power 5 On the analyzer set up the appropriate measurement i e gain for an amplifier Calibrate the measurement thru and short open calibration Press SAVE G to store the analyzer s configuration and swept signal generator parameters in storage register 1 6 Turn off the HP Agilent 8757 System Interface Use the analyzer SYSINTF ON OFF softkey found under the SYSTEM menu to deactivate the system interface Access User Flatness Correction Menu 7 On the swept signal generator press POWER Menu Select Fitness Menu 8 Select Delete Menu Delete All This step insures that the flatness array is empty 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Press PRIOR Leave the delete menu and return to the previous softkey menu Select Auto Fill Start 2 GHz Set the first frequency in correction table to 2 GHz Auto Fill Stop 2 0 GHz Set the last frequency in correction table to 20 GHz Auto Fill Incr 0 Mhz Set the frequency increment to every 100 MHz from 2 to 20 GHz Setup Power Meter Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor Connect the power sensor to test port Enter and store in the power meter the power sensor s cal factors for correction frequencies to be used Enter Correction Data into Array Select Mtr Meas Menu Measure Corr All The power meter is now under swept signal generator control and is performing the sequence o
305. n REFerence The RST values are the same as the FREQ CENTcommand RST value e MARKer n MODE FREQuency DELTa o MARKer n MODE Sets and queries the mode of the specified marker Setting one marker to delta turns all other marker modes to frequency If n is not specified the default is one RST value is FREQuency e MARKer n REFerence lt n gt e MARKer n REFerence Sets and queries which marker is the reference marker for use in the delta mode While n may be used there is really only a single reference for all the markers MARKer1 REFerence 5 and MARKer2 REFerence 5 both set marker 5 as the reference e MARKer n STATe ON OFF 1 0 e MARKer n STATe The state of the specified marker is set and queried marker number one if n is not specified The RST value for all markers is OFF e MEASure AM A query only command that causes the modulating AM signal to be S 40 Operating and Programming Reference Power Subsystem SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY measured and the absolute value of the peak percent deviation to be returned e MEASure FM A query only command that causes the modulating FM signal level to be measured and the corresponding peak frequency deviation returned e MODulation QUTPut SOURce AMIFM e MODulation 0OUTPut SOURce Sets and queries the source of the rear panel output modulation BNC e MODulation OUTPut STATe ON OFF 1 0 e MODulation 0UTPut STATe Sets and queries the st
306. n with the frequency list auto fill feature If the stop frequency entered is less than the stop frequency you will see this error Correct by entering a stop frequency greater than the start frequency Error in Test Patch entry This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically one of three entries has been attempted a An invalid test patch number a An invalid test patch data point aw An invalid parameter of the test patch specification Correct by entering a valid parameter Freq step must be gt 0 This error occurs in association with the user power flatness menu auto fill increment feature If the increment value entered is less than zero you will see this error Correct by entering an increment value greater than zero FUNCTION LOCKED OUT This error will only occur if the service adjustment menu is accessed Specifically the calibration constant that inhibits access to certain functions has been set If you need access to the function contact a qualified service technician GPIB SYNTAX ERROR This indicates that an analyzer language syntax error has been encountered Review the program to find the syntax error ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician INPUT BUFFER EMPTY This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for i
307. n ANALog Analyzer NONE CONNECTORS CONT Manual Sweep SINGLE Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 sweep Mode Step Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SWEEP This softkey activates the stepped frequency step mode In this mode the swept signal generator steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency by the designated frequency step size Manual continuous and single sweeps can be performed in this mode An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI FREQuency MODE SWEep SWEep FREQuency GENeration STEPped Analyzer NONE CONT Manual Sweep SINGLE Step Swp Menu Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 S 74 Operating and Programming Reference Sup Span CalOnce Swp Span Cal Always Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This softkey causes a sweep span calibration each time the frequency span is changed An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI CALibration SPAN AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE Freq Cal Menu Using Frequency Calibration Swp Span Cal Once Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This softkey activates sweep span calibration immediately and performs it only once An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI CALibration SPA
308. nada Agilent Technologies Strasse 1217 Meyrin 2 Geneva Zone D Activite De Courtaboeuf 61352 Bad Homburg v d H Switzerland F 91947 Les Ulis Cedex Germany 41 22 780 8111 France 49 6172 16 0 33 1 69 82 60 60 Great Britain Agilent Technologies Ltd Eskdale Road Winnersh Triangle Wokingham Berkshire RG41 5DZ England 44 118 9696622 INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Australia Canada Agilent Technologies Agilent Technologies Australia Ltd Agilent Technologies Canada Ltd 3495 Deer Creek Road 31 41 Joseph Street 17500 South Service Road Palo Alto California USA Blackburn Victoria 3130 Trans Canada Highway 94304 1316 61 3 895 2895 Kirkland Quebec H9J 2X8 650 857 5027 Canada 514 697 4232 China Japan Singapore China Agilent Technologies Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Agilent Technologies Singapore Pte Ltd 38 Bei San Huan X1 Road 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji 150 Beach Road Shuang Yu Shu Tokyo 192 Japan 29 00 Gateway West Hai Dian District 81 426 60 2111 Singapore 0718 Beijing China 65 291 9088 86 1 256 6888 Taiwan Agilent Technologies Taiwan 8th Floor H P Building 337 Fu Hsing North Road Taipei Taiwan 886 2 712 0404 Contents Getting Started What Is In This Chapter How To Use This Chapter Equipment Used In Examples Introducing the Agilent 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generators Display Area Entry Area CW Operation and Start Stop Frequency Sweep CW
309. ncy A 26 trigger external L 9 trigger functions P 14 trigger interface bus L 8 trigger point automatic L 8 frequency list copy C 11 frequency list functions L 5 frequency list number of points L 6 frequency markers 1 14 frequency menu F 16 frequency modulation AC F 12 coupling F 10 F 11 DC F 13 deviation 4 display deviation M 9 internal 4 rate L5 softkeys F 12 frequency multiplier F 17 frequency offset F 18 frequency softkeys F 16 frequency span S 60 frequency standard chosen automatically T 1 external T 1 internal T 2 none chosen T 2 frequency standard functions R 1 frequency start S 61 frequency start stop markers 1 2 S 62 frequency step stepped sweep activate S 74 frequency stepped mode dwell time S 67 frequency stepped mode number of points 67 frequency stepped sweep step size S 68 frequency stop S 71 frequency sweep 1 6 manually M 1 markerl to marker2 M 1 frequency sweep functions 72 frequency sweep once S 59 frequency sweep stop frequency S 71 frequency sweep sweep time S 75 frequency value dwell time E 3 flatness E 2 front panel checks 4 2 front panel connectors C 4 front panel error messages 2a 1 front panel operation L 9 full selftest S 58 full selftest command S 17 fullusr cal F 19 function locked out message 2a 3 fuse part numbers 44 fuse replace 4 4 fuse selection 3 3 global dwell list array G 1 global o
310. nd m represents the total number of pages in the menu SCPI Not Applicable Analyzer Not Applicable PRIOR Operating and Programming Reference M 27 Mtr Meas Menu Function Group POWER Menu Map 5 Description This softkey accesses the meter measure softkeys Meas Corr All Measures flatness correction values for all frequency points in the flatness correction array Meas Corr Current Measures a flatness correction value for the frequency point currently in the active line of the flatness correction array Meas Corr Undef Measures flatness correction values for all frequency points in the flatness correction array that have no correction values assigned The meter measure function uses an external HP Agilent 437B power meter to automatically measure and store power correction values for the frequency points requested Programming Codes SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE See Also _ Flatness Menu Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 M 28 Operating and Programming Reference Peak RF Always Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER USER CAL 5 9 This softkey appears in two locations the POWER Tracking Menu and the USER CAL Tracking Menu The operation is the same in both locations This softkey causes the swept signal generator when in CW or manual sweep output mode to align the output filter SYTM so that i
311. nerator For example 1 Set the start frequency to 4 GHz 2 Set the stop frequency to 10 GHz 3 Set the frequency multiplier to 5 Note that the display indicates start 20 GHz stop 50 GHz and asterisks appear next to the frequency data 4 Now set the stop frequency to 30 GHz The swept signal generator frequency is 6 GHz or 30 GHz 5 Frequency multiplier and offset are related as shown by the following equation Entered value or Displayed Frequency Frequency Generated x Multiplier Offset value The factory preset value is 1 An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Programming Codes SCPI FREQuency MULTiplier lt num gt MAXimum Minimum FREQuency MULTiplier STATe ON OFF 1 0 lt num gt will be rounded to the nearest integer Analyzer SHFA lt n gt See Also FREQUENCY menu Freq Offset F 18 Operating and Programming Reference Freq Offset Freq Offset Function Group FREQUENCY Menu Map 2 Description This softkey lets you set a frequency offset value and applies it to all frequency parameters The frequency offset ranges between and including 110 0 GHz Changing the frequency offset value changes the display but does not affect the output frequency Frequency multiplier and offset are related as shown by the following equation Entered value or Displayed Frequency Frequency Generated x Multiplier Offset value The factory preset value is 0 Hz An aster
312. nerator measurement systems two tone systems refer to Step Control Master for more information Operating and Programming Reference CONNECTORS Table C 1 Pin Description of the Auxiliary Interface Pin Function In Out Signal Level 1 No Connection 2 Z Axis Blanking Markers Out Blank 5 V Marker 5 3 Spare 4 Spare I O TTL 5 Low Stop Sweep I O TTL 6 5 2V Out TTL 7 No Connection 8 Divider Sync Out TTL 9 External Trigger In TTL 10 Spare Out TTL 11 Spare Out TTL 12 Low Retrace I O TTL 13 No Connection 14 Low Marker Out TTL 15 Low Qualified Stop Sweep Out TTL 16 Spare Out TTL 17 Spare Out TTL 18 Sweep Output Out 0 to 10 V ramp 19 Ground 20 Low Blank Request In TTL 21 Spare 22 No Connection 23 Spare 24 Low Source Settled Out TTL 25 No Connection AUXILIARY INTERFACE 5 1 25 14 RS 232 CABL Figure C 1 Auxiliary Interface Connector Operating and Programming Reference C 7 CONNECTORS GPIB connector allows the swept signal generator to be connected to any other instrument or device on the interface bus All GPIB instruments can be connected with GPIB cables and adapters These cables are shown in the accompanying illustration The adapters are principally extension devices for instruments that have recessed or crowded GPIB connectors GPIB SH1 O AH1 T6 TEO LU LEO SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 CO1
313. ng the front panel green key There is no corresponding query e SYSTem PRESet SAVE Saves the present state so it can be used whenever the command SYSTem PRESet EXECute is executed or the front panel green key is pressed e SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory USER e SYSTem PRESet TYPE Operating and Programming Reference S 53 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Sets and queries the type of preset to execute when the SYSTem PRESet EXECute command is given Factory preset defaults all values to factory specified values User defined preset defaults all values to a specified state of the swept signal generator that you have saved with SYSTem PRESet SAVE e SYSTem SECurity COUNt lt num gt MINimum MAXimum e SYSTem SECurity COUNt MINimum MAXimum Sets and queries the number of times to clear memory when the value of SYSTem SECurity STATe changes from ON to OFF RST value is 1 e SYSTem SECurityLl STATe ON OFF 1 0 e SYSTem SECurityL STATe Controls the security mode of the swept signal generator When in secure mode any display annunciators that have been disabled cannot be re enabled without destroying certain stored information This value is not affected by RST When you change the value from ON to OFF everything except calibration data is initialized or destroyed In particular data in instrument state and all save recall registers are destroyed e SYSTem VERSion This query returns a formatted numeric value
314. nge is from 1 to 8 An execution error occurs if you try to save state 0 e SRE lt num gt SRE Sets and queries the value of the Service Request Enable Register e STB Queries the Status Byte This is a non destructive read e TRG This command performs the same function as the Group Execute Trigger command defined by IEEE 488 1 e TST A full selftest is performed without data logging or looping and returns one of the following error codes Error Code Definition Test passed Test failed Test not run yet This is an unlikely event Test aborted Can not execute the test Can not execute the test test skipped 1 Unrecognized result software defect Oo BP WNMr oo Operating and Programming Reference S 17 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e WAI This causes the swept signal generator to wait for the pending commands to be completed before executing any other commands For example sending the command TSW WAI allows for synchronous sweep operation It causes the swept signal generator to start a sweep and wait until the sweep is completed before executing the next command Table S 1 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Command Parameters Parameter Type Allowed Values ABORt AM DEPth AM depth numeric 0 to 40 dB INTernal FREQuency AM frequency extended numeric lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum Minimum FUNCtion waveform discrete SINusoid SQUare TRlangle RAMP NOISe
315. nly lets you set a value for the internal pulse generator s pulse period The pulse is adjustable from 300 ns to 400 ms with 25 ns resolution The factory preset default is 2 ms pulse period When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area Since period and rate are inversely related if both are given values only the last one will be applied which will cause the first one to be recalculated Use the one that is convenient for your application For example if you set the pulse period do not change the pulse rate the swept signal generator automatically adjusts the rate to match the period SCPI PULS INTernal PERiod lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE MoD also see Pulse and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference l 9 Internal Pulse Generator Rate Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set a value for the internal pulse generator s pulse rate The range of acceptable values is from 2 5 Hz to 3 33 MHz These values are obtained by taking the inverse of the period The factory preset default is 500 Hz When this feature is active its current value is displayed in the active entry area Since rate and period are inversely related if both are given values only the last one will be applied which will cause the first one to be recalculated Use the one that is
316. nstructions on contacting a qualified service technician INPUT BUFFER FULL This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician INVALID LANGUAGE ON REAR PANEL SWITCH The GPIB Language switch located on the rear panel has been set to an invalid programming language selection Check the rear panel switch See Chapter 3 for information on language selection Invalid Save Recall Register There are two cases when this error message is possible a If a save function is attempted to either register 0 or 9 m If a recall function is attempted on register 9 Correct by selecting a valid save recall register LINT1 INTERRUPT This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Error Messages 2a 3 2a 4 Error Messages LINT2 INTERRUPT This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician LINT6 INTERRUPT This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Number of pts must be gt 2 This error occurs in association with the user power flatness auto fill number of points feature If the number of points requested is less than two you will see this error message Correct by entering number of p
317. ntry area digits then frequency value is changed by the up down size using either the up down arrow keys or the rotary knob SCPI FREQuency STEP INCR lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer SF or SHCF lt num gt Hz Kz Mz Gz Up Dn Size CW Operating and Programming Reference U 3 USER CAL Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This hardkey accesses the user calibration softkeys FullUsr Cal Performs a complete alignment as determined by the instrument settings Tracking Menu Accesses the softkeys of the tracking menu AM Cal Menu Accesses the AM calibration menu Freq Cal Menu Accesses the Frequency span calibration menu Ext Det Cal Uses an external power meter to calibrate an external detector s output voltage relative to power NONE Softkeys listed above Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 U 4 Operating and Programming Reference USER DEFINED USER DEFINED Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER DEFINED NONE This hardkey reveals the customized menu created by selecting softkeys and assigning them to this menu The user defined menu is empty until you assign keys to it Three sections 12 key assignment locations of menu are available for key assignment Any softkey can be assigned to any of the 12 positions A softkey assigned to the user defined menu perform
318. nu Sweep Menu System Menu User Cal Menu AC Power Cables Available Rear Panel GPIB Switch Removing the Side Straps and Feet Chassis Slide Kit Rack Mount Flanges for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Removed Rack Mount Flanges for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Attached Replacing the Line Fuse Removing the Fan Filter 1 111 1 113 1 114 1 115 1 116 1 117 A 5 A 8 C 7 C 8 C 10 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 8 M 13 M 16 M 18 M 20 M 20 M 22 P 12 5 65 2b 3 2b 5 2b 7 2b 9 2b 11 2b 13 2b 15 2b 17 2b 19 3 5 3 7 3 11 3 12 3 16 4 4 4 5 Tables 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 C 1 D 1 S 1 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 4 1 Keys Under Discussion in This Section SWEep Command Table SCPI Data Types Sample Swept Signal Generator Commands Pin Description of the Auxiliary Interface Mnemonics used to Indicate Status 8360 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY Adapter Descriptions and Part Numbers Shipped with Each Swept Signal Generator Model Language GPIB Addresses Factory Set GPIB Addresses Rack Mount Slide Kit Contents Rack Flange Kit for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Removed Contents Rack Flange Kit for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Attached Contents Instrument Preset Conditions for the HP Agitent 8360 8340 8341 Numeric Suffixes Programming Language Comparison Fuse Part Numbers 1 21 1 71 1 83 1 88 C 7 D
319. nu password is entered incorrectly or the wrong password has been used Qualified service technicians refer to ADJUSTMENTS in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for more information SCPI Error Messages in Numerical Order Swept Signal Generator Specific SCPI Error Messages 0 No Error This message indicates that the device has no errors and is currently ready to perform the operations for which it is designed 1 FUNCTION DISABLED The particular function invoked has been disabled by a calibration constant If you need access to the function contact a qualified service technician 2 Wrong password This error occurs when the service adjustment menu password is entered incorrectly or the wrong password has been used Qualified service technicians refer to ADJUSTMENTS in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for more information 4 Unable to store data in EEROM 5 Not allowed to change address Error Messages 2a 5 Universal SCPI Error Messages 2a 6 Error Messages 6 Switch on Processor Board is Set This error occurs when a service adjustment menu password can not be set because the override switch on the processor is set Qualified service technicians refer to ADJUSTMENTS in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L S
320. number of points A 24 frequency list A 24 E 4 L 6 number of step points S 67 numeric entry keys E 5 numeric parameters discussed in detail 1 83 explained briefly 1 73 ODELay trigger command defined 1 118 offset list array all points G 1 offset frequency F 18 offset power P 6 on off switch L 5 OPC S 14 OPC S 14 in example program 1 79 OPC lopc 1 111 OPClopc 1 111 OPC pending flag clear S 14 open leveling loop L 1 theory of A 8 operating environment 3 8 operating temperature 3 9 operation complete command S 14 operation complete query S 14 Operation Pending Flag 1 111 operator checks 4 1 operator maintenance 4 4 OPT S 14 optimize tracking A 27 option 806 rack mount slides 3 10 option 908 rack flange kit 3 13 option 913 rack flange kit 3 15 optional parameters 1 72 option not installed message 2a 4 options available 3 2 options identify command S 14 output connector C 11 output statement 1 60 output status bytes A 19 OVEN message 3 8 OVERMOD message during frequency modulation M 17 OVRMOD message during amplitude modulation M 14 parameters Boolean 1 75 1 85 discrete 1 75 1 85 extended numeric 1 74 1 84 numeric 1 73 1 83 optional 1 72 types explained briefly 1 73 parser explained briefly 1 68 part number fuses 4 4 part number manual vii peak fail F 2 Index 17 Index 18 peaking 1 49 peak RF always P 1 peak RF once P 1 periodic
321. o oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you display the frequency deviation produced by the externally generated frequency modulation SCPI MEASure FM Analyzer NONE MOD also see FM and Modulation 105 Function Group Menu Map Description MENU SELECT This hardkey allows access to the modulation functions The following types of modulation are available AM Amplitude modulation is accepted from an external source at the AM connector The AM can be scaled either linearly or exponentially Swept signal generators with Option 002 also have the capability of internally synthesizing amplitude modulation in sine square triangle ramp or noise waveforms Deep AM a distortion reduction mode can be selected for use when operating at a deep amplitude modulation level FM Frequency modulation is accepted from an external source at the FM connector The FM can be either AC or DC coupled Swept signal generators with Option 002 also have the capability of internally synthesizing frequency modulation in sine square triangle ramp or noise waveforms M 10 Operating and Programming Reference See Also ModOut On Off AM Pulse Pulse modulation is accepted from an external source at the PULSE connector In addition pulse modulation can also be internally generated The pulse is adjustable in standard swept signal generators with 1 0 us resolution Swept signal generators can also produce a 27 778
322. o hours For additional information on warmup times see Chapter 2c Specifications Operating Environment CAUTION Temperature The swept signal generator may be operated in environments with temperatures from 0 to 55 C Humidity The swept signal generator may be operated in environments with humidity from 5 to 80 relative at 25 to 40 C However protect the swept signal generator from temperature extremes which can cause condensation within the instrument Altitude The swept signal generator may be operated at pressure altitudes up to 4572 meters approximately 15 000 feet Cooling The swept signal generator obtains all cooling airflow by forced ventilation from the fan mounted on the rear panel Information on cleaning the fan filter is located in Routine Maintenance in Chapter 4 Ensure that all airflow passages at the rear and sides of the swept signal generator are clear before installing the instrument in its operating environment This is especially important in a rack mount configuration Installation 3 9 Chassis Kits Rack Mount Slide Kit 3 10 Option 806 CAUTION Installation Option 806 swept signal generators are supplied with rack mount slides and the necessary hardware to install them on the swept signal generator The following table itemizes the parts in this kit Table 3 4 Rack Mount Slide Kit Contents Quantity Description Rack Mount Kit Includes the
323. o the active correction frequency in the user flatness correction table The front panel arrow keys are used to move around the correction table and enter frequency correction pairs Simultaneously the swept signal generator test frequency is updated to the selected correction frequency without exiting the correction table To further simplify the data entry process the swept signal generator allows you to enter correction data into the user flatness correction table by adjusting the front panel knob until the desired power level is displayed on the power meter The user flatness correction algorithm automatically calculates the appropriate correction and enters it into the table If you already have a table of correction data prepared it can be entered directly into the correction table using the front panel keypad of the swept signal generator With the list mode feature you may enter the test frequencies into a table in any order and specify an offset power and or a dwell time for each frequency When list mode is enabled the swept signal generator steps through the list of frequencies in the order entered The user flatness correction feature has the capability of copying and entering the frequency list into the correction table Since the offset in the list mode table is not active during the user flatness correction data entry process the value of the correction data is determined as if no offset is entered When user flatness corre
324. o the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI SYSTem MMHead SELect FRONt REAR NONE SYSTem M MHead SELect Analyzer NONE Module Menu Monitor Menu Function Group Menu Map Description oD This softkey Option 002 only accesses the menu which allows you to output internally generated AM and FM waveforms to the rear panel AM FM OUTPUT connector It also accesses the softkeys which allow you to display the AM depth and FM deviation of the modulation waveforms ModOQut On Off AM Outputs the AM waveform to the AM FM OUTPUT connector Outputs the FM waveform to the AM FM OUTPUT connector Displays the AM depth of the modulating signal ModOut On Off FM Meter On Off AM M 26 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also more n m Meter On Off FM Displays the FM deviation of the modulating signal SCPI NONE see the individual softkeys listed Analyzer NONE MoD also see Modulation more n m Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALL FUNCTION GROUPS ALL MENU MAPS The more n m softkey allows you to page through the menus Look at one of the menu maps Notice the line keypath drawn from more n m By selecting this softkey the next page of the menu is revealed If you are viewing the last page of the menu selecting more n m returns the first page of the menu In this softkey n represents the page you are on a
325. ode See LIST MODE and INIT CONT for more details RST state is IMMediate e MARKer n AMPLitude STATe ON OFF 1 0 o MARKer n AMPLitude STATe Sets and queries the amplitude marker on off switch While n may be used there is really only a single switch for all the markers RST value is OFF e MARKer n AMPLitude VALue lt num gt DB MAXimum MINimum e MARKer n AMPLitude VALue MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the value of the amplitude marker While n may Operating and Programming Reference S 39 SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY be used there is really only a single value for all the markers RST value is 2 dB o MARKer n AOFF Sets all the markers to OFF at once While n may be used there is really only a single switch for all the markers e MARKer n DELTa lt num gt lt num gt This query returns the difference in frequency between the two specified marker numbers o MARKer n FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum o MARKer n FREQuency MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the specified marker frequency marker number one is the default if n is not specified The value is interpreted differently based on the value of the marker mode MARKer n MODE How the frequency of the marker is determined FREQuency Absolute frequency is used The limits are confined to the present START and STOP frequency limits DELTa The value is specified with respect to the reference marker MARKer
326. off The swept signal generator can also produce a 27 778 kHz square wave for use in Agilent scalar network analyzers Swept signal generators with Option 002 internally generate a synthesized pulse The swept signal generator provides internal pulse modulation with pulse widths adjustable with 1 ys resolution adjustable with 25 ns resolution with Option 002 Leveling Pulse leveling performance depends on the accuracy of the diode detector which measures the RF amplitude The ALC block diagram Figure M 4 shows the pulse modulation input signal to the swept signal generator which controls a pulse modulator The pulse input is represented by trace 1 in Figure M 5 The pulse modulator is either full on or full off The amplitude when the pulsed RF is on is controlled by the linear modulator used for CW leveling and AM Trace 2 is the resultant RF pulse which is the RF output This pulse is detected by the diode detector It trails the pulse input because of propagation delays in the pulse modulator and its drive circuits The output of the detector is amplified by a logarithmic amplifier log amp Trace 3 is the output of the log amp Note that this signal is delayed from the RF output signal and that the rise time is slower This is a result of the bandwidth of the detector and the log amp The amplitude of trace 3 is summed with the reference signal from the level DAC and the difference error signal drives an integrate and hold c
327. oints greater than or equal to two OPTION NOT INSTALLED This error occurs when the GPIB language switch is set to a configuration requiring a certain firmware hardware combination to be present in the swept signal generator See Chapter 3 for information on language selection and see Specifications for information on option available PRIV VIOLATION EXCEPTION This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician RECALL REGISTERS LOST This message can appear in association with the security menu feature memory clear Also a weak dead or disconnected internal battery can cause this message Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician Selftest REQUIRES system interface OFF This error message indicates that the swept signal generator is connected to a network analyzer and can not run selftest Correct by disconnecting the system interface cable from the swept signal generator SPURIOUS INTERRUPT This can only be caused by an internal processor error Refer to Chapter 4 for instructions on contacting a qualified service technician SYSTEM CONTROLLER ON BUS This error message is generated when an external controller is active on the GPIB and the swept signal generator has attempted to act as the controller Disconnect the GPIB interface or return the swept signal generator to LOCAL operation and repeat the r
328. on is controlled by the instrument firmware This softkey turns off the automatic mode of operation and turns off the amplifier so that it is never used This is an unspecified mode of operation since the output power may not be at the maximum leveled output power specification at frequencies generated in the doubled mode This softkey has no effect on instruments without a doubler An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer AMPLifier STATE ON OFF 0 1 POWer AMPLifier STATE Analyzer NONE Dbir Amp Menu Operating and Programming Reference D 9 Doubler Amp Mode On Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey is applicable to instrument models with a doubler installed The doubler has an integral amplifier whose operation is controlled by the instrument firmware This softkey turns off the automatic mode of operation and turns on the amplifier so that it is always used This is an unspecified mode of operation since it can cause increased harmonics and degraded dynamic range at some frequencies This softkey has no effect on instruments without a doubler An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI POWer AMPLifier STATE ON OFF 0 1 POWer AMPLifier STATE Analyzer NONE Dblr Amp Menu Dwell Coupled Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY Thi
329. or MA Ximum MINimum Getting Started Programming 1 89 GPIB Check Example This first program is to verify that the GPIB connections and Program 1 interface are functional Connect a controller to the swept signal generator via a GPIB cable Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program 10 Source 719 20 ABORT 7 30 LOCAL Source 40 CLEAR Source 50 REMOTE Source 60 CLS 70 PRINT The source should now be in REMOTE 80 PRINT Verify that the REMOTE LED is on 90 END Run the program and verify that the REMOTE LED is lit on the swept signal generator If it is not verify that the swept signal generator address is set to 19 and that the interface cable is properly connected If the controller display indicates an error message it is possible that the program was entered in incorrectly If the controller accepts the REMOTE statement but the swept signal generator REMOTE LED does not turn on perform the operational checks as outlined in the respective Operating and Service Manuals to find the defective device Program Comments 10 Set up a variable to contain the GPIB address of the source 20 Abort any bus activity and return the GPIB interfaces to their reset states 30 Place the source into LOCAL to cancel any Local Lockouts that may have been set up 40 Reset the source s parser and clear any pending output from the source Prepare the source to receive new commands 50 Place t
330. ork NY 10017 USA BASIC 5 0 5 1 Interfacing Techniques Vol 2 Specific Interfaces 1987 This HP BASIC manual contains a good non technical description of the GPIB IEEE 488 1 interface in chapter 12 The GPIB Interface Subsequent revisions of HP BASIC may use a slightly different title for this manual or chapter This manual is the best reference on instrument I O for HP BASIC programmers Agilent Technologies Tutorial Description of the General Purpose Interface Bus 1987 This book provides a thorough overview of GPIB basics for the GPIB system designer programmer Or user To obtain a copy of either of these documents contact the Agilent Technologies representative listed in your telephone directory 1 120 Getting Started Programming Operating and Programming Reference How To Use This Chapter Programming Language Comparison The operating and programming functions of the synthesizer are listed in alphabetical order Each entry has a complete description complete programming codes and a cross reference to the main function group and respective menu map Cross references to operating and programming examples located in Chapter 1 Getting Started are also given Error messages instrument specifications and menu maps are located in their own tabbed sections Menu maps can be folded out and viewed at the same time as the alphabetical entry See the illustration below
331. ormation you must set the preset mode to User SCPI SYSTem PRESet SAVE Analyzer NONE Preset Mode User Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 2 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI Conformance Information SCPI Conformance Information The Agilent 8360 B Series swept signal generators conform to the 1990 0 version of SCPI The following are the SCPI confirmed commands implemented by the 8360 B Series swept signal generators m ABORt a AM DEPth DEPth IN Ternal FREQuency FREQuency SOURce SOURce STATe STATe m CORRection STATe a DISPlay STATe STATe a FM COUPling COUPling IN Ternal FREQuency FREQuency SENSitivity SENSitivity SOURce SOURce STATe STATe m FREQuency CENTer CENTer CW AUTO AUTO FIXed CW FIXed AUTO AUTO FIXed MANual MANual MODE MODE SPAN Operating and Programming Reference S 3 SCPI Conformance Information SPAN SSTARt SSTARt STOP STOP a LIST DWELI POINts DWELI FREQuency POINts FREQuency a MARKer n AOFF FREQuency FREQuency REFerence REFerence STATe STATe a POWer ALC BAN Dwidth BWIDth AUTO AUTO BAN Dwidth BWIDth ATTenuation AUTO AUTO ATTenuation LEVel LEVel MODE MODE RANGe SPAN SPAN SSTARt SSTARt STOP STOP a PULM EX Ternal POLarity
332. ormation is used to create a correction array that can be added to the internal calibration array The correction entered is at the associated frequency Frequencies in between frequency correction pair values are determined by linear interpolation If a value of START or STOP frequency is specified that is outside the limits of the specified frequencies the correction applied at those points is 0 dB After RST returns a MinFreq 0 DB MaxFreq O DB response e CORRection SOURce i ARRay FLATness e CORRection SOURceLil Sets and queries the source of correction e CORRection FLATness POINts MAXimum MINimum Returns the number of frequency correction pairs entered using the CORR FLAT command After RST the value is 2 e CORRection STATe ONIJOFF 1 0 e CORRection STATe Sets and queries the switch on the users ALC correction system The RST value is OFF e DIAGnostics ABUS lt num gt Reads the analog bus node number and returns the number of millivolts e DIAGnostics ABUS AVERage lt num gt e DIAGnostics ABUS AVERage Sets and queries the number of ADC averages to use during the read ADC query After RST the value is 1 e DIAGnostics ABUS STATus Queries the status of the prior ADC reading The response is a single byte that is bit encoded to mean Bit 0 Set to 1 if ADC timed out hardware fault Bit 1 Set to 1 if reading was unsettled Bit 2 Set to 1 if out of range occurred S 30 Operating and Programm
333. ormation of the current instrument state When data entry is expected the swept signal generator uses all or part of this area to record the entries The active entry arrow gt indicates the active entry function and its current value Message Line This line is used to display ALC level status Unlock information Timebase status RF output status Softkey Label Area This area displays the name of the softkey directly below it Softkeys These keys activate the functions indicated by the labels directly above them Entry Area All function values are changed via the rotary knob and or keys of the entry area ENTRY ENTRY ON ON OFF LED ARROW KEYS ENTRY ROTARY KNOB ON OFF TERMINATOR KEYS NUMERIC NEGATIVE SIGN ENTRY KEYS BACKSPACE Figure 1 3 Entry Area The following are active only when the swept signal generator expects an input ENTRY ON OFF This key lets you turn off or on the active entry area Turning off the entry area after a value is entered prevents accidental changes ENTRY ON LED This LED lights when the entry area is active Arrow Keys The up down arrow keys let you increase or decrease a numeric value The left right arrow keys choose a significant digit indicated by an underline Rotary Knob The rotary knob increases or decreases a numeric value The rotary knob can be used in combination with the left right arrow keys to change the increment size Termin
334. ostics m and other hardware specific functions exist and prevent executing an unmodified HP Agilent 8340 8341 program successfully For example the 8360 B Series does not recognize or accept the HP Agilent 8340 8341 learn string Test and Measurement System Language SCPI is a GPIB programming language developed by Agilent Technologies specifically for controlling electronic test and measurement instruments It is designed to conform to the IEEE 488 2 standard which provides codes formats protocols and common commands for use with IEEE 488 1 1987 that were unavailable in the previous standard SCPI provides commands that are common from one Agilent product to another for like functions thereby eliminating device specific commands Refer to Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 for information on SCPI Control Interface Intermediate Language CIIL is the instrument control programming language used in Option 700 8360 B Series Like the HP Agilent 8340 8341 E69 the Option 700 8360 B Series is M A T E compatible Refer to the 8360 Option 700 Manual Supplement for information on this option Table 3 9 illustrates the programming command in network analyzer language and its equivalent SCPI programming command In the table numbers enclosed by greater less than symbols lt gt are parameters Braces are used to enclose one or more options that may be used zero or more times A vertical bar can be read as or
335. ource is connected to the FM modulation connector The FM sensitivity function is active It is factory preset to 10 MHz V Use the numeric entry keys arrow keys or rotary knob to change the sensitivity to 100 kHz V or 1 MHz V When external FM is in effect the RF output is frequency modulated with a rate and depth set by the external source The FM coupling is controlled by the following softkeys FM Coupling 100kHz FM Coupling DC The FM coupling defaults to 100 kHz This is AC coupling for FM rates of 100 kHz or greater For modulation rates below 100 kHz choose DC coupled FM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that external FM is active and FH is displayed on the message line For swept signal generators without Option 002 see FM On Off AC and FM On Off DC SCPI FM SOURce EX Ternal FM SENSitivity lt num gt freq suffix V MAXimum MINimum FM STATe ON OFF Analyzer FM1 function on FMO function off MOD also see FM and Modulation F 14 Operating and Programming Reference FM On Off Int FM On Off Int Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 only activates the internal frequency modulation mode No external source is needed When internal FM is in effect the parameters are controlled by the following softkeys Internal FM Rate Internal FM Deviation FM Coupling 100kHz FM Coupling DG Waveform Menu The swept signal generato
336. ovided attach the rack mount flanges to the outside of the handles 4 Remove the bottom and back feet and the tilt stands before rack mounting the instrument 7 Figure 3 6 Rack Mount Flanges for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Attached 3 16 Installation Storage and Shipment Environment The swept signal generator may be stored or shipped within the following limits Temperature 40 to 75 C Humidity 5 to 95 relative at 0 to 40 C Altitude Up to 15240 meters Pressure approximately 50 000 feet The swept signal generator should be protected from sudden temperature fluctuations that can cause condensation Installation 3 17 3 18 Package the Swept Signal Generator for Shipment CAUTION Installation Use the following steps to package the swept signal generator for shipment to Agilent Technologies for service 1 Fill in a service tag available at the end of Chapter 4 and attach it to the instrument Please be as specific as possible about the nature of the problem Send a copy of any or all of the following information m Any error messages that appeared on the swept signal generator display m A completed Performance Test record from the service guide for your instrument m Any other specific data on the performance of the swept signal generator Swept signal generator damage can result from using packaging materials other than those specified Never use styrene pellets
337. p 3 MARKER Press PRESET Press START O Press FOP O ar Press MARKER Select Marker M1 and enter 4 GHz The swept signal generator is sweeping from 3 to 7 GHz with a 100 ms sweep speed A frequency marker is set at 4 GHz which causes an intensified dot to appear on the CRT To obtain an amplitude spike at that frequency select Ampl Markers Notice that you can set the amplitude of the spike with the rotary knob or entry keys To return to the intensified dot representation select Ampl Markers asterisk off Amplitude markers increase the output power at the marker frequency Provide protection to devices that could be damaged For a second marker select Marker M2 and enter 5 G Ghz This process can be continued for all five markers Note that the marker displayed in the active entry area is active and can be controlled by the rotary knob arrow keys and numeric entry keys Once the M1 and M2 markers are established the marker sweep function softkey Mi M2 Sweep temporarily changes the original start stop frequencies to those of markers M1 and M2 Select M1 M2 Sweep Notice that the swept signal generator now is sweeping from 4 to 5 5 GHz Use this function to focus in on a selected portion of the frequency sweep Select Mi M2 Sweep again This turns the function off and returns the swept signal generator to its original sweep parameters To change the start stop frequencies for the
338. p at the maximum specified frequency Power level set at 0 dBm Sweep time set to auto CONT sweep Sweep mode ramp ALC leveling point internal ALC leveling mode normal Markers set to activate at the center frequency of the sweep All function values stored in memory registers 1 through 9 remain in their previous states The checksum of the calibration data is calculated and if an error is detected the calibration data in protected memory is used If the checksum of the protected data is not correct then default values are used an error message EEROM FAILED LOST CAL is displayed Programming Codes SCPI SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory Analyzer IP which is the same as PRESET See Also PRESET Preset Mode User Changing the Preset Parameters in Chapter 1 P 10 Operating and Programming Reference Printer Adrs Preset Mode User Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey sets the standard starting configuration of the swept signal generator when the PRESET key is pressed as set by the user You can define any starting conditions Set up the swept signal generator with the conditions you want then select Preset Mode User Now whenever you press PRESET the swept signal generator returns to the configuration you set If preset mode user is set when you press PRESET the swept signal generator displays the following USER DEFINED PRESET RECALLE
339. p time Faster sweep speeds than this are possible turn the rotary knob counter clockwise until the display no longer changes Notice that AUTO is no longer displayed FREQUENCY tee Co Ce ee e p INSTRUMENT STATE power cdr SWEEP TIME SWEEP LED POWER LEVEL Figure 1 6 Power Level and Sweep Time Operation Power Level Sweep Time Operation Operation 1 Press POWER LEVEL 1 Press SWEEP TIME 2 Enter value 2 Enter value 3 Press dB m 3 Press terminator key Getting Started Basic 1 11 Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation 1 12 Getting Started Basic Continuous sweep is the operation mode set when the swept signal generator is preset It simply means that when the swept signal generator is performing a swept operation the sweeps will continuously sweep retrace sweep retrace until a different sweep mode is selected To choose this sweep mode press CONT To change from continuous sweep to single sweep operation press SINGLE This causes the swept signal generator to abort the sweep in progress and switch to the single sweep mode This initial keystroke causes the swept signal generator to switch sweep modes but it does not initiate a single sweep A second keystroke press SINGLE initiates a single sweep When the swept signal generator is in single sweep operation the amber LED above the key lights When the swept signal generator is actu
340. perating temperature with the instrument connected to AC power Instruments disconnected from AC power for more than 24 hours require 30 days to achieve time base aging specification Instruments disconnected from AC power for less than 24 hours require 24 hours to achieve time base aging specification 48 to 66 Hz 115 volts 10 25 or 230 volts 10 15 400 VA maximum 30 VA in standby Net Weight 27 kg 60 Ib Shipping Weight 36 kg 80 Ib Dimensions 178 H x 425 W x 648 mm D 7 0 x 16 75 x 25 5 inches 83620B 83622B 83623B 83624B 83630B Type N female 3 5 mm female Part number 1250 1745 3 5 mm female 3 5 mm female Part number 5061 5311 83640B 83650B 2 4 mm female 2 92 female Part number 1250 2187 2 4 mm female 2 4 mm female Part number 1250 2188 Inputs amp Outputs Auxiliary Output Provides an unmodulated reference signal from 2 to 26 5 GHz at a typical minimum power level of 10 dBm Nominal output impedance 50 ohms SMA female rear panel RF Output Nominal output impedance 50 ohms Precision 3 5 mm male on 20 and 26 5 GHz models 2 4 mm male on 40 and 50 GHz models front panel External ALC Input Used for negative external detector or power meter leveling Nominal input impedance 120 kQ damage level 15 volts See RF output specifications BNC female front panel Pulse Input Output TTL low level signal turns RF off When using the standard internal p
341. pically available at any pulse rate or width FM is completely independent of AM and pulse modulation Internal Modulation Generator Option 002 AM FM Internal Waveforms sine square triangle ramp noise Rate Range Sine 1 Hz to 1 MHz Square triangle ramp 1 Hz to 100 kHz Resolution 1 Hz Depth deviation Range same as base instrument Resolution 0 1 Accuracy same as base instrument Pulse Modes free run gated triggered delayed Period range 300 ns to 400 ms Width Range 25 ns to 400 ms Resolution 25 ns Accuracy 5 ns Video delay Internal sync pulse 0 to 400 ms Externally supplied sync pulse 225 to 400 ms Modulation Meter Accuracy rates lt 100 kHz 5 of range Specifications 2c 13 General Environmental Warmup Time Power Requirements Weight amp Dimensions Adapters Supplied 2c 14 Specifications Operating Temperature Range 0 to 55 C Altitude Up to 4572 meters Humidity 5 to 80 relative at 25 to 40 C Enclosure Protection IP20 according to IEC 529 This product is designed for use in INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively EMC Within limits of CISPR Pub 11 1990 Group 1 Class A and Mil Std 461C Part 7 REO2 Operation Requires 30 minute warmup from cold start at 0 to 55 C Internal temperature equilibrium reached over 2 hour warmup at stable ambient temperature Frequency Reference Reference time base is kept at o
342. point to be measured The query response is gt 0 The frequency in Hz that is currently produced 0 The calibration is complete lt 0 An error has occurred and the calibration is aborted e CALibration PMETer FLATness INITiate USER DIODe PMETer MMHead Initiates the specified calibration These calibrations require the use of an external power measurement Once initiated the swept signal generator sets up for the first point to be measured and responds to the query with the frequency at which the power is to be measured The parameters mean USER Initiates a calibration at all of the user flatness points S 28 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY DIODe Initiates a calibration of the external flatness Depends on value of CALibration PMETer RANGe PMETer Initiates a calibration of the power meter flatness Depends on value of CALibration PMETer RANGe MMHead Initiates a calibration of the source module flatness Depends on value of CALibration PMETer RANGe e CALibration PMETer FLATness NEXT lt num gt lvl suffix The parameter is the measured power that is currently produced by the swept signal generator You must supply this parameter after measuring the power using an external power meter The query response is issued after the swept signal generator processes the supplied parameter and settles on the next point to be measured The query response is gt 0 The frequency in Hz that is curr
343. pplies to synthesizers with option 001 only alcb cdr Figure A 1 ALC System Simplified Block Diagram Operating and Programming Reference A 5 ALC Note Two terms are used in the following discussions power output and ALC level Power output means actual output power including the effects of the attenuator ALC level means power levels before the attenuator In swept signal generators without attenuators these two terms are equivalent Internal Leveling Leveling Mode Normal Leveling Point Intrnl In this configuration Figure A 1 power is sensed by a detector internal to the swept signal generator and a dc output from this detector is fed back to the Level Control Circuits The ALC level is limited at the low end by the Level Control Circuits and at the high end by maximum available power Noise and drift limit the range at the low end to 20 dBm or greater The combination of RF frequency and RF components different models of swept signal generator have different RF components limit the ALC range available at the high end The internal instructions firmware of the swept signal generator limit the ALC level range available for request from 20 to 25 dBm If the power level requested is higher than the swept signal generator is capable of producing the maximum available power is produced and the message line displays UNLVLED unleveled When the swept signal generator performs frequency sweeps at certain ALC le
344. program 1 93 sweep functions S 72 sweep LED 1 6 1 12 sweep mode stepped functions S 68 sweep mode ramp S 73 sweep modes 1 12 sweep mode step S 74 sweep mode stepped frequency list S 73 sweep once 59 sweep output connector C 5 sweep span calibrate always S 74 sweep span calibrate once S 75 sweep span calibration F 15 sweep time 1 10 sweep time coupled to stepped sweep D 10 sweep time key S 75 sweep time set automatically S 76 swept offset measurement S 66 swept operation center frequency C 1 swept power 1 18 swept signal generator as controller 3 7 swept signal generator no front panel change address 3 8 swept signal generator remote address A 1 E 1 swept signal generator reset command S 15 swept signal generator status D 6 switch line L 5 synchronization command S 14 synchronization example program 1 99 synchronous sweep example program 1 101 synchronous sweep operation interface bus S 17 syntax diagrams commands 1 81 message terminators 1 80 program message 1 80 response message 1 82 syntax drawings 1 57 system controller on bus message 2a 4 system interface connector C 7 system language SCPI P 14 system menu keys S 77 tab proper use of 1 69 talker definition of 1 56 temperature operating 3 9 terminators program message 1 64 1 81 program message use in examples 1 64 response message 1 65 time sweep set automatically S 76 tmr conflet fail F 4 track fail F
345. puter capable of managing the various GPIB activities Only one device at a time can be an active controller The swept signal generator can be controlled entirely by a computer although the line POWER switch must be operated manually Several functions are possible only by computer remote control Computer programming procedures for the swept signal generator involve selecting a GPIB command statement then adding the specific swept signal generator SCPI Analyzer or CIIL programming codes to that statement to achieve the desired operating conditions The programming codes can be categorized into two groups Those that mimic front panel keystrokes and those that are unique and have no front panel equivalent 1 56 Getting Started Programming GPIB Command Statements In the programming explanations that follow specific examples are included that are written in a generic dialect of the BASIC language BASIC was selected because the majority of GPIB computers have BASIC language capability However other languages can also be used Command statements form the nucleus of GPIB programming they are understood by all instruments in the network and when combined with the programming language codes they provide all management and data communication instructions for the system An explanation of the fundamental command statements follows However some computers use a slightly different terminology or support an extended or enhan
346. r are latched and once set they remain set until cleared by a query or a CLS clear status There is no buffering so while an event bit is set subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored Event registers are read only Enable Register The enable register specifies the bits in the event register that can generate a summary bit The instrument logically ANDs corresponding bits in the event and enable registers and ORs all the resulting bits to obtain a summary bit Summary bits are in turn recorded in the Status Byte Enable registers are read write Querying an enable register does not affect it There is always a command to read and write to the enable register of a particular status group An Example Sequence Figure 1 34 illustrates the response of a single bit position in a typical status group for various settings The changing state of the condition in question is shown at the bottom of the figure A small binary table shows the state of the chosen bit in each status register at the selected times T1 to T5 Getting Started Programming 1 107 a a a a a Kowuns o ololo qusaq ololo o uonipuo3 olefe o Kowuns foj Je e 434 o lo uonipuo3 elefela Kowuns fejejeje 44 efefofo uoipuop Kowuns fejejeje xag Jejejeje uompucd olalolo Condition TS T4 TS T2 T1 Figure 1 34 Typical Status Register Bit Changes 1 108 Getting Started Programming Pro
347. r SOURce IM Mediate Analyzer NONE Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1 Step Swp Pt Trig Bus Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY When this softkey is selected the swept signal generator steps to the next point in a stepped frequency sweep when an GPIB trigger TRG lt GET gt is received leading edge TTL When the last frequency point is reached and continuous sweep is selected the next trigger causes the step sweep to return to the start frequency Connect the trigger signal to the TRIGGER INPUT BNC An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI SWEep TRIGger SOURce BUS Analyzer TS Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step S 70 Operating and Programming Reference Step Swp Pt Trig Ext Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY When this softkey is selected the swept signal generator steps to the next point in the stepped frequency sweep when an external hardware trigger is received When the last frequency point is reached and continuous sweep is selected the next trigger causes the step sweep to return to the start frequency Connect the trigger signal to the TRIGGER INPUT BNC An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SWEep TRIGger SOURce EXT Analyzer TS Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step Using Step Sweep in Chapter 1
348. r SOURce INTernal Analyzer NONE MOD also see Pulse and Modulation Internal Pulse Mode Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also Gate wo This softkey Option 002 only logically ANDs the internal pulse generator with a gating signal supplied from an external source SCPI PULM INTernal GATE ON OFF 1 0 PULM IN Ternal TRIGger SOURce IN Ternal Analyzer NONE MOD also see Pulse and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference l 11 Internal Pulse Mode Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also Trigger oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the internal pulse generator to trigger on the leading edge of the externally generated pulse SCPI PULM IN Ternal TRIGger SOURce EX Ternal Analyzer NONE MOD also see Pulse and Modulation Invert Input Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only inverts the logic of the external pulse input With this function active 5 V turns off RF power SCPI PULM EXTernal POLarity IN Verted Analyzer NONE MOD also see Pulse and Modulation l 12 Operating and Programming Reference Leveling Mode ALCoff Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also ALC This softkey lets you open the ALC loop Direct and separat
349. r frequency range and 10 V corresponds to the highest frequency of the range In manual sweep mode 0 V corresponds to the start frequency specified and 10 V corresponds to the stop frequency specified In both cases the sweep voltage at intermediate frequencies is a linear interpolation of the frequency span For example a frequency half way between the start stop limits has a sweep voltage of 5 V 2 The bandcross points in CW mode occur at 2 0 7 13 5 20 25 5 and 32 GHz In manual sweep mode the bandcrossing points have 200 MHz of flexibility that is automatically used by the swept signal generator for optimum performance For example a 2 0 to 7 1 GHz sweep could be accomplished without any band changes in manual sweep mode SCPI SWEep MODE MANual AUTO This is the command for frequency manual sweep POWer MODE SWEep POWer SPAN lt num gt lvl suffix MAXimum MINimum This is the command for power manual sweep LIST MODE MANual This is the command for manual list sweep Analyzer 53 Power Sweep Sweep Mode List Continuous Single and Manual Sweep Operation in Chapter 1 M 2 Operating and Programming Reference MARKER Function Group Menu Map Description See Also MENU SELECT This hardkey allows Ampl Markers Center Marker Delta Marker Delta Mkr Ref M1 M2 Sweep Marker M1 Marker M2 Marker M3 Marker M4 Marker M5 Markers All Off Start Mi Stop M2 access to the marker function
350. r is factory preset to a 1 MHz rate 1 MHz deviation and sine wave parameters An asterisk next to the key label indicates that internal FM is active and FH is displayed on the message line SCPI FM SOURce INTernal FM STATe ON OFF Analyzer NONE MoD also see FM and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference F 15 Freq Cal Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also USER CAL This softkey accesses the sweep span calibration menu Performs a sweep span calibration each time the frequency span is changed Swp Span Cal Always Swp Span Cal Once Performs a sweep span calibration SCPI NONE see softkeys listed above Analyzer NONE Softkeys listed above Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Freq Follow Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey facilitates the entry of correction values The swept signal generator generates the corresponding CW frequency at the set power level as you scroll the correction cells of the flatness array An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI NONE see Fitness Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 F 16 Operating and Programming Reference FREQUENCY menu Function Group Menu Map Description See Also FREQUENCY FREQ
351. r is working to overwrite the state information it flashes the count on the display This softkey causes the swept signal generator to recall the original calibration data stored in permanent memory EEROM all list and user ALC correction data will be lost SCPI SYSTem SECurity COUNt lt n gt SYSTem SECurity STATe ON SYSTem SECurity STATe OFF The transition from on to off triggers the blanking Sending the off message by itself will do nothing Analyzer SHMZ18HZ SHKZOHZ Security Menu Using the Security Features in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference C 3 Clear Point Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you change the correction value for the active frequency point to the Undefined state SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu Analyzer NONE ALC Fltness Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 CONNECTORS BNC Connectors AM FM OUTPUT Option 002 only Outputs the internally generated AM or FM waveform This output can drive 50 Q or greater When driving 100 2 or less a selftest error may be generated The AM output is scaled the same as it is generated either 100 V or 10 dB V The FM scaling depends on the FM deviation chosen The following table shows the scale versus deviation Internal FM Scale FM Deviation 1 Hz to lt 100 kHz 100 kHz V gt 200 kHz to lt 2 MHz 1
352. rameters Getting Started Programming GPIB General Information Interconnecting Cables Instrument Addresses GPIB Instrument Nomenclature Listener Talker Controller Programming the Swept Signal Generator GPIB Command Statements Abort Remote Local Lockout Local Clear Output Enter Getting Started with SCPI Definitions of Terms Standard Notation Command Mnemonics Angle Brackets How to Use Examples Command Examples Response Examples Essentials for Beginners Program and Response Messages Forgiving Listening and Precise Talking Types of Commands Subsystem Command Trees The Command Tree Structure Paths Through the Command Tree Subsystem Command Tables Reading the Command Table More About Commands Query and Event Commands Implied Commands Optional Parameters Program Message Examples Parameter Types Numeric Parameters Extended Numeric Parameters Discrete Parameters Contents 2 1 49 1 49 1 49 1 50 1 51 1 52 1 53 1 54 1 55 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 56 1 57 1 57 1 58 1 58 1 59 1 59 1 60 1 61 1 63 1 63 1 64 1 64 1 64 1 64 1 64 1 65 1 66 1 66 1 66 1 67 1 68 1 68 1 68 1 71 1 71 1 72 1 72 1 72 1 72 1 72 1 73 1 73 1 74 1 75 Boolean Parameters Reading Instrument Errors Example Programs Example Program Description Program Listing Program Comments Details of Commands and Responses In This Subsection Program Message Syntax S
353. rameters are used in both subsystem commands and common commands Numeric parameters accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation If an instrument accepts only specific numeric values such as integers it automatically rounds numeric parameters to fit its needs Getting Started Programming 1 73 Examples of numeric parameters 100 no decimal point required 100 fractional digits optional 1 23 leading signs allowed 4 56e lt space gt 3 space allowed after e in exponents 7 89E 01 use either E or e in exponentials 256 leading allowed 5 digits left of decimal point optional Examples of numeric parameters in commands 100 OUTPUT Source FREQuency STARt 1 0E 09 110 OUTPUT Source LIST FREQuency 10 0e 9 1e 7 Extended Numeric Parameters Most measurement related subsystems use extended numeric parameters to specify physical quantities Extended numeric parameters accept all numeric parameter values and other special values as well All extended numeric parameters accept MAXimum and MINimum as values Other special values such as UP and DOWN may be available as documented in the instrument s command summary Some instruments also let you to send engineering units as suffixes to extended numeric parameters The SCPI Command Summary lists the suffixes available if any Note that extended numeric parameters are not used for common commands or STATus
354. ramp for internally generated FM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The factory preset default is sine wave SCPI FM INTernal FUNCtion RAMP Analyzer NONE MOD also see FM and Modulation l 6 Operating and Programming Reference Internal FM Waveform Square Internal FM Waveform Sine Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the FM waveform to sine wave for internally generated FM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Sine wave is the factory preset waveform SCPI FM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid Analyzer NONE MoD also see FM and Modulation Internal FM Waveform Square Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the FM waveform to square wave for internally generated FM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The factory preset default is sine wave SCPI FM INTernal FUNCtion SQUare Analyzer NONE MoD also see FM and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference l 7 Internal FM Waveform Triangle Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the FM waveform to triangle wave for internally generated FM An as
355. rce FREQ STARt 4 GHZ OUTPUT Source FREQ STOP 5 GHZ OUTPUT Source INIT CONT ON 80 Save this state into storage register 1 Getting Started Programming 1 97 90 Clear the computer display 100 Print a message on the computer display 110 Set up the source for a CW state Note the combination of several commands into a single message This single line is equivalent to the following lines OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ CW 1 23456 GHZ OUTPUT Source POWer LEVel 1 DBM 120 Save this state into storage register 2 130 to 150 Print a message on the computer display and pause 160 Recall the instrument state from register 1 It should contain the sweeping state 170 to 190 Print a message on the computer display and pause 200 Recall the instrument state from register 2 It should contain the CW state 210 and 220 Print messages on the computer display 1 98 Getting Started Programming Looping and Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program Synchronization Example Program 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 Source 719 ABORT 7 LOCAL 7 CLEAR Source REMOTE Source CLS OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ START 4 GHZ STOP 5 GHZ MODE SWEEP OUTPUT Source POWER LEVEL 1 DBM STATE ON OUTPUT Source SWEEP TIME 1 OUTPUT Source 0PC ENTER Source X REPEAT DISP Enter number of sw
356. re entered Press USER CAL Select Tracking Menu Peak RF Always If peak always is on denoted by an asterisk next to the key label for an extended period of time the peaking function will automatically repeak every seven minutes Tracking Auto track is a more extensive version of peaking It causes all of the YTM tracking calibration constants to be aligned and requires approximately 40 to 90 seconds to complete Tracking is performed from 2 0 GHz to the end of the specified frequency range If the swept signal generator does not have a step attenuator terminate the RF OUTPUT with a good 50 Q impedance match such as a 10 dB attenuator or a power sensor to prevent mistracking To enhance the power output and spectral purity of swept modes and to improve tracking performance especially in harsh environments having wide temperature variations Press USER CAL Select Tracking Menu Auto Track Getting Started Advanced 1 49 ALC Bandwidth Selection 1 50 Getting Started Advanced The ALC bandwidth defaults at factory preset to the auto selection ALC Bandwidth Select Auto which selects the appropriate bandwidth high or low for each application To make the bandwidth selection the swept signal generator determines which functions are activated and uses the decision tree shown in Figure 1 23 Sai AM or Frequency 2 4OQOMHz High BW AL Search No or List Frequency S
357. red register Make sure that user flatness correction is still enabled before making the measurement When an HP Agilent 437B power meter is used to automatically enter the correction data the correction calibration routine automatically turns off any active modulation then re activates the modulation upon the completion of the data entry process Therefore the scalar pulse modulation that is automatically enabled in a scalar measurement system is disabled during an HP Agilent 437B correction calibration The user flatness correction array cannot be stored to a disk You must make sure that the array is stored in one of the eight internal registers Recalling a file from an HP Agilent 8757 disk will not erase the current array therefore you may recall an array from an internal register then recall an associated file from a disk For this example refer to menu map 5 POWER 1 The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 21 assumes that you have followed the steps necessary to correctly level the configuration If you have questions about external leveling refer to Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator 2 On the analyzer press PRESET Reset the analyzer and swept signal generator to a known state Setup System Parameters 3 On the swept signal generator press FREQUENCY 2 GHz STOP 2 0 GHz Set the swept signal generator for a frequency sweep of 2 to 20 GHz 4 Press POWER LEVEL n dBm Where
358. reference Select an external frequency reference Display set GPIB address Select SCPI Select network analyzer language Select CIIL Lock save recall registers Unlock save recall registers Purge all instrument memory Blank instrument display cycle power hardware hardware front panel hardware SYST SCPIE SYST LANG COMP CIIL Or hardware SHSV SHRC SHMZ18HZ SHKZOHZ DUO IDN See SCPI common commands ROSC INT ROSC EXT SYST COMM GPIB ADR lt num gt or hardware switch SYST LANG SCPI or hardware switch SYST LANG comp SYST LANG CIIL or hardware switch SYST KEY DIS SAVE SYST KEY ENAB SAVE SYST SEC ON SEC OFF DISP OFF 1 Wait one second after executing this command before sending any additional commands or they may be lost or ignored Installation 3 29 Operator s Check and Routine Maintenance WARNING Operator s Checks Service Information No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers The local operator s check front panel use allows the operator to make a quick check of the main swept signal generator functions prior to use For delete front panel options of the Agilent 8360 B Series use the Front Panel Emulator Software to perform an operator s check If the swept signal generator requires service and the routine maintenance proc
359. rements the same sweep time must S 66 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Step Dwell be set on both the master and the slave Since the master s sweep time is typically determined by the measurement configuration set the slave to match the master For more accurate ramp sweeps select Swp Span Cal Always on both the master and slave swept signal generators When this feature is active it calibrates the frequency at the end of every frequency band SCPI SWEep CONTrol STATe ON OFF 1 0 SWEep CONTrol TYPE SLAVe Analyzer NONE Step Control Master Step Swp Menu step Dwell Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set dwell times for points in the stepped frequency mode of sweep operation The dwell time for points in step frequency sweep may range from 100 ps to 3 2 s The actual time between points is the sum of dwell and phase lock times Select Step Dwell then use the entry area to enter the desired value SCPI SWEep FREQuency DWELI lt num gt time suffix or MAXimum MINimum Analyzer NONE Step Swp Menu Sweep Mode Step Operating and Programming Reference S 67 step Points Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey lets you define the number of step points in a stepped frequency sweep The number of points in a stepped sweep can range fro
360. ries 1600 1 Number of pts stop frequency start frequency F 8 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes Fltness Menu When correction frequencies are arbitrarily spaced the number of interpolated points varies When utilizing the user flatness correction feature do not exceed the swept signal generator ALC operating range Exceeding the ALC range causes the output power to become unleveled and eliminates the benefits of user flatness correction The ALC range can be determined by subtracting the minimum output power 20 dBm from the maximum specified power When the optional step attenuator is ordered on a swept signal generator at times it may be necessary to uncouple the attenuator to obtain the full ALC range This can be accomplished by selecting POWER MENU Uncoupl Atten For example an Agilent 83620B has an ALC range of gt 30 dB gt 10 to 20 dBm When user flatness correction is enabled the maximum settable test port power is equivalent to the maximum available leveled power minus the maximum path loss Po max Ppath loss For example if an 83620B has a maximum path loss of 15 dB due to system components between the source output and the test port the test port power should be set to 5 dBm When user flatness correction is enabled this provides the maximum available power to the device under test DUT SCPI a CORRection FLATness lt num gt freq suffix lt num gt DB 2
361. rogramming compatibility between existing HP Agilent 8340 8341 programs and network analyzer programs converted or written for the 8360 B Series In the SCPI language mode the status structure is defined by the SCPI status system All SCPI instruments implement status registers in the same fashion For more information on the status registers refer to ANALYZER STATUS REGISTER and SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE in Chapter 2 Table 3 9 Programming Language Comparison Description Network Analyzer Language SCPI Language ALC Leveling mode external Leveling mode internal Leveling mode mm module Leveling mode power meter Enable normal ALC operation Disable ALC and control modulator drive directly Set output power then disable ALC Uncouple attenuator control ALC independently A2 Al SHA2 A3 A1 A2 A3 SHA2 SHA3 SHAI SHPS lt num gt DB POW ALC SOUR DIOD POW ATT AUTO OFF POW ALC INT POW ALC SOUR MMH POW ATT AUTO OFF POW ALC SOUR PMET POW ATT AUTO OFF POW ALC STAT ON POW ALC STAT OFF POW SEAR ON POW ATT AUTO OFF POW lt num gt DBM Frequency Set CW frequency Set start frequency Set stop frequency Set center frequency Set frequency span Set swept mode step size Set CW mode step size Enable frequency offset function Enable frequency multiplier function Keep multiplication factor on instrument on off or preset
362. rom 2 to 20 GHz with frequency correction pairs every 100 MHz and 5 dBm leveled output power For this example we assume that the path losses do not exceed 5 dBm and that the HP Agilent 437B power meter already has its power sensor s calibration factors stored in sensor data table 0 If another power meter is used the power sensor s calibration factors will have to be stored in a look up table Modify the program to suit your particular measurement requirements Up to 801 points may be entered in the user flatness correction table with this program SCPI commands are used to set up the source parameters and enter correction frequencies and data into the correction table ASSIGN THE ADDRESS TO THE SOURCE AND POWER METER DIM A 5000 B 5000 ASSIGN Source TO 719 ASSIGN Meter TO 713 INTEGER Error_flag ABORT 7 1 ISET UP SOURCE OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source FREQ MODE SWE STAR 2 GHZ STOP 20 GHZ OUTPUT Source SWEEP TIME 200 MS OUTPUT Source POW LEV 5 DBM INIT CONT ON OUTPUT Source 0PC ENTER Source Done 1 ISET UP POWER METER OUTPUT Meter PR OUTPUT Meter FA OUTPUT Meter TRO 1 ZERO POWER METER OUTPUT Source POW STAT OFF Zero_meter Meter Source Error_flag IF Error_flag THEN BEEP CLEAR SCREEN PRINT ERROR METER DID NOT COMPLETE ZEROING OPERATION ELSE ISET UP CORRECTION FREQUENCIES IN USER FLATNESS CORRECTION TABLE I OUTPUT Source CORR FLAT Start_freq 2 Stop_freq 20 Increment
363. rom the internal frequency standard of the swept signal generator This input is a 50 2 connector that can be used as the master clock reference output for a network of instruments TRIGGER INPUT activated on a TTL rising edge Used to externally initiate an analog sweep or to advance to the next point of a step list or a frequency list TRIGGER OUTPUT Produces a 1 ps wide TTL level pulse at 1601 points evenly spaced across an analog sweep or at each point in a step list or a frequency list VOLTS GHz supplies a voltage that is proportional to the RF output frequency with a ratio of 0 5 volt output for every 1 GHz of RF frequency factory setting This ratio is switchable to either 0 25 or 1 volt The switch is located on the A12 SYTM assembly see Adjustments in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide for information This output is designed to drive into 2 kQ or greater Z AXIS BLANK MKRS supplies a positive rectangular pulse approximately 5 V into 2 KQ during the retrace and switch points when the swept signal generator is sweeping This output also supplies a 5 V pulse when the RF output is coincident with a marker frequency AUXILIARY INTERFACE connector provides control signals to the HP Agilent 8516A S parameter test set switch doubler This connector is a 25 pin D subminiature receptacle located on the rear panel It is also used for dual swept signal ge
364. rs Adrs Adrs am e ___ cas lt m SYSTEM MENU MENU SELECT Full Usr Tracking Cal Menu Auto Peak RF Swp Spon Cal Track Always Once Always Once Cc Cc Co aan a C Ca USER CAL MENU 9 2c Specifications This section lists the specifications for the Agilent 8360 B Series swept signal generator In a effort to improve these swept signal generators Agilent Technologies has made changes to this product which are identified with changes in the serial number prefix To check if your swept signal generator specifications are the same as those listed in this section 1 Locate your instrument model number and serial prefix number in the Instrument History Changes table in Chapter 5 2 Check the right column of this table to determine whether any changes apply to your instrument s model number serial prefix number combination 3 If a change is listed check this change to determine if specifications other than those listed in this section apply The changes are included in Chapter 5 Specifications describe warranted instrument performance over the 0 to 55 C temperature range except as noted otherwise Specifications apply after full user calibration and in coupled attenuator mode of operation ALC level greater than 10 dBm Supplemental characteristics denoted typical or nominal are intended to provide information useful in applying the instrument but are non warranted parameters Specifi
365. rvice manual 5 Connect the power sensor to the point where corrected power is desired SWEPT SIGNAL ia ggeuen g GENERATOR ooo O00AG SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE RF OUTPUT l PORT l gt CABLES AND OTHER J DEVICES J a 437B POWER METER l FLATNESS 1 CORRECTED OUTPUT PORT POWER SENSOR DEVICE UNDER Flat1b cdr TEST Figure 1 18 Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically Note No other devices can be connected to the GPIB cable 1 34 Getting Started Advanced Setup Swept Signal Generator Parameters 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 On the swept signal generator press PRESET FREQUENCY start 4 GHz STOP G 0 GHz POWER LEVEL 0 dB m Access User Flatness Correction Menu Press POWER MENU Select Fltness Menu Select Delete Menu Delete All This step insures that the flatness array is empty Press PRIOR Leave the delete menu and return to the previous softkey menu Enter the frequency points at which the correction information will be taken Choose either the point by point entry method Enter Freq or the automatic frequency point generation Auto Fill Start For this example select Auto Fill Start 4 Gre Select Auto Fill Stop 1 0 GHz Auto Fill Incr 1 Ghz Notice that a frequency list starting at 4 and ending at 10 GHz with an increment value of 1 GHz is created
366. ry The swept signal generator s amplitude and pulse modulation performance is directly tied to the ALC Automatic Level Control system Refer to the ALC block diagram in Figure M 1 The ALC system controls the amplitude or power level of the RF output A portion of the output signal is detected summed with the reference level signal and the difference error signal drives an integrate and hold circuit The integrator output drives the RF output power level via the linear modulator When the sum of the detected and reference signals is 0 volts the output of the integrator is held at a constant level and the RF output is leveled This loop is bandwidth limited by the integrator and the integrate and hold circuit Notice however that there is a feedforward path that allows changes in power level that are bandwidth independent from the rest of the ALC loop Power level information supplied by the level DAC and AM input travels the feedforward path to drive a linear modulator See for additional information on the ALC system BROADBAND MICROWAVE T DIRECTIONAL OSCILLATOR COUPLER Ead ar MICROWAVE OUTPUT i LINEAR PULSE MODULATOR MODULATOR A H a PULSE INPUT HOLD is LOOP INTEGRATE INTEGRATOR DETECTOR RANGE REFERENCE LIMIT FEEDFORWARD COMPARATOR LEVEL DAC VOLTAGE LOG DELAY AM INPUT Figure M 1 ALC Block Diagram Operating and Programming Reference M 13
367. ry condition that is either true or false There are only four possible values for a Boolean parameter Examples of Boolean parameters ON Boolean TRUE upper lower case allowed OFF Boolean FALSE upper lower case allowed 1 Boolean TRUE 0 Boolean FALSE Response Data Types Real Response Data A large portion of all measurement data are formatted as real response data Real response data are decimal numbers in either fixed decimal notation or scientific notation In general you do not need to worry about the rules for formatting real data or whether fixed decimal or scientific notation is used Most high level programming languages that support instrument I O handle either type transparently Examples of real response data 1 23E 0 1 0E 2 1 0E 2 0 5E 0 1 23 100 0 100 0 0 5 Getting Started Programming 1 85 Integer Response Data Integer response data are decimal representations of integer values including optional signs Most status register related queries return integer response data Examples of integer response data O signs are optional 100 leading sign allowed 100 leading sign allowed 256 never any decimal point Discrete Response Data Discrete response data are similar to discrete parameters The main difference is that discrete response data return only the short form of a particular mnemonic in all uppercase letters Examples of discrete response data INTernal level internally DIODe level u
368. s Causes the swept signal generator to display markers as an amplitude pulse Changes the swept signal generator s center frequency to the value of the most recently activated marker Display the frequency difference between the active marker and the marker designated by the softkey Delta Mkr Ref Reveals the softkeys in the delta marker reference menu Causes the swept signal generator to sweep from M1 to M2 Makes M1 frequency the active function Makes M2 frequency the active function Makes M3 frequency the active function Makes M4 frequency the active function Makes M5 frequency the active function Turns off all markers Changes the swept signal generator start and stop frequencies to the values of M1 and M2 The markers are functional whenever an asterisk appears next to the key label but only one marker can be active at a time The active marker is indicated in the active entry area Softkeys listed above Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference M 3 Marker M1 Function Group MARKER Menu Map 3 Description The softkeys labeled Marker Mi through Marker M5 function identically The softkey turns the marker off on When an asterisk appears next to the key label it indicates that the marker is on but not necessarily active A marker is only active when it is indicated in the active entry area The
369. s and firmware date code SCPI IDN Analyzer OI GPIB Menu SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY S 60 Operating and Programming Reference Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This hardkey lets you set a value for the frequency span in the center frequency frequency span mode of swept frequency operation Press SPAN and use the entry area to enter the desired value The swept signal generator sweeps from one half the span below to one half above the center frequency Certain center frequency and frequency span combinations cause the swept signal generator to limit the value entered In general any combination that causes the swept signal generator to exceed its minimum or maximum specified frequency is limited SCPI FREQuency SPAN lt num gt freq suffix or MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN FREQuency MODE SWEep Analyzer DF lt num gt Hz Kz Mz Gz CENTER START STOP Center Frequency Span Operation in Chapter 1 Function Group Menu Map Description FREQUENCY This hardkey activates swept frequency mode and makes the start frequency parameter the active function Press START and use the entry area to enter the desired value The start stop frequency must be separated by at least 2 Hz in order to remain in the frequency sweep mode If start stop frequency then the zero span mode is entered Operating and Programming Reference S 61 Programming Codes
370. s active SCPI SYSTem LANGuage CHL Analyzer CIIL Adrs Menu The M A T E option Option 700 is documented in a separate manual supplement called Agilent Technologies 8360 Series Synthesized Sweepers Option 700 Manual Supplement Programming Language SCPI Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI is the instrument control programming language adopted by Agilent Technologies SCPI provides commands that are common from one Agilent Technologies product to another eliminating device specific commands This softkey lets you select SCPI as the swept signal generator s external interface language This is the default language set at the factory Any commands issued within 100 ms of a change in language may be ignored or lost An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SYSTem LAN Guage SCPI Analyzer SYST or SCPI Adrs Menu SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY SCPI STATUS REGISTER STRUCTURE Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 P 14 Operating and Programming Reference Pt Trig Menu Pt Trig Menu Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY This softkey accesses the list mode point trigger softkeys List Mode Pt Trig Auto Automatically steps the swept signal generator to next point in the fr
371. s as if it is in its home menu Pressing the PRESET key does not erase the contents of this menu SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE ASSIGN PRIOR UsrKey Clear UsrMenu Clear Operating and Programming Reference U 5 Usrkey Clear Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey lets you recall the user defined menu and remove a single softkey that appears in that menu 1 Select UsrKey Clear The user defined menu appears in the softkey label area The active entry area displays gt Press USER Soft Key to Clear 2 Select the softkey you wish to remove from the menu The active entry area turns off and the softkey is removed from the user defined menu The user defined menu remains in the softkey label area SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE assign USER DEFINED MENU UsrMenu Clear UsrMenu Clear Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM This softkey recalls the user defined menu and removes all softkeys assigned to that menu The empty user defined menu remains in the softkey label area SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE assign USER DEFINED menu Usrkey Clear U 6 Operating and Programming Reference Waveform Menu Function Group vob Menu Map 4 Description The waveform menu Option 002 only allows you to choose sine square triangle ramp and noise waveforms for internal AM and FM The default is sine wave T
372. s group Condition Transition Event Enable Register Filter Register Register Bit O Bit 1 Summary Bit 2 Bit Logical OR Bit 3 Bit Nome aE Bit Number Figure 1 33 Generalized Status Register Model When a status group is implemented in an instrument it always contains all of the component registers However there is not always a corresponding command to read or write to every register Condition Register The condition register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status of the instrument There is no latching or buffering for this register it is updated in real time Condition registers are read only 1 106 Getting Started Programming There may or may not be a command to read a particular condition register Transition Filter The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register Transition filter bits may be set for positive transitions PTR negative transitions NTR or both Positive means a condition bit changes from 0 to 1 Negative means a condition bit changes from 1 to 0 Transition filters are read write Transition filters are unaffected by CLS clear status or queries They are set to instrument dependent values at power on and after RST Event Register The event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filter Bits in the event registe
373. s prohibited Always use the three prong ac power cord supplied with this instrument Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause instrument damage The offset prong of the three prong connector is the grounding pin The protective grounding feature is preserved when operating the swept signal generator from a two contact outlet by using a three prong to a two prong adapter and connecting the green wire of the adapter to ground An adapter is available for US connectors only as part number 1251 0048 Install the instrument so that the detachable power cord is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch Alternately an externally installed switch or circuit breaker which is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator may be used as a disconnecting device CABLE CABLE PLUG TYPE PART PLUG DESCRIPTION 2 LENGTH CABLE FOR USE IN COUNTRY NUMBER2 inches COLOR 250V 8120 1351 Straight BS1363A 90 Mint Gray United Kingdom oO 8120 1703 90 90 Mint Gray Cyprus Nigeria E N Zimbabwe Singapore L oOo oO 250V i 8120 1369 Straight ZNSS198 ASC 112 79 Gray Australia 8120 0696 90 87 Groy New Zealand 250V 8120 1689
374. s softkey lets you couple the dwell time for points in the stepped frequency sweep mode to the ramp sweep mode sweep time The equation to determine the dwell time in the dwell coupled mode is as follows Coupled Dwell Time sweep time number of step points An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI SWEep FREQuency DWEL1 AUTO ON 1 Analyzer NONE Step Swp Menu D 10 Operating and Programming Reference 8360 Adrs Function Group SYSTEM Menu Map 8 Description This softkey lets you change the GPIB address of the swept signal generator Enter the address desired using the numeric entry keys or the up down arrow keys The address value may be set between 0 and 30 The swept signal generator stores the address value in non volatile memory The default address of the swept signal generator is 19 Programming Codes SCPI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess Analyzer NONE See Also Connectors GPIB Menu Instrument Addresses in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference E 1 Enter Corr Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey lets you enter a power correction value for a frequency point in the flatness array A frequency point must be entered before a correction value can be accepted otherwise the following error message appears ERROR Must first enter correction freq
375. scription Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey activates the pulse modulation mode for an external pulse source The pulse source is connected to the PULSE INPUT BNC connector and fed to the pulse modulator through a buffer circuit When pulse modulation is in effect the RF output is turned on programmed power is produced and off gt 80 dB attenuation at a rate determined by the pulse modulation input Pulse and amplitude modulation can be in effect simultaneously An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI PULSe SOURce EX Ternal PULSe STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer PM1 function on PMO function off atc CONNECTORS mob Pulse Menu Pulse On Off Intrnl Function Group Menu Map Description wo This softkey activates pulse modulation mode using the internal pulse generator No external connection is needed When internal pulse modulation is selected the PULSE INPUT BNC becomes an output for the internally generated signal An asterisk next to the softkey label indicates that this feature is active The pulse parameters width period rate rise time etc are controlled by softkeys See Pulse Menu or Internal Menu for swept signal generators with Option 002 for a list of these softkeys Operating and Programming Reference P 19 Pulse On Offintrnl Programming Codes See Also SCPI PULSe SOURce IN Ternal PULSe STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE
376. sed in a normal condition in which all means for protection are intact only Position the instrument according to the enclosure protection provided This instrument does not protect against the ingress of water This instrument protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the enclosure vi CAUTION Note Before switching on this instrument make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Always use the three prong ac power cord supplied with this instrument Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause instrument damage Before switching on this product make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Assure the supply voltage is in the specified range Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively The detachable power cord is the instr
377. select any softkey and assign its function to 1 of 12 user defined keys in the USER DEFINED Menu The following message appears on the swept signal generator display gt Press MENU KEY to be assigned Complete keypaths are assigned not just the key label For example assigning List Menu to the user defined menu copies the complete structure keypath of that key All of the pages and lower level menus are placed within the user defined menu Programming Codes SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE See Also USER DEFINED MENU Operating and Programming Reference A 23 Auto Fill Incr Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 This softkey is used in two locations Fltness Menu and List Menu Flatness Menu When selected the swept signal generator waits for a frequency increment value to be entered gt Increment is displayed in the active entry area A list of frequencies is created automatically beginning at the auto fill start frequency and always ending with the auto fill stop frequency The swept signal generator uses the increment value on all points but if the stop frequency requires a different increment to be used to be exact the swept signal generator simply ends the frequency list at the stop frequency disregarding the increment value If the increment value requested creates a list that exceeds the number of elements available the following message appears TOO M
378. selectable Use the rotary knob up down or numeric entry keys to choose 100 kHz 1 00 MHz V or 10 0 MHz V Frequency deviation is dependent on the magnitude of the input signal An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active SCPI FM SENSitivity lt num gt freq V suffix MAXimum MINimum FM COUPling AC FM STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer FM1 function on followed by either 100 kHz 1MHz or 10 MHz FMO function off mop CONNECTORS FM On Off DC Function Group Menu Map Description MODULATION This softkey lets you select DC coupled frequency modulation FM and makes FM deviation frequency the active function FM sensitivity is selectable Use the rotary knob up down or numeric entry keys to choose 100 kHz 1 00 MHz V or 10 0 MHz V Frequency deviation is dependent on the magnitude of the input signal When DC FM is chosen the swept signal generator displays DC FM on the message line An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Operating and Programming Reference F 13 FM On Off DC Programming Codes See Also SCPI FM SENSitivity lt num gt freq V suffix MA Ximum MINimum FM COUPling AC FM STATe ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer NONE mop CONNECTORS FM On Off Ext Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only activates the frequency modulation mode for an external source The FM s
379. ses GPIB Instrument Nomenclature Programming the Swept Signal Generator Figure C 2 shows the swept signal generator rear panel GPIB connector and suitable cables and describes the procedures and limitations for interconnecting instruments Cable length restrictions also described in Figure C 2 must be observed Each instrument in a GPIB network must have a unique address ranging in value from 00 30 decimal The default address for the swept signal generator is 19 but this can be changed using the My Adrs softkey or rear panel switch as described in the reference chapter Chapter 2 under the 8360 Adrs entry the examples in this section use 19 as the address for the swept signal generator Other instruments use a variety of procedures for setting the address as described in their operating manuals but typically either a rear panel switch or a front panel code is used A GPIB instrument is categorized as a listener talker or controller depending on its current function in the network Listener A listener is a device capable of receiving data or commands from other instruments Any number of instruments in the GPIB network can be listeners simultaneously Talker A talker is a device capable of transmitting data or commands to other instruments To avoid confusion a GPIB system allows only one device at a time to be an active talker Controller A controller is an instrument typically a com
380. sing an external diode PMETer level using an external power meter MMHead level using a mm wave source module String Response Data String response data are similar to string parameters The main difference is that string response data use only double quotes as delimiters rather than single quotes Embedded double quotes may be present in string response data Embedded quotes appear as two adjacent double quotes with no characters between them Examples of string response data This IS valid SO IS THIS un u I said Hellou 1 86 Getting Started Programming Programming Typical Measurements In This Subsection Using the Example Programs This subsection illustrates how the general SCPI concepts presented in previous subsections apply to programming real measurements To introduce you to programming with SCPI we must list the commands for the swept signal generator We will begin with a simplified example The example programs are interactive They require active participation by the operator If you desire to get an understanding of the principles without following all of the instructions read the Program Comments paragraphs to follow the programmed activity The GPIB select code is assumed to be preset to 7 All example programs in this section expect the swept signal generator s GPIB address to be decimal 19 To find the present GPIB address use the front panel Press SYSTEM menu Select GPIB Menu A
381. sponse Reading PRINT Testpoint Reading 1000 NEXT Testpoint OUTPUT Source OUTPUT OFF END Program Comments Lines 20 to 70 Declare variables and I O paths for instruments I O paths let you use a name for an instrument in OUTPUT and ENTER statements instead of a numeric address 80 to 100 Assign values to the input test limits in mV 110 to 130 Clear the instrument GPIB interfaces 140 to 160 Reset each instrument to a known measurement state 170 to 190 Print the test report title 200 to 310 Query measurement instruments identifications for test traceability 1 78 Getting Started Programming 320 to 330 Connect the source output signal to the output terminals 340 to 380 Print results table header 390 to 460 This is the main measurement loop Line 400 contains two commands SOURce VOLT sets the output level of the source OPC is used to signal that the preceding command has finished executing To make an accurate measurement the source output must be allowed to settle When the output has settled OPC places a l in the source Output Queue The program waits at line 410 until the 1 returned by 0PC is entered Note that following each OUTPUT containing a query is an ENTER to retrieve the queried value If you do not use paired QUTPUTs and ENTERs you can overwrite data in the instrument Output Queue and generate instrument errors 470 to 480 Disconnect output terminals of the instruments from th
382. subsystem commands Examples of extended numeric parameters 100 any simple numeric values 1 23 largest valid setting 4 56e lt space gt 3 7 89E 01 256 5 MAX MIN valid setting nearest negative infinity Examples of extended numeric parameters in commands 100 OUTPUT Source FREQuency STOP MAX 110 OUTPUT Source LIST FREQuency MAX MIN 1 74 Getting Started Programming Discrete Parameters Use discrete parameters to program settings that have a finite number of values Discrete parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting They have a long and a short form like command mnemonics You can use mixed upper and lower case letters for discrete parameters Examples of discrete parameters INTernal level internally DIODe level using an external diode PMETer level using an external power meter MMHead Level using a mm wave source module Examples of discrete parameters in commands 100 OUTPUT Source POWer ALC SOURce INT 110 OUTPUT Source POWer ALC SOURce mmh Although discrete parameters values look like command keywords do not confuse the two In particular be sure to use colons and spaces properly Use a colon to separate command mnemonics from each other Use a space to separate parameters from command mnemonics Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false There are only four possible values for a Boolean parameter Examples of
383. systems on most computers In SCPI this command structure is called a command tree root AA level 1 BB cc DD level 2 EE FF GG HH JJ Figure 1 25 A Simplified Command Tree In the command tree shown in Figure 1 25 the command closest to the top is the root command or simply the root Notice that you must follow a particular path to reach lower level subcommands For example if you wish to access the GG command you must follow the path AA to BB to GG Paths Through the Command Tree To access commands in different paths in the command tree you must understand how an instrument interprets commands A special part of the instrument firmware a parser decodes each message sent to the instrument The parser breaks up the message into component commands using a set of rules to determine the command tree path used The parser keeps track of the current path the level in the command tree where it expects to find the next command you send This is important because the same keyword may appear in different paths The particular path you use determines how the keyword is interpreted The following rules are used by the parser m Power On and Reset After power is cycled or after RST the current path is set to the root m Message Terminators A message terminator such as a lt new line gt character sets the current path to the root Many programming languages have output statements that send message terminators automatically The par
384. t moves between adjacent states Some of the flow charts reference commands that have not been discussed yet These commands are explained later in this subsection Keep in mind that this explanation covers the most general case Your particular instrument may not implement all of the commands discussed here 1 110 Getting Started Programming Inside the Idle State Figure 1 36 illustrates the operation of the idle state INIT IMM ABORT RST or INIT CONT ON Figure 1 36 Inside the Idle State Turning power on or sending RST or ABORT forces the trigger system to the idle state The trigger system remains in the idle state until it is initiated by INITiate IMMediate or INITiate CONTinuous ON Once one of these conditions is satisfied the trigger system exits downward to the initiate state Note that RST sets INITiate CONTinuous OFF Whenever the trigger system leaves the idle state it sets the instrument s Operation Pending Flag Returning to idle clears the flag The Operation Pending Flag is a special bit inside the instrument that can affect how the instrument responds to certain commands You need to know this fact when using OPC OPC WAI and other commands Inside the Initiate State Figure 1 37 illustrates the operation of the initiate state NO YES Figure 1 37 Inside the Initiate State If the trigger system is on a downward path it travels directly through the initiate state withou
385. t then the last two in the message are used to determine the sweep and no errors are given If only one header is sent in a message then the assumed pairs are center span and start stop In other words if only center is sent then span is kept constant if possible while adjusting center to the requested value The start stop frequencies are updated to reflect the changes based on the coupling equations The swept signal generator uses bumping to move unspecified frequency parameters but if the final value of any of the frequency headers is the result of bumping then an error is generated since the user is not getting what was specified This means to guarantee sequence independence requires sending the frequency pairs in a single message Example 1 present state start 5 GHz stop 6 GHz FREQ STARt 20 GHZ an error results since the stop frequency is bumped FREQ STOP 22 GHZ the final sweep does not generate an error 20 to 22 Example 2 present state start 5 GHz stop 6 GHz FREQ STOP 22 GHZ no error is generated start frequency is unchanged FREQ STARt 20 GHZ still no error Example 3 present state start 5 GHz stop 6 GHz FREQ STARt 20 GHZ STOP 22 GHZ both are fine FREQ STOP 22 GHZ STARt 20 GHZ no errors e FREQuency CENTer lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency CENTer MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the center frequency The RST value is MAX MIN 2 e FREQu
386. t Module Select Module Menu ao e WN rE Select Module Select Auto or Front or Rear depending on where the interface connection is made All of the ALC data necessary to communicate properly with the swept signal generator is exchanged via the SOURCE MODULE INTERFACE To obtain flatness corrected power refer to Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in the Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance section Getting Started Advanced 1 29 Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects Note 1 30 Getting Started Advanced Uncoupled operation applies to Option 001 swept signal generators only Uncoupled operation is useful when working with mixers Figure 1 16 shows a hypothetical setup where the swept signal generator is providing a small signal to a mixer The swept signal generator output is 8 dBm which in Leveling Mode Normal results in ATTEN 0 dB ALC Level 8 dBm The mixer is driven with an LO of 10 dBm and has LO to RF isolation of 15 dB The resulting LO feedthrough of 5 dBm enters the swept signal generator s OUTPUT port goes through the attenuator with no loss and arrives at the internal detector Depending on frequency it is possible for most of this energy to enter the detector Since the detector responds to its total input power regardless of frequency this excess energy causes the leveling circuit to reduce its output In this example the re
387. t a message on the computer s display 1 94 Getting Started Programming Queries Example The following example demonstrates the use of query commands and Program 4 response data formats Clear and reset the controller and type in the following program 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 Source 719 ABORT 7 LOCAL 7 CLEAR Source REMOTE Source CLS OUTPUT Source RST OUTPUT Source POWER LEVEL 5 dBm STATE ON OUTPUT Source FREQ CW ENTER Source F PRINT Present source CW frequency is F 1 E 6 MHz OUTPUT Source POWER STATE ENTER Source W PRINT Present power ON OFF state is W OUTPUT Source FREQ MODE DIM A 10 ENTER Source A PRINT Source s frequency mode is amp A OUTPUT Source FREQ CW MIN ENTER Source A PRINT Minimum source CW frequency is A 1 E 6 MHz OUTPUT Source FREQ START STOP ENTER Source X Y PRINT Swept frequency limits PRINT Start X 1 E 6 MHz PRINT Stop Y 1 E 6 MHz END Run the program Program Comments 10 20 Assign the source s GPIB address to a variable to 50 Abort any GPIB activity and initialize the GPIB interface 60 70 80 90 Clear the computer s display Set the source to its initial state for programming Set up the source power level using a compound message Query the value of the source s CW frequenc
388. t marker number gt Analyzer MD1 function on MDO function off Delta Marker Marker Operation in Chapter 1 Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 D 6 Operating and Programming Reference Disp Status Disp Status Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This softkey causes the status of various features to be displayed For example this is what the swept signal generator displays as its status after a factory preset Pls 0ff Lvl Int RF Slp 0ff AM 0ff ALC 0n Pwr Swp 0ff FM 0ff UsrCorr 0ff SwpMode Swept Altn O0ff SwpTrig Auto AutoCal None This key is useful when checking the current operation state of the swept signal generator The following is a listing of the various mnemonics used to indicate status Table D 1 Mnemonics used to Indicate Status Function Mnemonic State Mnemonic Pulse Pls Off Off Scalar Scalar Internal Intrnl External Extrnl AM AM Off Off 10dB V 10dB V 100 V 100 V FM FM Off Off AC AC DC DC Alternate Registers Altn Off Off On On ALC Leveling Point Lvl Internal Int External Ext Power Meter Mtr Source Module Mod ALC Leveling Mode ALC On On Off Off Search Srch Operating and Programming Reference D 7 Disp Status Table D 1 Mnemonics used to Indicate Status continued Function Mnemonic State Mnemonic Flatness On Off UsrCorr Off Off On On Start Sweep Trigger SwpTrig Automatic Auto GPIB Bus External Ext Power S
389. t panel or remote operation As shown in Figure A 1 the inputs and calibration data are processed by the swept signal generator CPU which uses this information to set the Level DAC In turn the Level DAC sends a controlling voltage to the Level Control Circuits In the presence of modulation voltages appearing at the AM and or PULSE inputs contribute to the control of the Level Control Circuits In swept signal generators with optional step attenuators the power level at the output connector can be reduced by a maximum of 90 dB in 10 dB steps This is in addition to the control capabilities provided by the Level Control Circuits A Feedback Signal to the Level Control Circuits can be provided by either internal or external detectors This signal is the comparison voltage necessary for accurate stable power level settings and good source match at various Leveling Points Alternatively the power level can be set without using feedback In this mode however power level is uncalibrated and is subject to drift with temperature The following paragraphs describe the operation of the different leveling modes and leveling points A 4 Operating and Programming Reference ALC 8360B SERIES SWEPT SIGNAL GENERATOR TERNAL Ex INTROLLER E OPERATI col REMOTI POWER OuTPuT EXTERNAL DETECTOR POWER METER O O lt EXT ALC AC OFF SouRCE_MODULE source MODULE O INTERFACE LEVELING PONTS Note This block a
390. t restrictions If the trigger system Getting Started Programming 1 111 is on an upward path and INITiate CONTinuous is ON it exits downward to an event detection state If the trigger system is on an upward path and INITiate CONTinuous is OFF it exits upward to the idle state Inside Event Detection States Figure 1 38 illustrates the operation of an arbitrary event detection state named lt state_name gt Typical lt state_names gt are TRIGger ARM STARt and STOP Normal downward execution is controlled by the source command SOURce The lt state_name gt SOURce command specifies which particular input can generate the event required to continue the downward path If the source chosen is a non analog signal such as IMMediate BUS or TIMer no further qualifications are required to generate an event If however an INTernal or EXTernal analog signal is chosen additional qualifications may apply You specify these additional qualifications using appropriate LEVel SLOPe and HYSTeresis commands Sending RST sets the SOURce to IMMediate The downward path also provides a command to override normal operation IMMediate The lt state_name gt IMMediate command bypasses event detection ECOunt and DELay qualifications one time The upward path through the event detection state contains only one condition A lt state_name gt COUNt command sets the number of times the trigger system must successfully exit that event detec
391. t signal generator Changing this does not affect the output frequency of the swept signal generator Only the displayed parameters and query responses are changed The equation implied by this is Entered displayed frequency Hardware Freq Multiplier Offset After RST the value is 1 e FREQuency MULTiplier STATe ON OFFI1 0 e FREQuency MULTiplier STATe Queries and turns the frequency multiplier off and on After RST the setting is OFF e FREQuency OFFSet lt num gt MAXimum MINimum e FREQuency OFFSet MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency offset This function changes the S 36 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY mapping of the frequency parameters on input to and output from the swept signal generator Changing this does not affect the output frequency of the swept signal generator Only the displayed parameters and query responses are changed The equation implied by this is Entered displayed frequency Hardware Freq Multiplier Offset After RST the value is 0 e FREQuency OFFSet STATe ON OFF 1 0 e FREQuency OFFSet STATe Queries and turns the frequency offset off and on After RST the setting is OFF e FREQuency SPAN lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN e FREQuency SPAN MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency span See FREQ CENTER for more information e FREQuency STARt lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum UP DOWN
392. tep Sweep Low BW Figure 1 23 Decision Tree for ALC Bandwidth Selection Using Step Sweep Refer to menu map 2 Press FREQUENCY menu Select Step Swp Menu Select Step Size Enter the desired increment value Select Step Points Enter the number of points desired Determine the dwell time desired select Step Dwell and enter a value or choose the dwell time determined by the ramp mode sweep time select Dwell Coupled Determine the triggering scheme select Step Swp Pt Trig Auto Bus or Ext Press SWEEP Menu Select Sweep Mode Step to activate the step frequency mode Getting Started Advanced 1 51 Creating and Using a Frequency List 1 52 Getting Started Advanced 1 Refer to menu map 2 2 Press FREQUENCY menu 3 Select List Menu To use the frequency points of a frequency list to create the frequency portion of the user flatness correction array 1 Refer to menu map 5 Press POWER MENU Select Fitness Menu e WwW hd Select Copy List Using the Security To access the security menu Features 1 Refer to menu map 8 2 Press SYSTEM MENU 3 Select Security Menu Getting Started Advanced 1 53 Changing the Preset Parameters 1 54 Getting Started Advanced 1 Set up the swept signal generator in the desired operation state to be used as the preset state Refer to menu map 8 Press SYSTEM MENU Select Save User Preset
393. terisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The factory preset default is sine wave SCPI FM INTernal FUNCtion TRlangle Analyzer NONE MOD also see FM and Modulation Internal Menu Function Group Menu Map Description oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you define the parameters of the internal pulse modulation Internal Pulse Generator Width Sets the width of the on portion of the internally generated pulse Internal Pulse Generator Rate Sets the repetition frequency of the internally generated pulse Internal Pulse Generator Period Sets the period of the internally generated pulse Internal Pulse Generator Delay Delays the pulse from the trigger signal applied to the external trigger Internal Pulse Mode Auto Default mode of generating automatically triggered internal pulses l 8 Operating and Programming Reference Programming Codes See Also Internal Pulse Generator Period Internal Pulse Mode Gate Turns on the internal pulse mode during the positive cycle of the externally generated pulse Internal Pulse Mode Trigger Triggers on the leading edge of the external pulse input SCPI NONE see the individual softkeys listed Analyzer NONE MoD also see Modulation and Pulse Internal Pulse Generator Period Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 o
394. ternal temperature increases If the internal temperature reaches 90 C the swept signal generator will automatically turn off and the amber STANDBY LED will turn on Clean the fan filter as follows 1 Turn off the swept signal generator 2 Remove the ac line cord The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch 3 Remove the screws holding the fan cage See Figure 4 2 4 Remove the fan cage from the rear panel 5 Rinse the fan cage filter and the filter retainer in warm water then dry 6 Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the swept signal generator FAN RETAINER FAI FILTER FAN D CAGE a p FAN CAGE SCREWS Figure 4 2 Removing the Fan Filter Operator s Check Routine Maintenance 4 5 How to Clean the Cabinet Warning To prevent electrical shock disconnect the 8360 B series swept signal generator from the mains before cleaning Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the external case parts Do not attempt to clean internally How to Clean the The display of the swept signal generator is protected by a plastic Display Filter display filter To clean the display filter use mild soap or detergent and water or a commercial window clean
395. the instrument remove the handles 3 Using the screws provided attach the rack mount flanges to the swept signal generator 4 Remove the bottom and back feet and the tilt stands before rack mounting the instrument 2 ZL Figure 3 5 Rack Mount Flanges for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Removed 3 14 Installation Rack Flange Kit for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Attached Option 913 CAUTION Option 913 swept signal generators are supplied with rack flanges and the necessary hardware to install them on the swept signal generator without removing the instrument handles The following table itemizes the parts in this kit Table 3 6 Rack Flange Kit for Swept Signal Generators with Handles Attached Contents Quantity Description 2 Rack Mount Flanges 8 Screws Ventilation Requirements When installing the instrument in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Installation 3 15 Installation Procedure 1 Refer to Figure 3 6 Remove handle trim strips 2 Remove the four screws on each side that attach the handles to the instrument 3 Using the longer screws pr
396. the offset to 0 dB and the dwell to 10 ms Enter 18 13 11 and 20 GHz to complete this example array Getting Started Advanced 1 37 1 38 Getting Started Advanced 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Access User Flatness Correction Menu Press POWER MENU Select Fltness Menu Select Delete Menu Delete All This step insures that the flatness array is empty Press PRIOR Leave the delete menu and return to the previous softkey menu Select Copy List This step copies the frequency list into the correction table in sequential order Select Freq Follow This sets the swept signal generator to CW frequency mode to facilitate taking correction information As you scroll through the correction cells the swept signal generator produces the corresponding CW frequency at 0 dBm Select Enter Corr This allows correction value entry Press FLTNESS ON OFF This step enables user flatness correction For 5 GHz set the appropriate power sensor cal factor on the power meter Use the swept signal generator rotary knob to adjust for a measurement of 0 00 dBm on the power meter Notice that a correction value is entered at 5 GHz Use the up arrow key to increment to the next correction cell For 11 GHz set the appropriate power sensor cal factor on the power meter Use the swept signal generator rotary knob to adjust for a measurement of 0 00 dBm on the power meter
397. they must be accepted without error if the resulting pulse is possible e PULSe FREQuency lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum e PULSe FREQuency MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the frequency of the internal pulse generator The resolution of the frequency is such that the resulting period is set to a resolution of 1 us The RST value is 500 kHz e PULSe PERiod lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e PULSe PERiod MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the period of the internal pulse generator The resolution of this is 1 us The RST value is 2 ps e PULSe WIDTh lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e PULSe WIDTh MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the width of the internal pulse generator The RST value is 1 ps e PULM SLEW lt num gt time suffix MAXimum MINimum e PULM SLEW MAXimum MINimum Sets and queries the rise time for the pulse modulation The typical usage is MAX MIN since calibrating the rise time of the pulses is not common Slow pulse is set by the command PULS SLEW MAX Any value above 1 8 us is set to maximum The RST setting is MIN S 46 Operating and Programming Reference SCPI COMMAND SUMMARY e PULM SLEW AUTO ON OFF 1 0 e PULM SLEW AUTO Sets and queries the automatic setting of rise time for the pulse modulation system The RST setting is ON e PULM SOURce INTernal EXTernal SCALar e PULM SOURce Sets and queries the source for the pulse modulation control signal RST
398. tion Provides frequency resolution of 1 Hz Option 700 MATE System Compatibility Provides CIIL programming commands for MATE system compatibility Specifications 2c 17 2c 18 Specifications Option 806 Rack Slide Kit Used to rack mount 8360 while permitting access to internal spaces Option 908 Rack Flange Kit Used to rack mount 8360 without front handles Option 910 Extra Operating amp Service Guides Provides a second copy of operating and service guides Option 013 Rack Flange Kit Used to rack mount 8360 with front handles Front handles are standard on the 8360 Option W30 Two Years Additional Return To Agilent Service Does not include biennial calibration Installation 3 CAUTION This chapter provides installation instructions for the Agilent 8360 B Series swept signal generator and its accessories It also provides information about initial inspection damage claims preparation for use packaging storage and shipment This product is designed for use in Installation Category I and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively Initial Inspection Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the swept signal generator has been checked mechanically and electrically The contents of the shipment should agree with the items noted on
399. tion 1 103 GPIB check 1 90 local lockout 1 91 looping and synchronization 1 99 queries and response data 1 95 save recall 1 97 setting up a sweep 1 93 synchronous sweep 1 101 program examples 1 87 105 programmable flatness array C 12 program message examples 1 72 program messages defined 1 63 program message terminators affect on current path 1 68 defined 1 81 syntax diagram 1 80 use in examples 1 64 programming language analyzer P 13 CHIL P 18 SCPI P 14 SCPI commands 13 26 programming language comparison 3 24 programming languages definition of H 1 programming language selection 3 6 pulse delay normal P 15 pulse delay softkeys D 2 pulse delay triggered P 16 pulse envelope M 21 optimizing 1 49 pulse input invert I 12 pulse input BNC P 18 P 19 P 20 pulse input connector C 5 pulse menu P 16 P 17 pulse modulation M 19 delay P 15 gate I 11 internal I 8 leveling M 19 narrow pulses M 21 period I 9 pulse envelope M 21 rate L9 Index 19 Index 20 scalar network analyzer rise time M 22 softkeys P 17 source match M 21 trigger I 11 triggered delay P 16 video feedthrough M 22 width I 10 pulse modulation softkeys P 16 pulse on off external P 18 pulse on off internal P 19 pulse on off scalar P 20 pulse period P 20 pulse rate P 21 pulse rise time internal generator P 21 23 pulse syne out connector C 5 pulse video out connector C 5 pulse width internal generator
400. tion is useful for characterizing and compensating for negative diode detectors used in external leveling Detectors may be characterized by three operating regions as shown in Figure 1 12 the square law the linear and the transition region The following steps use an HP Agilent 437B to automatically characterize the operating regions and use this information to automatically compensate for the detector being used The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 22 assumes that the steps necessary to correctly externally level have been followed Refer to menu map 9 USER CAL NEGATIVE DETECTOR 0 SWEPT SIGNAL GENERATOR 437B POWER METER RF OUTPUT DIRECTIONAL COUPLER POWER SENSOR detcalb cdr Figure 1 22 Automatically Characterizing and Compensating for a Detector Connect the power meter as shown Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor Enter the appropriate power sensor calibration factors into the power meter Enable the power meter sensor cal factor array For operating information on the HP Agilent 437B power meter refer to its operating and service manual Connect the power sensor to the output of the coupler or splitter On the swept signal generator set the power level and start stop frequency information as desired Press USER CAL Select Ext Det Cal The power meter is now under swept signal generator control and is performin
401. tion state on a downward path If this condition is satisfied the trigger system exits upward 1 112 Getting Started Programming loop_ctr 0 INTernal qualified EXTernal event detection LEVel COUPling IMMediate 7 SLOPe e HYSTeresis_ etc lt state_name gt SIGNal increment event_ctr by 1 event_ctr ECOunt YES wait DELay lt state_name gt lMMediate increment loop_ctr by 1 Figure 1 38 Inside an Event Detection State Getting Started Programming 1 113 Inside the Sequence Operation State Figure 1 39 illustrates the operation of the sequence operation state The downward entrance to the Sequence Operation State signals that some instrument dependent action should begin at once An upward exit is not allowed until the instrument signals that its action is complete Note that complete can be defined differently for different instruments For example consider an instrument that can sweep a range of frequencies starting with f and ending with f2 The action complete signal can be defined to coincide with the output of either f or fo Instrument actions complete Figure 1 39 Inside the Sequence Operation State 1 114 Getting Started Programming Common Trigger Configurations In the previous paragraphs you learned about the basic building blocks allowed in a SCPI trigger system Generally an instrument implements only a portion of the
402. tional bridge Follow the instructions to set up the swept signal generator then configure the system as shown in Figure 1 21 The swept signal generator s rear panel language and address switches must be set to 7 and 31 all 1 s to change the language or address of the swept signal generator from the front panel The programming language must be set to Analyzer Refer to menu map 8 System to find the location of softkey Programming Language Analyzer asterisk on active language SWEPT SIGNAL SCALAR GENERATOR NETWORK ANALYZER SWEEP OUTPUT SWEEP INPUT POWER SPLITTER DIRECTIONAL BRIDGE TEST PORT scaflat cdr Figure 1 21 Scalar System Configuration Example Overview In this example you use an HP Agilent 437B power meter to automatically enter correction data into the array It is necessary to turn off the HP Agilent 8757 System Interface controlled from the front panel of the analyzer so that the swept signal generator can temporarily control the power meter over GPIB When the correction data entry process is complete enable user flatness correction and set the desired test port power level Then store the correction table and swept signal generator configuration in the same register that contains the analyzer configuration Re activate the HP Agilent 8757 Getting Started Advanced 1 43 Note 1 44 Getting Started Advanced System Interface and recall the sto
403. to its initial state for programming The RST state is not the same as the PRESET state For complete details of the instrument state at RST see SCPI Command Summary in Chapter 2 70 Select the frequency mode to be SWEEP instead of the default sweep mode of CW that was selected with RST 80 Set the source start frequency to 4 GHz 90 Set the source stop frequency to 7 GHz Note the optional usage of the short form mnemonic FREQ 100 Set the source s power level to 5 dBm Getting Started Programming 1 93 110 Set the sweeptime to 500 ms Notice that upper lower case in commands does not matter Also spaces before the suffix MS are not required in SCPI 120 and 130 Set markers 1 and 2 to a fixed value Notice that the value for marker 2 does not end with a frequency suffix Hertz is a default terminator and is understood 140 Wait until the source has completed setting up the commands that have been sent so far before turning on the output 150 The ENTER statement causes the program to wait here until the source responds to the previous OPC with aT 160 The source has now completed processing the commands The RF frequency power and markers are at their programmed values Turn on the RF output of the source 170 Select a continuously initiated sweep instead of the default mode of non continuous that was selected with RST 180 Clear the computer s display 190 to 220 Prin
404. to set an offset value for all points in the frequency list array SCPI NONE see List Menu Analyzer NONE Enter List Offset List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference G 1 H GPIB Address To set the swept signal generator s GPIB address refer to Address in this manual GPIB Menu Function Group Menu Map Description SYSTEM This softkey reveals the softkeys in the GPIB control menu Adrs Menu Reveals the softkeys that allow GPIB addresses to be changed Programming Language Analyzr Sets analyzer as the external interface language Programming Language CIIL Sets CIIL as the external interface language Programming Language SCPI Sets SCPI as the external interface language Three different programming languages are available m SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments is the instrument control programming language developed by Agilent Technologies to conform to the IEEE 488 2 standard replacing IEEE 728 1982 The IEEE 488 2 standard provides codes formats protocols and common commands that were unavailable in the previous standard m Analyzer is the programming language compatible with the HP Agilent 8340 41 synthesized sweepers system language and many network analyzers a CIIL Control Interface Intermediate Language is the instrument control programming language used in option 700 swept signal genera
405. to set the ALC SHSL lt num gt DB DM to attenuator PL causes the attenuator couple to the ALC ALC POWER LEVEL Set Atten Working with Mixers Reverse Power Effects in Chapter 1 Unlock Info Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SERVICE This softkey causes the swept signal generator to display lock unlocked status of all the phase lock loops An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI DIAGnostics 0U Tput UNLocks Analyzer SHT3 or SHM4 diagnostics test results STATUS MESSAGES Chapter 4 OPERATOR S CHECK and ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Operating and Programming Reference U 1 Up Down Power Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey activates the power step size function It can be set from 0 01 to 20 dB In this mode power is stepped by the up down arrow keys An asterisk next to the key label indicates this feature is active SCPI POWer STEP INCrement lt num gt DB or MAXimum MINimum POWer STEP AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer SP or SHPL and UP or DOWN Up Dn Size CW Up Dn Size Swept Programming Typical Measurements in Chapter 1 Up Dn Size CW Function Group Menu Map Description FREQUENCY This softkey lets you set the frequency step size for the CW frequency mode The step size may be set from 1 Hz to 10 GHz The factory preset size is 100 MHz CW fr
406. tor has finite rise time and overshoot Below 2 0 GHz the rise time and overshoot are essentially independent of frequency but above 2 0 GHz in swept signal generators without Option 006 they are strongly influenced by the passband shape and centering of the tracking YIG filter Source Match The best source match is obtained at the swept signal generator s operating frequency In addition swept signal generators with certain RF components at the output provide improved broadband source match These include swept signal generators with Option 006 with high power output Agilent 83623B and Agilent 83624B or with the Option 001 step attenuator set to gt 10 dB Performance can be improved by padding between the reflections At the source for output power above 10 dBm setting the leveling mode to normal results in 0 dB attenuation If enough power is available uncoupled operation can be used to improve the swept Operating and Programming Reference M 21 Pulse Modulation signal generator s source match by inserting 10 dB attenuation and using a 10 dB higher ALC level Video Feedthrough Video feedthrough is a video signal at the modulation rate that is superimposed on the RF envelope see Figure M 6 If large enough video feedthrough can disturb mixer balance amplifier bias crystal detector output etc Because it is low frequency energy it can disturb systems that are not intended to deal with it especially demodulat
407. tor is lit 5 From the front panel attempt to change the start frequency and verify that this is impossible 6 Verify that all keys except are disabled 7 Now press the LocaL key and verify that the swept signal generator REMOTE LED is off and that you can modify any of the sweep functions 8 Execute a continue on the controller With the controller displaying LOCAL LOCKOUT mode verify that the swept signal generator REMOTE LED is again lit Getting Started Programming 1 91 9 10 11 Attempt to change the start frequency and press PRESET Verify that this is impossible Now press the swept signal generator LOCAL key and verify that still no action is taken Execute a continue on the controller With the controller displaying LOCAL mode verify that the swept signal generator REMOTE LED is off Also verify that all sweep functions now can be modified via the front panel controls HINT Note that the swept signal generator LOCAL key produces the same result as programming LOCAL 719 or LOCAL 7 Be careful because the LOCAL 7 command places all instruments on the GPIB in the local state as opposed to just the swept signal generator Program Comments 1 92 Getting Started Programming 90 to 120 Print a message on the computer s display then pause 130 Place the source into REMOTE 140 Place the source into LOCAL LOCKOUT mode 150 to 190 Print a message on the computer
408. tors Option 700 swept signal generators are M A T E Modular Automatic Test Equipment compatible Operating and Programming Reference H 1 GPIB Menu See Also CONNECTORS GPIB Getting Started Programming in Chapter 1 H 2 Operating and Programming Reference Internal AM Depth Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the AM depth for internally generated AM Use the numeric entry keys arrow keys or rotary knob to change the value of the depth The swept signal generator accepts values from 0 to 99 9 percent 0 percent is equivalent to no modulation and has a resolution of 0 1 percent The factory preset depth is 30 percent SCPI AM DEPTH lt num gt PCT MAXimum MINinum lt num gt DB UNIT AM DB PCT Analyzer NONE MoD also see AM and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference l 1 Internal AM Rate Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the AM rate for internally generated AM Use the numeric entry keys arrow keys or rotary knob to change the rate The swept signal generator accepts values from 1 Hz to 1 MHz however it is specified to 1 MHz only for a sine waveform Refer to the specifications The factory preset rate is 100 kHz SCPI AM INTernal FREQuency lt num gt lt freq suffix gt MAXimum MINimum Analy
409. trigger features available These paragraphs discuss the simplest configurations INIT and TRIG The INIT Configuration The INIT configuration is the simplest possible trigger configuration It uses no event detection states and requires only two subsystems for programming INITiate and ABORt All SCPI instruments implement these two subsystems ABORt RST Sequence Instrument Operation Actions Figure 1 40 The INIT Trigger Configuration Command Parameters Parameter Type ABORt INITiate IMMediate CONTinuous state Boolean Example commands using the INIT trigger configuration ABORt abort operations go to idle INIT IMM execute one sequence operation INIT CONT ON execute sequence operations continuously INIT CONT OFF stop sequence operations after the current one is complete Getting Started Programming 1 115 The TRIG Configuration Instruments using the TRIG configuration include one event detection state named TRIG and a corresponding TRIGger subsystem And all SCPI instruments implement the required INITiate and ABORt subsystems TRIG Event Detection ante Actions Operation Figure 1 41 The TRIG Trigger Configuration 1 116 Getting Started Programming Description of The 8360 B Series swept signal generators follow the SCPI model Triggering in the of triggering It is a layered model with the structure shown in 8360 B Series Swept Figure 1 42 Signa
410. ts passband is centered on the RF output Peaking is used to obtain both the maximum available power and spectral purity and the best pulse FM envelopes at a given frequency This peaking occurs each time the frequency is changed or every seven minutes An asterisk next to the key label indicates this function is active SCPI CALibration PEAKing AUTO ON OFF 1 0 Analyzer RP1 function on RPO function off Auto Track Peak RF Once Tracking Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference P 1 Peak RF Once Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER USER CAL 5 9 This softkey appears in two locations the POWER Tracking Menu and the USER CAL Tracking Menu The operation is the same in both locations This softkey causes an instantaneous one time execution of the peaking function when the swept signal generator is in the CW or manual sweep mode It aligns the output filter SYTM so that its passband is centered on the RF output SCPI CALibration PEA King EXECute Analyzer SHAK Auto Tracking Peak RF Always Tracking Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 POWER LEVEL Function Group Menu Map Description POWER NONE This hardkey lets you control the output power level of the swept signal generator The swept signal generator has different power leveling modes and leveling points
411. tus register analyzer A 19 status registers condition register 1 106 enable register 1 107 event register 1 107 example sequence 1 107 general model 1 106 transition filter 1 107 status register structure SCPI 55 status system overview 1 106 STB S 17 step attenuator A 6 step control master S 64 step control slave S 65 step dwell S 67 stepped frequency mode dwell time S 67 stepped mode number of points S 67 stepped sweep coupled D 10 stepped sweep mode S 74 stepped sweep mode step size 5 68 step points S 67 step points dwell time D 10 step size 5 68 step size CW frequency U 2 Index 23 Index 24 step size power level U 1 step size swept frequency U 3 step sweep functions 68 step sweep trigger automatic S 69 step sweep trigger bus S 70 step sweep trigger external S 70 stimulus response measurements programming example 1 77 stop frequency flatness correction A 26 frequency list A 26 stop frequency key S 71 stop sweep in out connector C 6 storage 3 17 storage registers 1 16 store instrument state command S 17 store instrument state key S 1 string response data discussed in detail 1 86 subsystem commands 1 67 defined 1 67 graphical tree format 1 68 tabular format 1 71 summary bit 1 107 suppression of EOL 1 61 sweep continuous C 11 frequency markers M 1 power P 7 SWEep simplified subsystem command tree 1 71 sweep complete wait command S 17 sweep example
412. u enable the swept signal generator to act as a controller to command an HP Agilent 437B power meter to measure flatness correction values for those frequency points of the flatness array that do not have correction values assigned SCPI NONE Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Mtr Meas Menu Creating and Applying the User Flatness Correction Array in Chapter 1 M 8 Operating and Programming Reference Meter On Off AM Meter Adrs Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also SYSTEM In cases where the swept signal generator is capable of acting as a controller to an HP Agilent 437B power meter this softkey enables you to set the programming address of the power meter The address value can be set from 0 to 30 with the factory default address set at 13 The address value is stored in non volatile memory SCPI DIAGnostics INSTrument P METer ADDRess lt num gt Analyzer NONE Adrss Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Chapter 3 Meter On Off AM Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 only lets you display the value of the depth of the externally generated amplitude modulation SCPI MEASure AM Analyzer NONE MoD also see AM and Modulation Operating and Programming Reference M 9 Meter On Off FM Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Als
413. ubsystem Command Syntax Common Command Syntax Response Message Syntax SCPI Data Types Parameter Types Numeric Parameters Extended Numeric Parameters Discrete Parameters Boolean Parameters Response Data Types Real Response Data Integer Response Data Discrete Response Data String Response Data Programming Typical Measurements In This Subsection Using the Example Programs Use of the Command Tables GPIB Check Example Program 1 Program Comments Local Lockout Demonstration Example Program 2 Program Comments Setting Up A Typical Sweep Example Program 3 Program Comments Lo ee Queries Example Program 4 Program Comments Saving and Recalling States Example Program 5 Program Comments Looping and Synchronization Example Program 6 Program Comments Using the WAI Command Example Program 7 Program Comments Using the User Flatness Correction Commands Example Program 8 Programming the Status System In This Subsection General Status Register Model Condition Register Transition Filter Event Register Enable Register 1 75 1 76 1 77 1 77 1 77 1 77 1 78 1 80 1 80 1 80 1 81 1 81 1 82 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 84 1 85 1 85 1 85 1 85 1 86 1 86 1 86 1 87 1 87 1 87 1 88 1 90 1 90 1 91 1 92 1 93 1 93 1 95 1 95 1 97 1 97 1 99 1 99 1 101 1 101 1 103 1 106 1 106 1 106 1 106 1 107 1 107 1 107 Contents 3 Contents 4 An Example Sequence Programming the Trigger System In This Subs
414. uency changes caused by the modulation are inside the phase locked loop bandwidth and the output will not be linear FM For modulation frequencies below 100 kHz choose DC coupled FM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that AC FM coupling is selected This selection is the factory preset default For swept signal generators without Option 002 see FM On Off 100 kHz SCPI FM FILTer HPASs lt num gt freq suffix MAXimum MINimum lt num gt sets the AC bandwidth to 100 kHz for any value gt 1 kHz and sets the AC bandwidth to 20 Hz for any value lt 1 kHz Analyzer NONE MoD also see FM and Modulation FM Coupling DC Function Group Menu Map Description moD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the FM input to be DC coupled Use DC coupling for modulation rates below 100 kHz In this mode the phase locked loop is de activated This means that the swept signal generator is operating as an open loop sweeper The swept signal generator will not be phase locked and therefore be aware that the phase noise and CW frequency accuracy specifications do not apply An asterisk next to the key label indicates that DC FM coupling is selected The factory preset default is AC coupling For swept signal generators without Option 002 see FM On Off DC Operating and Programming Reference F 11 FM Coupling DC Programming Codes See Also SCPI FM FILTer HPASs lt num gt freq suffix MA Ximum
415. uency list C 11 copy list C 11 correcting for power sensitive devices F 4 correction value enter E 1 correction value entry F 16 COUNt in general programming model 1 112 coupled attenuator A 6 coupled frequency C 13 coupled stepped sweep to sweep time D 10 coupling factor C 12 current path defined 1 68 rules for setting 1 68 custom menus A 22 CW CF coupled C 13 CW frequency C 13 CW frequency step size U 2 CW operation 1 6 Index 5 Index 6 damage claims 3 1 data display area 1 4 data questionable event register clear S 14 data types explained briefly 1 73 date code of firmware S 60 DC FM F 18 decrement key A 21 decrement step size CW frequency U 2 power U 1 decrement step size swept frequency U 3 deep AM D 1 M 15 defaulting language message 2a 1 defined preset P 10 define increment size A 23 define number of points A 24 defining sweep limits 1 6 1 8 definitions of terms 1 63 delete D 3 delete active array entry D 4 delete all D 3 delete array D 3 delete current D 4 delete undefined entry D 4 delta marker 1 14 D 5 delta marker reference D 6 detector coupling factor C 12 detector calibration 1 47 48 E 6 device enter statement 1 61 device output statement 1 60 diagnostics fault information F 1 diode detectors characterization of 1 47 directional coupler coupling factor C 12 disable interface address changes 3 8 disable save S 1 disable user flatness arr
416. ulation signal BNC female rear panel Models Options Pulse Sync Out Option 002 only Outputs a 50 ns wide TTL pulse synchronized to the leading edge of the internally generated pulse BNC female rear panel AM FM Output Option 002 only Outputs the internally generated AM or FM waveform This output can drive 50 ohms or greater The AM output is scaled the same as it is generated either 100 V or 10 dB V The FM scaling depends on the FM deviation selected BNC female rear panel 83620B 10 MHz to 20 GHz 83622B 2 to 20 GHz 83623B 10 MHz to 20 GHz High Power 83624B 2 to 20 GHz High Power 83630B 10 MHz to 26 5 GHz 83640B 10 MHz to 40 GHz 83650B 10 MHz to 50 GHz Option 001 Add Step Attenuator With this option minimum settable output power is 110 dBm Maximum leveled output power is lowered by 1 5 dB to 20 GHz and 2 dB above 20 GHz and 2 5 dB above 40 GHz Option 002 Add Internal Modulation Generator Adds a digitally synthesized internal modulation waveform source on a card to the 8360 It provides signals that would otherwise be supplied to the external modulation inputs Option 004 Rear Panel RF Output Moves the RF Output External ALC Input Pulse Input Output AM Input and FM Input connectors to the rear panel Option 006 Fast Pulse Modulation Improves pulse rise fall time to 10 ns Also effects maximum leveled output power and harmonic performance Option 008 1 Hz Frequency Resolu
417. ulse generator a TTL level pulse sync signal preceding the RF pulse by nominally 80 ns is output at this connector Nominal input impedance 50 ohms damage level 5 5 0 5 volts See modulation specifications BNC female front panel AM Input Nominal input impedance 50 ohms internally switchable to 2 kQ damage level 15 volts See modulation specifications BNC female front panel FM Input Nominal input impedance 50 ohms internally switchable to 600 ohms damage level 15 volts See modulation specifications BNC female front panel Trigger Input Activated on a TTL rising edge Used to externally initiate an analog sweep or to advance to the next point in step or list mode Damage level 5 5 0 5 volts BNC female rear panel Trigger Output Outputs a one microsecond wide TTL level pulse at 1601 points evenly spaced across an analog sweep or at each point in step or list mode BNC female rear panel Specifications 2c 15 2c 16 Specifications 10 MHz Reference Input Accepts 10 MHz 100 Hz 0 to 10 dBm reference signal for operation from external time base Nominal input impedance 50 ohms Damage level 10 5 volts BNC female rear panel 10 MHz Reference Output Nominal signal level 0 dBm nominal output impedance 50 ohms BNC female rear panel Sweep Output Supplies a voltage proportional to the sweep ranging from 0 volts at start of sweep to 10 volts at end of sweep r
418. um power level of 10 dBm Nominal input impedance is 50 Q EXT ALC allows the swept signal generator to be externally leveled This input is used for power meter leveling or negative crystal detector leveling Input impedance in crystal or meter leveling modes is nominally 1 MQ See Specifications for the signal requirements Nominal input impedance is 100 kQ FM INPUT accepts a 8 to 8 V signal when on the 1 MHz V sensitivity or a 1 to 1 V signal when on the 10 MHz V sensitivity Any signal greater than these limits will cause distortion The deviation changes linearly as the FM input changes from 0 to its upper or lower voltage limit The input impedance for this input connector is factory set at 50 Q but can be switched to 600 Q Refer to Adjustments in the Calibration manual Damage level for this input is gt 15 V or lt 15 V PULSE INPUT is TTL compatible A TTL high input gt 2 V causes a maximum selected RF power output while a TTL low input causes minimum RF output gt 80 dB RF on off ratio Nominal input impedance is 50 Q When using internal pulse generator a TTL level pulse sync signal preceding the RF pulse by nominally 70 ns is produced at this connector The electrical requirements of the PULSE INPUT are detailed in Specifications The damage levels for this input are gt 5 5 V or lt 0 5 V PULSE SYNC OUT Option 002 only Outputs a 50 ns wide TTL pulse synchronized to the leadin
419. ument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch PREFACE This manual provides user information for the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series swept signal generator Instruments Covered By This Manual This manual applies to instruments having a serial number prefix listed on the title page behind the Documentation Map tab Some changes may have to be made to this manual so that it applies directly to each instrument refer to Chapter 5 Instrument History to see what changes may apply to your instrument A serial number label Figure 0 1 is attached to the instrument s rear panel A prefix four digits followed by a letter and a suffix five digits unique to each instrument comprise the instrument serial number SERIAL NUMBER nm PREFIX SUFFIX SER 1234A 12345 INSTALLED OPT OPTIONS Gp HEWLETT PACKARD MADE IN USA Figure 0 1 Typical Serial Number Label User s Guide Organization Tabs divide the major chapters of this manual The contents of each chapter is listed in the Table of Contents Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Documentation Documentation Map For a pictorial representation of the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series documentation see the Documentation Map at the front of this manual
420. ure or by entering correction frequencies individually The auto fill feature adds but does not delete correction frequencies There are two basic front panel methods of creating a flatness correction array The first and quickest method is to use an HP Agilent 437B power meter Refer to Figure 1 18 for the setup The second method is just as accurate but requires a little more interaction between the operator and the instruments Figure 1 19 shows the setup for the second method Getting Started Advanced 1 33 Creating a User Flatness Array Automatically Example 1 In this example a flatness array containing correction frequencies from 4 to 10 GHz at 1 GHz intervals is created An HP Agilent 438B power meter controlled by the swept signal generator through the interface bus is used to enter the correction data into the flatness array For this example refer to menu map 5 POWER 1 The equipment setup shown in Figure 1 18 assumes that if the setup has an external leveling configuration the steps necessary to correctly level have been followed If you have questions about external leveling refer to Externally Leveling the Swept Signal Generator Setup Power Meter 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter sensor 3 Enter the appropriate power sensor calibration factors into the power meter 4 Enable the power meter sensor cal factor array For operating information on the HP Agilent 437B power refer to its operating and se
421. urned off When power is turned on register 0 is automatically recalled SAVE RECALL ns FREQUENCY E amp Oe ee INSTRUMENT STATE MODULATION I ie R S lows AN TAS STATUS A Figure 1 9 Saving and Recalling an Instrument State save cdr Save Recall 1 Set up swept signal generator as desired 1 Press RECALL 2 Press SAVE 2 Press a number 0 through 8 3 Press a number 1 through 8 Getting Started Basic 1 17 Power Sweep and Power Slope Operation Power Sweep Operation 1 18 Getting Started Basic The power sweep function allows the power output to be swept positive or negative when the swept signal generator is in the CW frequency mode The power output of the swept signal generator determines the maximum leveled power sweep that can be accomplished For this example refer to the Menu Map section Zero and calibrate the power meter Connect the instruments as shown in Figure 1 10 Press Gi E Press POWER LEVEL 0 dBm Press SWEEP TIME 2 sec SINGLE Set the power meter to dB REF mode The swept signal generator is ready to produce a 4 GHz CW signal at 0 dBm power out with a 2 second sweep rate whenever a single sweep is executed The power meter is ready to measure the power level relative to a starting point of 0 dBm Press POWER MENU Select Power Sweep and enter 7 dB m asterisk on Press SINGLE
422. ust be entered If the number of points requested creates a list that exceeds the number of elements available 801 the following message appears TOO MANY CORRECTION PTS REQUESTED List Menu When selected the swept signal generator waits for a numeric value representing the number of list points to be entered gt Number of List Frequencies is displayed in the active entry area A list of frequencies containing the number of specified points is created automatically The list begins at the auto fill start frequency and ends at the auto fill stop frequency The rest of the points are equally spaced between them A minimum of two points must be entered If the number of points requested creates a list that exceeds the number of points available 801 the following message appears Error too many list points requested Points used 0 Points available 801 SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu List Menu Optimizing Swept Signal Generator Performance in Chapter 1 Operating and Programming Reference A 25 Auto Fill Start Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also FREQUENCY POWER 2 5 This softkey is used in two locations Fltness Menu and List Menu The operation is the same in both applications This softkey enables the entry of a start frequency used to determine the beginning frequency of the automatic filling array The array is not creat
423. ustrate basic SCPI programming principles To understand how your instrument and controller communicate using SCPI you must understand the concepts of program and response messages Program messages are the formatted data sent from the controller to the instrument Conversely response messages are the formatted data sent from the instrument to the controller Program messages contain one or more commands and response messages contain one or more responses The controller may send commands at any time but the instrument sends responses only when specifically instructed to do so The special type of command used to instruct the instrument to send a response message is the query All query mnemonics end with a question mark Queries return either measured values or internal instrument settings Any internal setting that can be programmed with SCPI can also be queried Forgiving Listening and Precise Talking SCPI uses the concept of forgiving listening and precise talking outlined in IEEE 488 2 Forgiving listening means that instruments are very flexible in accepting various command and parameter formats For example the swept signal generator accepts either POWer STATe ON or POWer STATe 1 to turn RF output on Precise talking means that the response format for a particular query is always the same For example if you query the power state when it is on using POWer STATe the response is always 1 regardless of whether you previously
424. uto track failed message 2a 1 auxiliary interface connector C 6 auxiliary output connector C 5 bandwidth ALC A 9 A 10 A 11 AM A 12 A 13 amplitude modulation A 12 A 13 beginning frequency flatness correction A 25 frequency list A 25 bits in general status register model 1 106 summary bit in general status register model 1 107 blank display B 1 BNC connectors C 4 Boolean parameters discussed in detail 1 85 explained briefly 1 75 brackets angle 1 64 BUS trigger source defined 1 119 cabinet clean 4 5 cables GPIB C 7 calco fail F 3 calibrate sweep span always S 74 calibrate sweep span once S 75 calibration full user F 19 sweep span F 15 calibration failed message 2a 2 calibration user functions U 3 calman fail F 4 calYO fail F 4 center frequency 1 8 C 1 CW coupled C 13 center frequency marker C 1 CF span sweep mode zoom Z 1 change correction value C 3 change interface address 3 8 Index 3 Index 4 characterization diode detectors 1 47 checks operator 4 1 CIIL language P 13 clean cabinet 4 5 clean display 4 6 clean fan filter 4 5 clear display B 1 clear fault C 2 clear memory C 2 clear point C 3 clear statement 1 59 CLS S 14 colon examples using 1 69 proper use of 1 69 1 85 types of command where used 1 67 command examples 1 64 commands 1 80 common 1 67 defined 1 63 event 1 72 implied 1 72 query 1 72 subsystem 1 67 syntax 1 81 commands
425. utomatically trigger the steps Set Step Swp Pt Trig Auto on the master When a the scalar network analyzer is the step sweep controller set Step Swp Pt Trig Bus on the master swept signal generator so that the analyzer can trigger the steps Programming Codes SCPI SWEep CONTrol STATe ON OFF 1 0 SWEep CONTrol TYPE MAS Ter Analyzer NONE See Also Step Control Slave Step Swp Menu Operating and Programming Reference S 65 step Control Slave Function Group Menu Map Description FREQUENCY This softkey lets you designate the swept signal generator as the slave in a dual swept signal generator measurement system A dual swept signal generator system two tone measurement system facilitates accurate device characterizations by providing one timebase reference for both sources Figure 5 1 shows the connections required for a two tone system On the message line the status message EXT REF appears indicating the swept signal generator has an external timebase reference The start and stop frequencies of the slave can be offset above or below those set on the master for fixed offset two tone measurements To synchronize properly for swept offset measurements the 0 to 10 volt sweep ramp must be actively sweeping on the slave If a CW frequency is selected as the fixed LO frequency the sweep ramp is deactivated and the proper synchronization does not occur Select a center frequency with zero span to keep the slave s voltage s
426. ve line are deleted The active line is designated by the gt pointer and can be pointing at any of values within the array In the flatness menu application the frequency and associated correction value in the active line is deleted The active line pointer gt can be pointing to either the frequency value or the correction value Programming Codes SCPI NONE see Fltness Menu or List Menu Analyzer NONE See Also Fltness Menu List Menu D 4 Operating and Programming Reference Delta Marker Delete Undef Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also POWER This softkey occurs in the power flatness menu It lets you delete only those points that are undefined Undefined correction values are noted by the display as Undefined SCPI NONE see Fitness Menu Analyzer NONE Fltness Menu Delta Marker Function Group Menu Map Description MARKER This softkey causes the difference in frequency between two markers to appear on the swept signal generator display The frequency difference is indicated in the following format gt DELTA MARKER Im n XXXXX MHz where m the last marker activated n the reference marker and XXXXX represents some frequency value On a CRT display the trace between the two selected markers is intensified An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active At preset factory the swept signal generator is set to measure the di
427. vels maximum available power can be exceeded during small portions of the sweep in this case a flashing UNLVLED message appears ALC leveling accuracy depends on power level Although the ALC level is useable from 20 to 25 dBm it is most accurate from 10 to 10 dBm This fact is reflected in the performance specifications of the swept signal generator Coupled Operation Since many applications require power output less than 20 dBm an optional step attenuator has a range of 0 to 90 dB in 10 dB steps With this option power output down to 110 dBm is achieved when the Step Attenuator and Level Control Circuits work in conjunction see Figure A 1 With the attenuator the ALC level is normally used over the smaller more accurate portion of its range Since ALC level accuracy suffers below 10 dBm and at some frequencies only 1 dBm of RF output is available the ALC level is set between 10 and 0 dBm For power less than 100 dBm the attenuator is set to 90 dB and the ALC level is used from 10 to 20 dBm At frequencies where power output above 0 dBm is desired the attenuator is set to 0 dB and the ALC level is used from 0 to 25 dBm or whatever power is available at the RF frequency in use Coupled operation is assumed by the swept signal generator unless Uncoupl Atten or Leveling Mode ALCoff is selected The proper combination of ALC level and attenuator setting is decided by the A 6 Operating and Progra
428. verse power is actually larger than the ALC level which may result in the swept signal generator output being shut off Figure 1 17 shows the same setup with uncoupled operation used to produce the same 8 dBm output In this case ATTEN 10 dB ALC Level 2 dBm The ALC level is 10 dB higher and the attenuator reduces the LO feedthrough by 10 dB Thus the detector sees a 2 dBm desired signal versus a possible 15 dBm undesired signal This 17 dB difference results in a maximum 0 1 dB shift in the swept signal generator output level To set the swept signal generator to the attenuator uncoupled mode as discussed in this example do the following 1 Press POWER menu 2 Select Set Atten and press 1 0 dB m This step does two things it uncouples the attenuator from the rest of the ALC system and it lets you set an attenuator value in this case 10 dB 3 Press POWER LEVEL 2 dB m This sets the ALC level to 2 dBm For more information on the ALC or setting power level refer to ALC or POWER LEVEL in Chapter 2 SYNTHESIZER WITH OPTION 001 RF LEVEL CONTROL MEASURES 8 dBm DETECTOR ALC LEVEL SYNTHESIZER WITH OPTION 001 ALC LEVEL 2 dBm RF LEVEL CONTROL MEASURES 2 dBm o RF OUTPUT MIXER 8 dBm ATTENUATOR LO O dB a LO FEED LO LEVEL THROUGH 10 dBm DETECTOR 5dBm IF MEASURES
429. want to change the address use the keypad to enter the desired address 0 to 30 then press ENTER If the swept signal generator displays Rear panel GPIB address must be 31 11111 in order to change current address XX the address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 is set to something other than 31 all 1s How to Prevent a Front Panel Change to a GPIB Address To disable the address softkeys set the instrument address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 to any address other than 31 all Is How to Set the GPIB Address on a Swept Signal Generator without a Front Panel If your swept signal generator does not have a front panel set the address on the rear panel GPIB switch Figure 3 2 to the address you want factory default is 19 All of the externally mounted connectors on the instrument are discussed in CONNECTORS in Chapter 2 If you are interested in the part number for a connector see Replaceable Parts in the Agilent Technologies 8360 B Series Swept Signal Generator 8360 L Series Swept CW Generator Service Guide To keep the internal timebase frequency reference oven at operating temperature the swept signal generator must be connected to ac line power The swept signal generator requires approximately 30 minutes to warm up from a cold start before the OVEN display message goes off With a stable outside temperature internal temperature equilibrium is reached after approximately tw
430. weep ramp active and ensure proper synchronization For synthesized step sweep measurements set the number of sweep points on the slave the same as on the master swept signal generator If the master swept signal generator is connected to a network analyzer the analyzer automatically sets the master swept signal generator s step size to match the number of points displayed on the analyzer Since the slave swept signal generator is not connected to the analyzer set the slave to match the master swept signal generator Allow the master to trigger the slave s steps Set Step Swp Pt Trig Ext on the slave swept signal generator For ramp sweep measurements on the slave set the sweep time equivalent to the master swept signal generator If the master is connected to a network analyzer the slave s sweep time is slightly longer than the master s because the analyzer does not stop the sweep precisely on the last point and if the sweep times are set to the same value the system may lock up Use the following formula to determine the slave s sweep time for a system controlled by an analyzer SweepTimemaster X 1 03 SweepTimesjaye Setting the slave s sweep time 1 03 times greater the master s sweep time results in the slave sweep being 97 of the set value When a reduced sweep is not acceptable sweep times can be set to the same value Lock ups can be cleared by reentering the slave s sweep time For fixed offset ramp sweep measu
431. with Detectors Couplers Splitters In externally leveled operations the output power from the swept signal generator is detected by an external sensor The output of this detector is returned to the leveling circuitry and the output power is automatically adjusted to keep power constant at the point of detection Figure 1 11 illustrates a typical setup for external leveling When externally leveled the power level feedback is taken from the external negative detector input rather than the internal detector This feedback voltage controls the ALC system to set the desired RF output Refer to Figure A 1 in Chapter 2 for a block diagram of the swept signal generator s ALC circuitry SWEPT SIGNAL GENERATOR De oo oo oa a oa oa oo00 oo0000 oooo onon Po ae 0000 RF OUTPUT DIRECTIONAL COUPLER NEGATIVE DETECTOR LEVELED OUTPUT Figure 1 11 ALC Circuit Externally Leveled Getting Started Advanced 1 23 Note Hint 1 24 Getting Started Advanced To level externally 1 Set up the equipment as shown For this example the detector coupler setup is used Refer to menu map 1 Press ALC Select Leveling Point ExtDet Set the coupling factor Select Coupling Factor 2 0 E m e oN Power splitters have a coupling factor of 0 dB Figure 1 12 shows the input power versus output voltage characteristics for typical
432. y through the command tree Getting Started Programming 1 69 BB cc DD EE FF GG HH JJ Q Sets current path to ROOT 1 AA CC M NO change to current path 2 AA BB 0 Set current path DOWN one level 3 AA DD HH JJ PELIPET 4 AA BB EE AA DD JJ Figure 1 26 Proper Use of the Colon and Semicolon In Figure 1 26 notice how proper use of the semicolon can save typing Sending this message AA BB EE FF GG Is the same as sending these three messages AA BB EE AA BB FF AA BB GG 1 70 Getting Started Programming Subsystem Command Tables These paragraphs introduce a more complete compact way of documenting subsystems using a tabular format The command table contains more information than just the command hierarchy shown in a graphical tree In particular these tables list command parameters for each command and response data formats for queries To begin this exploration of command tables consider a simplified SWEep subsystem for the swept signal generator in both the graphical and tabular formats SWEep DWELI GENeration MANual AUTO POINt RELative Figure 1 27 Simplified SWEep Command Tree Table 1 2 SWEep Command Table Command Parameters Parameter Type SW Eep DWELI AUTO state Boolean ONCE GENeration MANual POINt RELative Reading the Command Table Note the three columns in the command table labeled Command Parameters and Parameter Type Comman
433. zer NONE MOD also see AM and Modulation Internal AM Waveform Noise Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also oD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the AM waveform to noise white noise AM rate gaussian distribution centered around AM depth for internally generated AM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The factory preset default is sine wave SCPI AM INTernal FUNCtion NOISe Analyzer NONE MOD also see AM and Modulation l 2 Operating and Programming Reference Internal AM Waveform Sine Internal AM Waveform Ramp Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also moD This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the AM waveform to ramp for internally generated AM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active The factory preset default is sine wave SCPI AM INTernal FUNCtion RAMP Analyzer NONE MoD also see AM and Modulation Internal AM Waveform Sine Function Group Menu Map Description Programming Codes See Also 5 This softkey Option 002 only lets you set the AM waveform to sine wave for internally generated AM An asterisk next to the key label indicates that this feature is active Sine wave is the factory preset waveform SCPI AM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid Analyzer NONE MoD also see AM

8360 B-Series Swept Signal Generator User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents